Crown QMS Technical information

QMS® 1660E
Print System
Reference
1800384-001B
Trademarks
The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Those listed as registered are registered in the United States Patent and Trademark
Office. Some trademarks are also registered in other countries. Other product names
mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. QMS, the QMS logo, Crown, the Crown seal, CrownNet, PS
Executive Series/QMS, Inc. Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems
Incorporated, registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office. PostScript
is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated for a page description language and
may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Throughout this manual, “PostScript Level 2”
is used to refer to a set of capabilities defined by Adobe Systems for its PostScript
Level 2 page description language. These capabilities, among others, are implemented
in this product through a QMS-developed emulation that is compatible with Adobe's
PostScript Level 2 language. Apple, AppleTalk, ImageWriter, LaserWriter, Macintosh,
EtherTalk, and LocalTalk/Apple Computer, Inc. PhoneNET/Farallon Computing, Inc.
CompuServe/H & R Block. DEC, DECnet, VMS, LN03/Digital Equipment Corporation.
Hewlett-Packard, HP, PCL HP-GL, LaserJet/Hewlett-Packard Co. IBM PC, AT, PC/XT,
Token-Ring/International Business Machines Corporation. Intel/Intel Corporation.
Microsoft, MS-DOS/Microsoft Corporation. ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Zapf Chancery,
ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Dingbats/International Typeface Corporation. Helvetica,
Palatino, and Times/Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries. Novell, NetWare/Novell,
Inc. UNIX/UNIX Systems Laboratories, Inc. Ethernet, Xerox/Xerox Corporation. Velcro
is a trademark of Velcro USA, Inc. Samsung/Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. The
ENERGY STAR logo is a trademark of the United States Environmental Protection
Agency. The ENERGY STAR emblem does not represent EPA endorsement of any
product or service.
Proprietary Statement
The digitally encoded software included with your QMS 1660E Print System is
Copyrighted © 1994 by QMS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. This software may not be
reproduced, modified, displayed, transferred, or copied in any form or in any manner or
on any media, in whole or in part, without the express written permission of QMS, Inc.
Copyright Notice
This manual is Copyrighted © 1994 by QMS, Inc., One Magnum Pass, Mobile, AL
36618. All Rights Reserved. This manual may not be copied in whole or in part, nor
transferred to any other media or language, without the express written permission of
QMS, Inc.
Contents
1
Introduction
Introduction .................................................................................. 1-2
About This Manual ....................................................................... 1-2
Typographic Conventions 1-4
2
Print Media
Introduction .................................................................................. 2-2
Media Sizes, Imageable Areas, and Margins ............................. 2-2
Guaranteed Imageable Area 2-2
Enhanced Image-Area 2-4
Page Margins 2-4
Media Types and Weights ........................................................... 2-4
Labels 2-4
Paper 2-5
Postcards 2-5
Transparencies 2-5
Media Storage .............................................................................. 2-6
3
Professional Printing
Introduction .................................................................................. 3-2
About Typefaces and Fonts ....................................................... 3-2
Typeface Classification 3-3
Typography Terms 3-4
Resident Fonts, Typefaces, and Symbol Sets .......................... 3-7
Resident PostScript Fonts 3-7
Resident HP PCL Fonts 3-9
Resident HP-GL Symbol Sets 3-10
Optional Fonts ........................................................................... 3-10
4
Printer Configuration
Introduction .................................................................................. 4-2
Methods of Configuration ........................................................... 4-2
Using an Application 4-2
Using PS Executive Series Utilities 4-3
Using Printer Commands 4-3
Using the Control Panel 4-4
Using a Remote Console 4-4
Configuration Menu ..................................................................... 4-5
Accessing the Configuration Menu 4-5
Selecting Configuration Menu Options 4-6
Changing Character Information 4-7
Saving Configuration Changes 4-10
Canceling Configuration Changes 4-10
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration 4-11
Configuration Menu Options .................................................... 4-12
Collation ..................................................................................... 4-13
ii
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Copies .........................................................................................4-13
Emulations ..................................................................................4-14
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
ESP Default Parameters 4-14
HP-GL Parameters 4-14
HP PCL 5 Parameters 4-18
Lineprinter Parameters 4-24
PostScript Parameters 4-27
Hard Disks ..................................................................................4-29
Formatting a Hard Disk 4-29
Installing an Optional Font 4-30
Removing an Optional Font 4-30
Interfaces ....................................................................................4-31
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Ethernet Interface Parameters 4-31
LocalTalk Interface Parameters 4-31
Optional Network Interface Parameters 4-31
Parallel Interface Parameters 4-31
Serial Interface Parameters 4-35
Media Input .................................................................................4-41
Selecting a Media Input Source 4-41
Chaining Media Input Sources 4-41
Naming Media Input Sources 4-42
Media Orientation .......................................................................4-43
Media Output ..............................................................................4-43
Naming the Media Outputbin 4-43
Media Size ...................................................................................4-43
Identifying the Media Size 4-43
Identifying a Default Media Size 4-44
Memory .......................................................................................4-45
Disk Cache 4-45
Display 4-47
Emulation 4-47
Emulation (Temporary) 4-47
Enable Disk Swap 4-48
Frame Buffer 4-49
PostScript Fonts 4-50
PostScript Heap 4-51
Printer Memory 4-51
Spooling 4-51
Contents
iii
Optional Features ...................................................................... 4-52
Passwords .................................................................................. 4-53
Selecting Passwords 4-53
Enabling Passwords 4-54
Using Passwords 4-54
Printer Engine Features ............................................................ 4-55
Adjusting the Image Alignment 4-55
Enabling/Disabling the Warning Buzzer 4-57
Specifying Page Recovery Action 4-57
Setting Default Resolution 4-57
Setting Toner Options 4-58
Setting Energy Conservation 4-58
Printer Start-Up Options ........................................................... 4-59
Enabling/Disabling the Start-Up Page 4-59
Enabling/Disabling the SYS\START File 4-60
Loading the PostScript Error Handler 4-60
Special Pages ............................................................................ 4-61
Working with Status Pages 4-61
Working with Calibration Pages 4-62
Working with Header Pages 4-62
Working with Trailer Pages 4-63
Timeouts ..................................................................................... 4-64
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
5
an Emulation Timeout 4-64
an ESP Timeout 4-65
a Manual Feed Timeout 4-65
a PostScript Emulation Timeout 4-66
a Print Job Timeout 4-66
Additional Technical
Information
Introduction .................................................................................. 5-2
Printer-Host Communication ...................................................... 5-2
Interface 5-2
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO) 5-2
ESP Technology 5-2
Communication Modes 5-3
iv
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Gamma Correction, Halftones, and Screens ............................. 5-4
Terms 5-4
Gamma Correction Concept 5-7
A Special Note for QuarkXPress Users 5-8
Memory ......................................................................................... 5-9
QMS Memory Management 5-10
Memory Terms 5-10
Evaluation of Your Printing Environment 5-13
Memory Clients 5-15
Hard Disk Management 5-22
Specific Printing Environment Example 5-23
End Job Mode .............................................................................5-24
Common Reasons to Use End Job Mode 5-24
Using the EOD Commands 5-25
Setting the End Job Mode for the Serial and Parallel Protocols 5-26
Setting the End Job Mode via the Control Panel 5-27
Adding an EOD Command to Your File 5-28
Creating a Network Job Separator 5-29
Parallel Interface Modes ............................................................5-30
Byte Mode 5-30
Compatibility Mode 5-31
ECP (Enhanced Compatibility Port) Mode 5-31
EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port) Mode 5-31
Nibble Mode 5-31
PS Protocol Option ....................................................................5-31
Options 5-33
Advantages 5-34
Implementation 5-34
HP-GL Color Encoding ..............................................................5-34
6
Printer Options
Introduction .................................................................................. 6-2
Media Input Options ..................................................................... 6-3
Paper Cassettes 6-3
Paper Feeder 6-4
Cassette Supporter 6-9
500-Sheet Paper Cassette 6-12
Contents
v
Paper Output Ramp ................................................................... 6-14
Font and Security Cards ........................................................... 6-15
Using a Font Card 6-16
Removing a Font Card 6-17
Using a Security Card 6-18
Removing the Printer and Controller Board Covers .............. 6-20
Procedure 6-21
Replacing the Printer and Controller Board Covers .............. 6-23
Procedure 6-24
Single In-Line Memory Modules ............................................... 6-25
Installing a SIMM 6-26
Removing a SIMM 6-28
Intellifont SIMM .......................................................................... 6-30
Installing the Intellifont SIMM 6-30
Increasing the Disk Cache Size 6-32
Verifying the Installation 6-32
Font List 6-33
Accessing the Fonts 6-34
1200x1200 dpi Resolution Daughterboard .............................. 6-35
Daughterboard Assembly Kit 6-35
Installing the Daughterboard 6-36
Optional Interfaces .................................................................... 6-37
CrownNet Network Interface 6-38
LocalTalk Interface 6-39
Optional Interface Assembly Kit 6-39
Installing an Optional Interface 6-39
Using a CrownNet Network Interface 6-43
Using a LocalTalk Interface 6-43
Storage Options ......................................................................... 6-55
IDE-SCSI Board 6-55
Internal IDE Hard Disk 6-61
External SCSI Hard Disks 6-65
The Disk Operations Menu 6-66
Formatting a Hard Disk 6-67
Using a Hard Disk 6-68
Installing an Optional Font 6-69
Removing an Optional Font 6-70
Downloading an Emulation 6-72
vi
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Kanji Option Kit ..........................................................................6-73
Installing the IDE-SCSI Board and the Kanji Internal IDE Hard Disk
6-73
Configuring the Printer 6-74
Accessing the Kanji Fonts 6-74
Updating System Software ........................................................6-75
Choosing the Appropriate System Software Files for Downloading 676
Installing the System Software 6-76
Downloading System Software to a Functional Printer—SYSTEMDL.PS 6-78
Downloading System Software to a Functional Printer—SYSTEM.DL
6-81
Downloading System Software to a Non-Functional Printer 6-86
A
QMS Customer Support
Sources of Support ..................................................................... A-2
Your QMS Vendor A-2
Your Application Vendor A-2
Q-FAX A-2
The QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System A-3
CompuServe A-3
Internet A-3
QMS Customer Response Center (CRC) A-4
QMS National Service A-4
QMS World-wide Offices ............................................................ A-5
B
Technical Specifications
Print Engine Specifications ........................................................ B-2
Controller Specifications ............................................................ B-3
Electrical Requirements ............................................................. B-4
Environmental Requirements .................................................... B-4
Physical Characteristics ............................................................. B-5
Print Media ................................................................................... B-5
Contents
vii
Print Media Sizes B-6
Cable Pinouts ...............................................................................B-7
Centronics/IEEE 1284 Parallel B-7
RS-232C Serial B-9
LocalTalk (Optional Interface) B-11
Macintosh to Serial B-11
Ethernet B-12
Printer Options ..........................................................................B-13
Consumable Supplies ...............................................................B-14
Warranty Considerations ..........................................................B-14
Consumables and Your Warranty B-14
Electrostatic Discharge and Your Warranty B-15
C
Document Option
Commands
Introduction ..................................................................................C-2
Supported DOC Commands .......................................................C-2
Header/Trailer Page Commands C-2
HP-GL Emulation Commands C-2
HP PCL 5 Emulation Commands C-3
Lineprinter Emulation Commands C-3
PostScript Emulation Commands C-4
Printer Commands C-4
Updated DOC Commands ...........................................................C-5
PCL 5 Emulation Terminology C-5
Updated PCL 5 DOC Commands C-8
D
Notices
Manual Notice ..............................................................................D-2
Laser Safety .................................................................................D-2
FCC Compliance ..........................................................................D-2
viii
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Energy Star Compliance ............................................................. D-4
Canadian Users ........................................................................... D-4
Colophon ..................................................................................... D-4
Glossary
Index
Contents
ix
1
Introduction
In This Chapter...
n
n
About this manual
Typographic conventions
Introduction
Introduction
This manual provides information you may need only once in a while.
Use it in conjunction with your other QMS 1660E Print System documentation.
This chapter gives you a brief overview of this manual.
About This Manual
The information in this manual is divided into the following sections:
1 Introduction
Provides an overview of the manual.
2 Print Media
Lists print media sizes, margins, and
imageable areas and provides media
storage information.
3 Professional Printing
Discusses typographic terms,
displays the printer’s typefaces, and
provides some page design tips.
4 Printer Configuration
5 Additional Technical
Information
1-2
Explains the methods of configuring
the printer, demonstrates how to use
printer control panel, and provides a
complete discussion of the
configuration menu.
Discusses printer-host
communication, memory terms and
configuration, end job mode, IEEE
1284 bidirectional parallel interface
modes, PS Protocol, HP-GL color
encoding, and PCMCIA card slots.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
About This
Manual
6
Printer Options
A QMS Customer
Support
B Technical
Specifications
C Document Option
Commands
D Notices
Glossary
Index
Introduction
Describes how to install and use
additional paper cassettes, a paper
feeder, and a paper cassette
supporter; font, emulation, and
security cards; memory upgrades
(SIMMs); an Intellifont font SIMM;
1200x1200 dpi resolution
daughterboard; LocalTalk and
network interfaces; an IDE-SCSI hard
disk drive board, an internal IDE hard
disk, an internal Kanji font IDE hard
disk, and external SCSI hard disks.
Provides world-wide product sales
and support telephone numbers and
describes how to communicate with
QMS through the QMS Bulletin
Board, CompuServe, the Internet and
Q-FAX.
Provides technical specifications for
the printer and lists available supplies
and replacement parts.
Lists printer-supported Document
Option Commands (DOCs), provides
updated HP PCL 5 terminology, and
discusses updated DOCs.
Lists manual and legal notices.
Defines commonly used terms.
1-3
About This
Manual
Typographic Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
»
Mixed-Case
Courier
Text you type, and messages and information
displayed on the screen
Mixed-Case
Italic
Courier
Variable text you type; replace the italicized word(s)
with information specific to your printer or computer
UPPERCASE
COURIER
Information displayed in the printer message
window
lowercase
bold
PostScript operators and DOS commands
lowercase
italic
Variable information in text and PostScript variables
UPPERCASE
File and utility names
↵
Press the Enter key (PC) or Return key (Macintosh)
^
Press and hold down the Ctrl key (PC)
Note: Notes contain tips, extra information, or important information
that deserves emphasis or reiteration.
▲ Caution: Cautions present information that you need to know to
avoid equipment damage, process failure, or extreme annoyance.
M
WARNING! Warnings indicate the possibility of personal injury if a
specific procedure is not performed exactly as described in the
manual.
ACHTUNG! Bitte halten Sie sich exakt an die im Handbuch
beschriebene Vorgehensweise, da sonst Verletzungsgefahr
bestehen könnte.
v
1-4
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
2
Print Media
In This Chapter . . .
n
n
Media sizes, margins, and imageable areas
Media storage
Introduction
Introduction
This chapter lists the media sizes and imageable areas supported by
the QMS 1660E Print System, and then provides information on
selecting and storing media.
Media Sizes, Imageable
Areas, and Margins
Your printer supports media in a number of sizes. Each media size
has a certain guaranteed imageable area. Some media sizes also
have an enhanced image-area.
▲ Caution: The media size must match the cassette size. Since the
cassette sends a size signal to the printer controller, using the wrong
size media will cause your image to be positioned incorrectly on the
page or clipped. You may purchase additional cassettes from your
QMS vendor.
Guaranteed Imageable Area
The guaranteed imageable area is the area on which the printer is
guaranteed to print clearly and without distortion. This area is subject
to both hardware limits (the physical media size and the margins
required by the printer) and software constraints (the amount of memory available for the full-page frame buffer).
2-2
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Sizes,
Imageable
Areas, and
Margins
The following table lists the size, guaranteed imageable area, and
feed edge (the edge of the media drawn into the printer first) of all
supported media:
Media
Media Size
Inches
Millimeters
Imageable Area
Inches
Feed
Edge
Millimeters
11x17
12x19
11.00x17.00 279.40x431.80
11.70x19.50 297.18x495.30
10.69x16.66 271.61x432.17
11.37x19.16 288.80x486.66
Short
Short
A3
A4
A5
A6/Postcard
11.69x16.54
8.27x11.69
5.83x8.27
4.13x5.85
11.38x16.20
7.92x11.38
5.48x7.96
3.82x5.50
289.22x411.48
201.38x289.22
139.32x202.18
97.19x139.82
Short
Long
Long
Short
B4
B5
B6
10.12x14.32 257.05x363.73
7.16x10.12 181.86x257.05
5.06x7.17
128.52x182.12
9.81x13.98
6.82x9.81
4.74x6.82
249.26x355.09
173.23x249.26
120.56x173.35
Short
Long
Short
Executive
7.25x10.50
6.94x10.16
176.44x258.06
Short
Full Ledger
11.70x17.40 297.18x441.96
11.37x17.16 288.80x435.86
Short
Legal
Letter
8.50x14.00
8.50x11.00
8.18x13.66
8.16x10.69
207.94x346.96
207.26x271.61
Short
Long
Universal
11.70x17.00 297.18x431.80
11.38x16.66 287.02x429.26
Short
296.93x420.12
210.06x296.93
148.09x210.06
104.90x148.59
184.15x266.70
215.90x355.60
215.90x279.40
Working Within the Guaranteed Imageable Area
The guaranteed imageable areas for print media on your QMS 1660E
Print System are not centered vertically on their respective pages and
may vary 1/16" (1.6 mm). You can align the image in several different
ways:
n
n
n
n
Adjust the margins or page size through your application.
Use the printer’s control panel (Administration/Engine/Image
Alignment menu).
Use the PS Executive Series Utilities. See the on-line help for
instructions.
Use the PostScript translate and scale operators to reduce
image size and change its placement on the page.
Print Media
2-3
Media Types
and Weights
Enhanced Image-Area
The enhanced image-area allows you to print to the edges of 11x17,
12x19, A3, A4, full ledger, and universal media.
▲ Caution: Due to print engine constraints, full-sheet images may be
slightly skewed on the page. In addition, QMS cannot certify the print
quality of text and graphics printed outside the guaranteed imageable
area.
Page Margins
Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow
you to set custom page sizes and margins while others have only
standard page sizes and margins from which to choose. If you
choose a standard format, you may lose part of your image (due to
imageable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page, use
those sizes given for the imageable area for optimum results.
Media Types and Weights
Your printer supports labels, paper, postcards, and transparencies in
a number of sizes. Although the printer is not specifically designed for
envelope printing, you may want to test print a standard envelope to
see if the print quality is suitable for your needs. See “Envelopes:
Special Considerations” in chapter 2, “Consumables,” of the
Operation manual for more information on printing envelopes.
Labels
Type
Use only labels recommended for laser printers, such as Avery 5260.
Adhesive label stock has pressure-sensitive (peel-and-stick)
adhesive backing.
2-4
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Types
and Weights
Weight
The printer supports 17-34 lb (64-128 g/m2) labels in the multipurpose
tray.
Paper
Type
Use only paper recommended for laser printers, such as Hammermill
Laser Print. Thicker paper, such as Xerox 4024 (28 lb [105 g/m2]), is
also acceptable in the multipurpose tray.
»
Note: We recommend that you do not print on perforated or 3-hole
punched paper.
Weight
The printer supports the following weights of paper:
n
n
Multipurpose tray—17-34 lb (64-128 g/m2)
Paper cassettes—17-24 lb (64-90 g/m2)
Postcards
Weight
The printer supports 17-34 lb (64-128 g/m2) postcards in the multipurpose tray.
Transparencies
Type
Use only transparencies recommended for laser printers, such as
Canon brand type D and 3M type PP2500.
Weight
The printer supports 17-34 lb (64-128 g/m 2) transparencies in the
multipurpose tray.
Print Media
2-5
Media Storage
Media Storage
Improperly stored media increases the chance of paper jams during
printing and can drastically affect the print quality of the printed page.
Keep media in good condition by storing it
n
n
n
n
In its wrapper
On a flat surface
In a closed cabinet
In a cool, dry area
v
2-6
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
3
Professional
Printing
In This Chapter . . .
n
n
n
n
About typefaces and fonts
Typography terms
Typeface classification
Resident typefaces, fonts, and symbol sets
Introduction
Introduction
This chapter defines common terms used in the description of fonts
and typefaces, and displays the printer’s resident typefaces.
About Typefaces and Fonts
Many of the terms and phrases used in desktop publishing are
derived from the language of professional printers and typesetters.
This section explains common words and phrases used when discussing typefaces.
Typeface
A named design of a set of
printed characters, such as
Times, that has a specified
obliqueness (degree of slant)
and stroke weight (thickness of
stroke). It does not define a
particular size.
Font
A set of characters of the same
typeface (such as Times), style
(such as italic), stroke weight
(such as bold), and point size
(such as 10). Although you hear
the term “font” used more
generally, as if referring to a
typeface, it’s really a subset of a
typeface.
3-2
Typeface Family
A group of similar typefaces.
For example, the Times
typeface family consists of four
typefaces: Times Roman, Times
Bold, Times Italic, and Times
Bold Italic.
Character Set
A collection of symbols
designed for various printing
applications. Many character
sets are composed of the
letters (uppercase and
lowercase A-Z), digits (0-9),
and any symbol (such as blank
space, dollar sign, and
ampersand). Other character
sets are composed entirely of
symbols.
QMS 1660E Print System User's Guide
About
Typefaces and
Fonts
Typeface Classification
One way of classifying the different typefaces is to group them into
the following categories:
Serif
A serif is a decorative line or tail on the ends of the strokes of a letter.
Serifs, usually on the lower half of a letter, have also been
referred to as feet or curlicues.
Courier, ITC Bookman, New
Century Schoolbook, Palatino,
and Times are serif typefaces. In the example shown, all the letters
except “e” and “o” have serifs.
Times Roman
Sans Serif
Helvetica
Sans serif (“sans” is French for
“without”) indicates a typeface
without any of these small tails. A
sans serif typeface is decorative by the shape and styling of its letters
but has less detail than a serif typeface. Helvetica, Helvetica
Condensed, Helvetica Narrow, and ITC Avant Garde Gothic are all
sans serif typefaces. In the example shown above, the slight curving
at the bottom of the letters “t” and “a” is not a serif. It is part of the line
forming the letter rather than a decorative line added on.
Script
Script typefaces simulate handwriting or brush lettering. Each letter is
connected visually, if not
physically. ITC Zapf Chancery is a
script typeface.
Zapf Chancery
Professional Printing
3-3
About
Typefaces and
Fonts
Pi or Symbol
Σψµβολ
Pi or symbol typefaces are
collections of assorted specialpurpose characters (for example,
decorative, graphic, math, or
monetary characters). They are especially useful for highlighting items
in lists, providing graphics, and displaying symbols that might
otherwise have to be drawn in by hand. Many typefaces today include
a complement of the more commonly used pi characters. Symbol and
ITC Zapf Dingbats are pi typefaces.
Typography Terms
Monospacing
The terms “monospaced” and “fixed-pitch” refer to a typeface whose
characters all have uniform and equal spacing. These typefaces are
useful for spreadsheets and other documents with columnar data.
Monospacing is the opposite of proportional spacing.
Proportional Spacing
The term “proportionally spaced” refers to a typeface in which the
width of each character varies. For example, the letter “i” is thinner
than the letter “m” and therefore takes up less space. Proportional
spacing saves page space and is easier on the eye. This manual’s
text uses the Helvetica font, a proportionally spaced typeface.
Because proportionally spaced typefaces place each character according to its individual size, they
increase legibility and readability.
This example shows the difference
between a monospaced typeface (Courier) and a typeface (Times).
alphabet
alphabet
3-4
QMS 1660E Print System User's Guide
About
Typefaces and
Fonts
Bitmapped Font
A bitmapped font is a one in which each
character is represented by a set of dot
patterns. Each font size requires a different
set of dot patterns.
Scalable Font
A scalable font is one in which each character’s dot pattern (bitmap)
is generated from a mathematical representation (or outline) of the
character. Scalable fonts eliminate the need to store many different
font sizes.
Point Size
Point size refers to the height of a proportionally spaced typeface. A
point is a unit of measure equal to 1/72". Therefore, the larger the point
size, the larger the letter. The following example shows characters in
8, 10, 12, 24, and 36 point sizes:
AB
C
DE
Pitch
Pitch refers to the number of characters per horizontal inch (cpi) in a
monospaced typeface. Therefore, the larger the pitch, the smaller the
letter. For example, a ten-pitch typeface
mathematic
prints ten characters per inch (or 10 cpi)
while a twelve-pitch typeface prints
0
1
twelve characters per inch (or 12 cpi).
mathematical
The example shows ten-pitch and twelve0
1
pitch Courier.
Professional Printing
3-5
About
Typefaces and
Fonts
Stroke Weight
Pa
lat
ino
Pa
lat
in
o
Stoke weight (light/medium/bold) is the
width (thickness), of the lines (strokes) that
make up a character. The example at left
shows the medium and bold weights of
Palatino.
Italic and Oblique Forms
Italic was originally developed in
the early sixteenth century as a
typeface based on cursive
handwriting. Today’s italics are
still individually crafted typefaces
designed to blend with a specific roman (upright) typeface.
Times Roman
Times Italic
ITC Avant Garde Roman
ITC Avant Garde Oblique
Oblique (or slanted) type
forms, however, are not
designed and crafted
individually but are mechanically slanted versions of the roman form
from which they derive.
Orientation
Orientation is the direction of the print or image on a page. Portrait
orientation reads from left to right, across the narrower dimension of
the page. Landscape orientation also reads from left to right but
places the print across the wider dimension of the page. Spreadsheet
and table applications commonly use landscape printing. Both terms
3-6
QMS 1660E Print System User's Guide
Resident Fonts,
Typefaces, and
Symbol Sets
derive from painting; a portrait is usually a vertical view while a landscape is usually a horizontal view.
Portrait
AbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcde
fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrst
uvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefg
hijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
wxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
AbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcde
fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrst
uvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefg
hijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
wxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
AbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcde
fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrst
uvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefg
hijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
wxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
AbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcde
fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrst
Landscape
AbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbc
defghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefg
hijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijkl
mnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmno
pqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrs
tuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw
wxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
AbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbc
defghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefg
hijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijkl
mnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmno
pqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrs
tuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzAbcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw
Resident Fonts, Typefaces,
and Symbol Sets
Resident PostScript Fonts
The following 39 PostScript fonts are resident in your printer. See
your QMS vendor if you are interested in expanding your printer's
typeface families.
All of these typeface families are authentic: they are licensed, they
carry the true name, and they have multilingual character sets.
Professional Printing
3-7
Resident Fonts,
Typefaces, and
Symbol Sets
Serif Fonts
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Bookman Demibold
ITC Bookman Demibold Italic
Palatino Roman
Palatino Italic
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
New Century Schoolbook Roman
New Century Schoolbook Italic
New Century Schoolbook Bold
New Century Schoolbook Bold
Italic
Times Roman
Times Italic
Times Bold
Times Bold Italic
Courier
Courier Oblique
Courier Bold
Courier Bold Oblique
Sans Serif Fonts
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demibold
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demibold
Oblique
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed Oblique
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique
Helvetica
Helvetica Oblique
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Script Font
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
Pi or Symbol Fonts
Σψµβολ (Symbol)
Dingbats (ITC Zapf Dingbats)
3-8
QMS 1660E Print System User's Guide
Resident Fonts,
Typefaces, and
Symbol Sets
Resident HP PCL Fonts
Your printer has the following resident HP PCL fonts. All fonts can be
automatically rotated to landscape orientation. Some are fixed in pitch
and point size while others are scalable. Unless otherwise noted,
samples are show in 10 point size.
Serif Fonts
Courier 12 pitch 10 point
Courier 12 pitch 10 point
Italic
Courier 12 pitch 10 point
Bold
Courier 10 pitch 12
point
Courier 10 pitch 12
point Italic
Courier 10 pitch 12
point Bold
Times (scalable)
Times Italic (scalable)
Times Bold (scalable)
Times Italic Bold (scalable)
Sans Serif Fonts
Univers (scalable)
Univers Italic (scalable)
Univers Bold (scalable)
Univers Italic Bold (scalable)
Univers Condensed (scalable)
Univers Condensed Italic (scalable)
Univers Condensed Bold (scalable)
Univers Condensed Italic Bold (scalable)
Pi or Symbol Font
Dingbats (ITC Zapf Dingbats)
Professional Printing
3-9
Optional Fonts
Resident HP-GL Symbol Sets
Your printer has the following resident HP-GL symbol sets. All come
in both fixed- and variable-spaced versions, and all are scalable.
9825 Character Set
ANSI ASCII
French/German
ISO French
ISO German
ISO IRV (International Reference
Version)
ISO Italian
ISO Norway, Version 1
ISO Norway, Version 2
ISO Portuguese
ISO Spanish
ISO Swedish
ISO Swedish For Names
ISO United Kingdom
JIS ASCII
Katakana
Roman Extensions
Scandinavian
Spanish/Latin American
Special Symbols
Optional Fonts
Your printer supports the following optional fonts:
n
n
n
Downloadable fonts—Include Type 1 and Type 3 host-resident
and printer-card-resident downloadable fonts and Type 42 (PostScript format) downloadable TrueType fonts. TrueType fonts in
HP PCL format are not supported.
Optional Intellifont SIMM—Increases the number of PCL 5 fonts
from 20 to 37. See chapter 6, “Printer Options,” for more information.
Optional Kanji internal IDE hard disk—Provides 6 Kanji fonts.
See chapter 6, “Printer Options,” for more information.
v
3-10
QMS 1660E Print System User's Guide
4
Printer
Configuration
In This Chapter...
n
n
n
Methods of printer configuration
Using the printer control panel
Using the printer configuration menu
Introduction
Introduction
This chapter begins by listing and describing the different ways you
can configure your printer to meet your special printing needs.
The next section describes how to use the printer control panel to
access the configuration menu and how to make configuration
changes.
The rest of the chapter provides basic printer configuration information about all configuration menu options. The QMS CrownNet Interface System Administrator’s Guide (shipped with your printer)
contains complete Administration/Communications/Network2/CrownNet menu configuration information for the Ethernet interface.
Menu options discussed in this chapter are grouped according to
task. After each option is introduced, a table lists the option’s location
in the configuration menu, the available choices for that option, and
the factory default (the value set at the factory).
Methods of Configuration
You have four major ways to configure your printer to meet your printing needs. In order of priority, they are
n
n
n
n
n
Through an application
Through PS Executive Series Utilities
Through printer commands
Through the printer control panel
Through a remote console (for network users)
Using an Application
Using your application is the best way to control your printer since
most printing is done on a per-job basis. This helps prevent confusion
in network environments and saves you from making changes at the
4-2
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Methods of
Configuration
printer control panel. Your application documentation explains how to
control your printer settings: probably by choosing options from a
printing menu.
Applications use printer drivers to send the appropriate commands
automatically to the printer for the requested tasks. If your application
doesn’t have a QMS 1660 Print System driver, you can select a comparable PostScript driver, such as another QMS driver or a LaserWriter driver. However, comparable drivers may not allow you to
access all of your printer's features, such as 1200x600 dpi printing or
collating.
Using PS Executive Series Utilities
You can also use the PS Executive Series Utilities (shipped with your
printer) to control the printer from your host. See the README file on
the utilities disk for information on installing the utilities, and see the
utilities on-line documentation for details on using the software.
Using Printer Commands
QMS Document Option Commands (DOC)
Your printer provides a powerful feature that can accommodate your
specific print job requirement (and the requirements of any other user
on the network) without affecting the printer configuration for other
print jobs. This feature is the set of QMS Document Option Commands (DOC).
With DOC, you can add commands to the beginning of your files that,
when interpreted by the printer, turn on specific file processing or document handling features. For example, you can use DOC to specify
an emulation, select a specific inputbin or media size, choose page
orientation, and more. The features you select and the DOC you use
take effect only for the current print job. After your job prints, the DOC
added to the beginning of the next file take effect. If no DOC appears
on the next file, the printer’s default values resume. Appendix C in
this manual lists all DOC your printer supports. For more information,
refer to the QMS Crown Document Option Commands manual, available from your QMS vendor.
Printer Configuration
4-3
Methods of
Configuration
Language Commands
PostScript operators and HP PCL and HP-GL commands can enable
job-specific features your application or page description language
can’t access. Refer to your language documentation for specifics.
Using the Control Panel
Your printer is configured at the factory for the most typical printing
environments, so most users don't have to use the control panel
often. However, if you do need to change a printer setting for all print
jobs (not just on a per-job basis), you can do so through the control
panel. If you are working in a shared printing environment, your system administrator should be the only person to make changes
through the printer's control panel.
The rest of this chapter explains how to use the printer control panel
and configuration menu.
Using a Remote Console
Many of the configuration choices that can be made at the control
panel can also be made through a remote console if you’re connected
to a network via the Ethernet interface or another optional network
interface. To avoid confusion in a shared printing environment, only
the system administrator should make configuration changes.
»
Note: If a remote console has the printer off line, pressing the Online/
Offline key will not take effect until the console puts the printer back
on line.
See the QMS CrownNet Interface System Administrator’s Guide for
instructions on accessing Remote Console through the Ethernet
interface and the QMS Remote Console User’s Guide for complete
information on using a remote console.
4-4
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Configuration
Menu
Configuration Menu
The printer’s configuration menu allows you change the default
printer configuration settings. In other words, changes you make
affect all subsequent print jobs.
The options in the configuration menu are organized under three
main menus:
n
Administration Menu
Use this menu to maintain printer-host communication information, and for selecting and configuring printer emulations, configuring special pages, printing engine calibration, and configuring
hard disks (if installed).
Note: For information on any of the Administration/
Communications/Network2/CrownNet options (for the Ethernet
interface), see chapter 2, “Printer Configuration,” in the QMS
CrownNet Interface System Administrator’s Guide.
»
n
Installation Menu
Use this menu to establish passwords for the Operator Control
and Administration menus. This menu displays only when an
optional security card is installed.
n
Operator Control Menu
Use this menu to maintain document processing options (number
of copies, media type, and paper orientation).These capabilities
are usually handled most efficiently within specific print jobs since
each job has its own requirements. However, if there is no way of
specifying these options within a job, you may do so from the
control panel.
Accessing the Configuration Menu
To access the configuration menu, make sure the printer is idle (IDLE
displays in the message window), then press the Online/Offline key to
take the printer off line (the Online/Offline indicator is not lighted), and
finally press the Menu key.
Printer Configuration
4-5
Configuration
Menu
Example
The following table shows how to use the control panel keys to
access the printer configuration menu. Press the control panel keys in
the order shown. The printer responds by displaying a status message or configuration menu in the message window.
»
Note: You may need to press the Next key more than one time to
advance through the list of options.
Press this to...
key...
The message
window reads...
Online/
Offline
Turn off the Online/Offline indicator and
ready the printer for configuration.
IDLE
Menu
Access the configuration menu.
CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
The printer must be off line and idle before you can access the configuration menu.
Selecting Configuration Menu Options
Once you access the configuration menu, you use the control panel
keys to move through the menu. Use the following keys:
Press this key... to...
Next
Advance to the next option or submenu within a menu.
Previous
Return to the previous option or submenu within a menu.
Select
Select an option or enter a submenu.
Example
To change the default printer emulation from ESP to PostScript, press
the control panel keys in the order shown in the following table.
»
Note: You may need to press the Next key more than once to
advance through the list of selections or options.
Press this to...
key...
4-6
The message
window reads...
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Configuration
Menu
Online/
Offline
Turn off the Online/Offline indicator and
ready the printer for configuration.
IDLE
Menu
Access the configuration menu.
CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
Next
Advance to the Operator Control/
Administration menu.
CONFIGURATION
ADMINISTRATION
Select
Access the Administration menu
ADMINISTRATION
COMMUNICATIONS
Select
Access the Communications menu.
COMMUNICATIONS
TIMEOUTS
Next
Advance to the Communications/Parallel
menu.
COMMUNICATIONS
PARALLEL
Select
Access the Parallel menu.
PARALLEL
MODE
Next
Advance to the Parallel/Emulation menu. PARALLEL
EMULATION
Select
Access the Emulation menu.
EMULATION
ESP
Previous
Advance to the Emulation/PostScript
menu.
EMULATION
POSTSCRIPT
Select
Select PostScript as the default
emulation.
POSTSCRIPT
IS SELECTED
After 3 seconds you are returned to the
Parallel/Emulation menu.
PARALLEL
EMULATION
Changing Character Information
Sometimes, rather than selecting an option, you need to enter character information. A character is any letter, digit, or symbol. A field is a
group of characters that have meaning. Use the printer control panel
to enter character information in the message window during printer
configuration. The maximum length of the message window is 16
characters.
Entering character information through the control panel is similar to
setting the time and date on a digital watch. You enter one character
Printer Configuration
4-7
Configuration
Menu
at a time. The current input character flashes. Use the following keys
to change the current input character:
Press this key... to...
Next
Advance to the next choice for the current input character.
Previous
Return to the previous choice for the current input
character.
Once you have changed the current input character, use the following
keys to move the cursor to another input character:
Press this key... to...
Select
Advance the cursor to the next character.
Menu
Return the cursor to the previous character.
To exit from the character selection process, move the cursor to the
last character of the input field (the character farthest to the right) and
press the Select key, or move to the first character of the input field
(the character farthest to the left) and press the Menu key.
When you exit, the printer verifies the character information and confirms it in the message window. If the character information is valid,
you are returned to the previous menu; if it is invalid, you are returned
to the input field. Press the Menu key to cancel any changes to the
character information.
If the current character information is longer than the value that you
need to enter, replace each extra character with a space. The printer
interprets a space at the end of character information as a blank.
Example
To change the HP-GL emulation scaling percent, press the control
panel keys in the order shown in the following table. The printer
responds by displaying a status message or configuration menu in
the message window. An underline indicates the current input character in the message window.
4-8
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Configuration
Menu
»
Note: You may need to press the Next key more than one time to
advance through the list of selections or options.
Press this to...
key...
The message
window reads...
Online/
Offline
Turn off the Online/Offline indicator and
readies the printer for configuration.
IDLE
Menu
Access the configuration menu.
CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
Next
Advance to the Administration menu.
CONFIGURATION
ADMINISTRATION
Select
Access the Administration menu
ADMINISTRATION
COMMUNICATIONS
Next
Advance to the Communications/
Emulation menu.
COMMUNICATIONS
EMULATIONS
Select
Access the Emulations menu.
EMULATIONS
ESP DEFAULT
EMUL
Next
Advance to the Emulations/HP-GL menu. EMULATIONS
HP-GL
Select
Access the HP-GL menu.
HP-GL
PLOTTER
Next
Advance to the HP-GL/Scaling Percent
menu.
HP-GL
SCALING PERCENT
Select
Access the Scaling Percent menu.
SCALING PERCENT
100
Previous
Lower the current character to 0.
SCALING PERCENT
000
Select
Select 0 and move the current character
to the next 0.
SCALING PERCENT
000
Next
(4 times)
Advance the current character to 5.
SCALING PERCENT
050
Select
Select 5 and move the current character
to the last 0.
SCALING PERCENT
050
Select
Select 50 as the default scaling percent.
50
IS SELECTED
After 3 seconds you are returned to the
HP-GL/Scaling Percent menu.
HP-GL
SCALING PERCENT
Printer Configuration
4-9
Configuration
Menu
Saving Configuration Changes
Before the printer can accept print jobs with configuration changes,
the changes must be saved.
Example
To save your configuration changes, press the control panel keys in
the order shown in the following table. The printer responds by displaying a status message in the message window.
Press this
key...
to...
The message
window reads...
Online/Offline Exit from the menu (Online/Offline) or
SAVE CHANGES?
or Menu
return to the previous menu (Menu). You NO
are prompted to save your change(s).
Next
Advance to the Save Changes?/Yes
option.
SAVE CHANGES?
YES
Select
Select Yes. The printer finishes printing
any print jobs in process, saves your
change, and returns to idle.
IDLE
Online/Offline Turn on the Online/Offline indicator and IDLE
ready the printer to accept and print jobs.
»
Note: The printer may need to be restarted before certain changes to
the Administration menu take effect. Some changes restart the printer
automatically while others display the message REBOOT NOW? in the
control panel message window. If this message appears, select YES
to restart the printer and have the change(s) take effect immediately,
or select NO to wait until you manually restart the printer for the
change(s) to take effect.
Canceling Configuration Changes
If you change a configuration option and then decide to cancel that
change, you can do so when exiting from the configuration menu.
4-10
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Configuration
Menu
Example
To cancel your configuration changes, press the control panel keys in
the order shown in the following table. The printer responds by displaying a status message in the message window.
Press this to...
key...
The message
window reads...
Online/
Offline or
Menu
Exit from the menu (Online/Offline) or
SAVE CHANGES?
return to the previous menu (Menu) and be NO
prompted to save your change.
Select
Select No. The printer finishes printing any IDLE
print jobs in process, does not save your
changes, and returns to idle.
Online/
Offline
Turn on the Online/Offline indicator and
ready the printer to accept print jobs.
IDLE
Setting the Message Window Language
Status messages and configuration menus can be displayed in the
message window in English, French, German, or Spanish. If you
need to change the message window language, use the Keypad
Language option in the Administration/Miscellaneous menu.
Menu
Administration/Miscellaneous/Keypad Language
Choices
English, French, German, Spanish
Default
English
Notes
The printer must be restarted for changes to the Keypad
Language menu to take effect. You can either let the printer
restart automatically after you save the change and exit from
the configuration menu, or you can wait for the change to take
effect the next time you manually turn on the printer.
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration
If you need to cancel all of the configuration changes you have made,
you can reset all of the configuration settings to their factory defaults.
Menu
Administration/Miscellaneous/Restore Defaults
Choices
Yes, No
Printer Configuration
4-11
Configuration
Menu Options
Default
No
Notes
This process takes several minutes to complete.
Configuration Menu Options
The rest of this chapter describes the options in the printer configuration menu. Information is organized in the following order:
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
4-12
Collation
Copies
Emulations
Hard disks
Interfaces
Media input
Media orientation
Media output
Media size
Memory
Optional features
Passwords
Printer engine
Printer start-up options
Special pages
Timeouts
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Collation
Collation
Collation is the printing of multiple copies of a document in numeric
order. The QMS 1660E Print System is collation capable. It can
deliver multiple copies of your files in collated or uncollated order to
the output tray.
Menu
Operator Control/Collation
Choices
On—Enable collation.
Off—Disable collation.
Default
On
If not enough memory is available, chunk collation occurs. Chunk collation breaks a print job into several smaller collation sequences,
which must be manually combined to create a single, collated document.
See chapter 3, “Advanced Printing Features,” in the Operation manual for more information on collation and on improving collation performance on your printer.
Copies
While it is usually preferable to select in your application the number
of copies you want to print, you can change the default number of
copies for all print jobs through the printer control panel.
Menu
Operator Control/Copies
Choices
001-999
Default
001
Notes
Sets the default number of copies for all subsequent print jobs.
Printer Configuration
4-13
Emulations
Emulations
Use the Administration/Emulations menu to set the parameters for
the available printer emulations. Optional printing emulations appear
only if installed.
»
Note: To choose an emulation or ESP for a particular interface, use
the appropriate interface menu in the Administration/Communications
menu. See “Interfaces,” later in this chapter, for more information.
Setting ESP Default Parameters
ESP (Emulation Sensing Processor) technology analyzes incoming
file data and selects the appropriate printer emulation from those
installed on the printer. The ESP Default Emul option allows you to
set the emulation used when ESP is unable to identify the language
of a print job. For more information on ESP, see chapter 5, “Additional
Technical Information.”
Menu
Administration/Emulations/ESP Default Emul
Choices
HPGL, Lineprinter, PCL5, PostScript
Default
PCL5
Notes
You must turn the printer off and back on again for the change
to take effect.
Setting HP-GL Parameters
Enhanced Mode
Increases the resolution of a downloaded character.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Enhanced Mode
Choices
On—Uses an increased resolution for the grid
Off—Uses standard resolution for the grid
Default
4-14
Off
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Emulations
Notes
The HP-GL user-defined character (UC) command downloads
and draws characters with an encoding scheme that uses pen
control movements and coordinate sequences. The characters
are drawn on a grid that is superimposed on the character plot
cell.
Expand Mode
Defines a larger imageable area for the selected media type. This
increased imageable area affects the default placement of the scaling
points P1 and P2.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Expand Mode
Choices
On—Expands the imageable area.
Off—Doesn’t expand the imageable area.
Default
Off
Notes
Setting this option to On partially determines the range of
plotter units for a selected media type. When the plotter
senses the media type, it automatically sets the hard clip limits
to 0.591"/15 mm on three sides and to 1.537"/39 mm on the
fourth side. However, if Expand Mode is set to On, then the
limits are set to 0.197"/5 mm on three sides and 1.143"/29 mm
on the fourth side.
The HP-GL emulation senses the media size when the Paper
Type is set to Scale to Paper or when it is set to a particular
media size through the control panel or through a QMS
Document Option Command.
Origin
Sets the image offset from the plotter’s origin in 0.01" increments.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Origin/X Direction
Choices
0000-8500 (0"-8.5")
Default
0000
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Origin/Y Direction
Choices
00000-11000 (0"-11.0")
Default
00000
Printer Configuration
4-15
Emulations
Paper Type
Identifies the original image’s paper size.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Paper Type
Choices
A (letter/8.5”x11.0”), A3 (297x420 mm), A4 (210x297 mm), B
(11.0”x17.0”), Scale to Paper
Default
Scale to Paper
Pen 1 - Pen 8
Sets the width and color for the eight plotter pens. A width and a color
option are available for each pen.
»
Note: See chapter 5, “Additional Technical Information,” for more
information on the HP-GL emulation color encoding equation.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Pen x/Width
Choices
00-60 (0.1-6.0 mm)–see Notes below
Default
Pen 1—7 (0.7 mm)
Pen 2—3 (0.3 mm)
Pen 3—3 (0.3 mm)
Pen 4—3 (0.3 mm)
Pen 5—3 (0.3 mm)
Pen 6—3 (0.3 mm)
Pen 7—3 (0.3 mm)
Pen 8—3 (0.3 mm)
Notes
4-16
A pen width of 00 defaults to 0.1 mm.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Emulations
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Pen x/Color
Choices
Black, Blue, Brown, Cyan, Gray - 25%, Gray - 50%,
Gray - 75%, Green, Magenta, Orange, Red, Violet, Yellow
Default
Pen 1—Black (100% black)
Pen 2—Black (100% black)
Pen 3—Red (70% black)
Pen 4—Green (41% black)
Pen 5—Blue (89% black)
Pen 6—Violet (59% black)
Pen 7—Orange (25.8% black)
Pen 8—Brown (50% black)
Notes
Cyan=30% black, magenta=59% black, and yellow=11%
black.
Plotter
Identifies the HP-GL plotter type.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Plotter
Choices
7470A, 7475A, 7550A, ColorPro
Default
7550A
Reverse Image
Determines whether an image is printed in reverse.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Reverse Image
Choices
On—Print a white image on a black background.
Off—Print a black image on a white background.
Default
Off
Printer Configuration
4-17
Emulations
Scaling Percent
Identifies the percentage to reduce or enlarge an image.
»
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HPGL/Scaling Percent
Choices
001-150 (1-150%)
Default
100 (100%)
Note: To scale plots, select the paper size originally used for the plot
in the Paper Type menu, and then enter the reduction or enlargement
needed to fit the plot on the new page in the Scaling Percent menu. If
necessary, enter new x,y coordinates in the Origin menu to reposition
the plot on the page.
Setting HP PCL 5 Parameters
Appendix C, “Document Option Commands,” of this manual has
updated information on the PCL 5 DOC commands.
Default Font
Sets the default font for this emulation.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PCL 5/Default Font
Choices
Courier12, Courier12Bold, Courier12Italic, Courier10,
Courier10Bold, Courier10Italic, Lineprinter, Select by Index,
Times*, Times*Italic, Times*Bold, Times*BoldItalic, Univ*,
Univ*Italic, Univ*Bold, Univ*BoldItalic, UnivCond*,
UnivCond*Italic, UnivCond*Bold, UnivCond*BldItlc, Zapf
Dingbats*
Default
Courier12
Notes
* represents a scalable font (default point size [12 points] is
used to scale the font and produce the characters in the
selected size).
If you use Select by Index to select a font by its font index, the
printer uses the Administration/Emulations/PCL5/Default Font
Idx value to choose the default font.
4-18
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Emulations
Default Font Index
Sets the default font index when Select by Index is chosen in the
Administration/Emulations/PCL 5/Default Font menu. If a font by the
same index number exists, it is selected as the default font. This font
must be a cartridge or downloaded soft font.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PCL 5/Default Font Idx
Choices
00000-32767
Default
Depends on cartridge or downloaded font(s)
Download Location
Controls the default storage location of PCL objects (fonts, macros,
and patterns).
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PCL 5/Downld Location
Choices
Disk—All downloaded PCL objects are stored on the default
disk, if present. These objects remain on the disk even if
the printer power is turned off.
Memory—All downloaded PCL objects are stored in temporary
storage in RAM.
Default
Disk
Notes
DOC commands specifying resources override this option on a
per-job basis.
If this option is set to Disk and no hard disk is installed,
memory is used as the default storage location.
If the printer has both a hard disk and a large amount of
memory, setting this option to Memory enhances printer
performance.
Before you download any objects, ensure that the printer has
enough memory, or they may not be available for use. If it
doesn’t, you can install SIMMs (see chapter 6, “Printer
Options”) to increase printer memory, or you can install a hard
disk (see chapter 6, “Printer Options”) and enable disk
swapping (Administration/Memory/Enable Disk Swap menu–
see the “Memory” section, later in this chapter).
Printer Configuration
4-19
Emulations
Line Termination
Adds an indicator which controls the way the printer interprets CR
(carriage return) and LF (line feed) characters.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PCL 5/Line Termination
Choices
CR=CR, LF=LF
CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
CR or LF=CR+LF
Default
CR=CR, LF=LF
Lines Per Inch
Sets the number of lines printed per inch in increments of .01".
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PCL 5/Lines/Inch x100
Choices
0100-4800
Default
0600
Monochrome HP-GL/2
Allows your printer to emulate a monochrome or color plotter.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PCL 5/Monochrome GL/2
Choices
Off—Emulate a color plotter (8 pens). Since a monochrome
print system has only 2 pen colors (black and white),
grayscale patterns are substituted for other colors.
On—Emulate a monochrome plotter (2 pens).
Default
4-20
On
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Emulations
Notes
When set to off, this option maps pen colors as follows:
Pen 0=White, Pen 1=Black, Pen 2=Red, Pen 3=Green, Pen
4=Yellow, Pen 5=Blue, Pen 6=Magenta, Pen 7=Cyan.
When set to on, this option tells the printer to map each pen to
its assigned color, then convert the color to a grayscale using
the National Television System Committee (NTSC) color
standard for luminosity coefficients (Additive System):
Y = 0.30R + 0.59G + 0.11B
Example of how to use the color standard formula:
WhiteY = [1*0.30) + (1*0.59) + (1*0.11)]—100% gray
BlackY = [0*0.30) + (0*0.59) + (0*0.11)]—0% gray
RedY = [1*0.30) + (0*0.59) + (0*0.11)]—30% gray
GreenY = [0*0.30) + (1*0.59) + (0*0.11)]—59% gray
YellowY = [1*0.30) + (1*0.59) + (0*0.11)]—89% gray
BlueY = [0*0.30) + (0*0.59) + (1*0.11)]—11% gray
MagentaY = [1*0.30) + (0*0.59) + (1*0.11)]—41% gray
CyanY = [0*0.30) + (1*0.59) + (1*0.11)]—70% gray
Point Size x100
Identifies the point size for scalable fonts in 0.25 point increments.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PCL 5/Point Size x100
Choices
00025-99975 (0.25-999.75 points)
Default
01200 (12 points)
Notes
If the font is not scalable or if a bitmap font is specified, this
setting is ignored.
Retain Temporary Fonts and Macros
Allows you to choose whether to retain temporary HP PCL5 fonts and
macros at the end of each print job.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HP PCL 5/Retain Temporary
Printer Configuration
4-21
Emulations
Choices
Off—Reset PCL to its default state at the end of each PCL
print job, execute an implicit <ESC>E at the start and end
of the job, and delete any temporary fonts, macros, and
patterns.
On—Reset PCL to its default state at the end of each PCL
print job. Temporary fonts, macros, and patterns from
previous PCL print jobs are retained in memory after the
print job has completed. You can recall these downloaded
fonts, macros, and patterns from within your PCL file
without having to download them again.
On Compatibility—Retain the entire state of PCL as well as the
temporary macros, fonts, and patterns from previous PCL
jobs unless you do one of the following:
n
n
n
n
Change any PCL front panel option
Send any PCL-specific DOC command—except the DOC
emulation command
Send any other DOC command, such as number of copies, duplex, orientation, or inputbin
Send a PCL job from a different communications port—
for examples, if the PCL print environment is set for PCL
jobs to print from the parallel port, and a PCL job is sent
from the serial port
If any one of these occurs, the PCL state is reset to the new
default, and the previous state is lost.
Default
Off
Scalable Fonts
Specifies whether to enable or disable the printing of HP PCL 5 scalable fonts by an application. This feature may be useful when printing
PCL 4 documents which may inadvertently select unwanted scalable
fonts.
Menu
4-22
Administration/Emulations/HP PCL 5/Scalable Fonts
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Emulations
Choices
Enable—Allow selection of scalable fonts. When you print
PCL 4 documents, PCL 5 may substitute scalable fonts that
could cause your PCL 4 documents to print incorrectly.
Disable—Print using bitmap fonts only.
Default
Enable
Symbol Set
Sets the character set used by the HP PCL 5 emulation.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/HP PCL 5/Symbol Set
Choices
Roman-8, PC-850, PC8-US, PC8-DN, ECMA-94, Legal,
HPGerman, HPSpanish, ISO-2, ISO-4, ISO-6, ISO-10, ISO-11,
ISO-14, ISO-15, ISO-16, ISO-17, ISO-21, ISO-25, ISO-57,
ISO-60, ISO-61, ISO-69, ISO-84, ISO-85, Desktop, PS Math,
Math 8, Microsoft-Pub, Pi-Font, PS-Text, Ventura-Intl, VenturaMath, Ventura-US, Windows, PS-Zapf-Dingbats, VenturaDingbats, Zapf-Dingbats100, Zapf-Dingbats200, ZapfDingbats300
Default
Roman-8
Notes
Not all symbol sets are available with certain resident fonts.
The Desktop, PS Math, Math 8, Microsoft-Pub, Pi-Font, PSText, Ventura-Intl, Ventura-Math, Ventura-US, and Windows
symbol sets cannot be used with the resident bitmap fonts
Courier 10, Courier 10 Italic, Courier 10 Bold, Courier 12,
Courier 12 Italic, Courier 12 Bold, and LinePrinter.
The five dingbat symbol sets (PS-ZapfDingbats, VenturaDingbats, Zapf-Dingbats100, Zapf-Dingbats200, and ZapfDingbats300) can be used with all fonts.
If a mismatch between a symbol set and font occurs, the
standard PCL font selection mechanism is used to locate a
font that matches the selected symbol set. With the standard
set of fonts distributed for your printer, this matches the Times*
font, but other user-installed fonts could change this result.
Printer Configuration
4-23
Emulations
Setting Lineprinter Parameters
Autowrap
Indicates whether long lines are to be wrapped to the next line
instead of being truncated.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/CRISCRLF
Choices
On—Wrap long lines.
Off—Truncate long lines.
Default
On
Character Map
Specifies the type of character map to be used.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/Character Map
Choices
ASCII, EBCDIC
Default
ASCII
Carriage Return is Carriage Return-Line Feed
Stipulates whether each carriage return (CR) in the print job is translated to a carriage return/line feed (CRLF) combination.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/CR is CRLF
Choices
On—Translate all carriage returns to line feeds.
Off—Use carriage returns only as carriage returns.
Default
Off
Font
Sets the printer fonts for the current print job. Any PostScript fonts
available on the printer can be used. To see a list of available
PostScript fonts, print an advanced status page through the printer
configuration menu or through the PS Executive Series Utilities.
4-24
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/Font
Choices
All printer-resident PostScript fonts.
Default
Courier
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Emulations
Form Feed is Carriage Return-Form Feed
Stipulates whether each form feed (FF) in the print job is translated to
a carriage return/form feed (CRFF) combination.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/FF is CRFF
Choices
On—Translate all form feeds to carriage return/form feed
combinations.
Off—Use form feeds only as form feeds.
Default
On
Line Feed is Carriage Return-Line Feed
Stipulates whether each line feed (LF) in the print job is translated to
a carriage return/line feed (CRLF) combination.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/LF is CRLF
Choices
On—Translate all line feeds to carriage return/line feed
combinations.
Off—Use lines feeds only as line feeds.
Default
On
Line Numbering
Specifies that a five-digit number is to be prefixed to the beginning of
each line.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/Line Numbering
Choices
On—Number all lines.
Off—Don’t number lines.
Default
Off
Lines Per Page
Specifies the number of lines printed on a page before an automatic
page eject. Interline spacing is set to the selected point size. Logical
Printer Configuration
4-25
Emulations
pages consisting of more lines than specified are split into multiple
pages.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/Lines per Page
Choices
1-128
Default
87
Margins
Defines the left, right, top, and bottom margins in 1/100" increments.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/Margins
Choices
Bottom
Left
Right
Top
0-1700 (0"-17.00")
0-1700 (0"-17.00")
0-1700 (0"-17.00")
0-1700 (0"-17.00")
Default
Bottom
Left
Right
Top
0
0
0
0
Orientation
Specifies whether text and graphics are placed on the page in a portrait or landscape orientation.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/Orientation
Choices
Landscape, Portrait
Default
Portrait
Point Sz 100ths
Sets point size (in .01 point increments) of the font for the current print
job.
4-26
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/Point Sz 100ths
Choices
00400-25600 (4-256 points)
Default
00880 (8.8 points)
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Emulations
Tab Stops
Specifies the number of spaces between tab stops.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter/Tab Stops
Choices
0-256
Default
8
Setting PostScript Parameters
Emulation Level
This menu allows you to select a PostScript emulation level.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Emulation Level
Choices
Level 2—For PostScript Level 2 files and most Level 1 files.
Level 1 B/W—For files that contain only black-and-white
PostScript Level 1 operators. This mode does not support
the PostScript color operators; the use of color operators
could cause the print job to fail.
Level 1 Color—For files that contain color PostScript Level 1
operators. This mode accepts color PostScript Level 1
operators and translates these commands to the
appropriate grayscale. This is the recommended setting for
Level 1 compatibility since it contains all of the commands
in Level 1 B/W and the color commands.
Default
Level 2
Notes
In general, we recommend that you use the Level 2 option.
Use the Level 1 B/W and Level 1 Color options only if you have
files prepared in an application which is not fully compatible
with Adobe’s PostScript Level 2 page description language.
Printer Configuration
4-27
Emulations
Gamma Correction
This option enables or disables gamma correction for PostScript files.
For more information, see chapter 5, “Advanced Technical Information,” in the Reference.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Gamma Correction
Choices
No—Disables gamma correction
Yes—Enables gamma correction, which adjusts the range of
gray levels to give you the best possible image. Gamma
correction sharpens overall mid-range contrast while blacks
(shadows) and white (highlights) keep their original values.
You can use this option to correct gray-scale problems or to
accentuate detail for scanned images.
Default
No
Notes
Gamma correction is automatically adjusted when printer
resolution is changed. However, gamma correction has no
effect on files printed at 1200x1200 dpi resolution. In addition,
gamma correction applies only to PostScript images.
If turning on gamma correction doesn’t yield a suitable grayscale image for your needs, set a specific gamma correction
value through your drawing application or through the
PostScript settransfer operator. (See your drawing application
documentation and the PostScript Language Reference
Manual for more information.)
Halftone Type
This option allows you to specify the halftone used to print PostScript
files. For more information, see chapter 5, “Advanced Technical Information,” in the Reference.
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Halftone Type
Choices
Basic—Regular dot placement at 53 lpi for 300x300 resolution
or 71 dpi for 600x600 resolution.
Advanced—Variable dot placement according to the grayscale
within the image. Generally, this option provides smoother
transitions between grayscales within the image.
4-28
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Hard Disks
Default
Advanced
Notes
When the advanced halftone type is chosen, gamma
correction (Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Gamma
Correction menu) has no effect on the image.
When 1200x1200 dpi resolution is chosen, the basic and
advanced halftone types provide the same result.
Hard Disks
Use the Administration/Disk Operations menu to perform disk operation processes that appear only when optional hard disks are
installed.
▲ Caution: If you connect to this printer an external hard disk you
previously used with an earlier QMS Crown printer, this QMS 1660E
Print System software release will automatically reorganize the files
on the hard disk when the printer is turned back on again. (The printer
release number is listed on both the start-up and the status page.)
Once this reorganization is done, the files on the hard disk can no
longer be accessed if the hard disk is reattached to an earlier QMS
Crown printer.
This reorganization process takes time. If, when you first turn the
printer on after attaching a previously used hard disk, it does not
come on line immediately, be patient. Interrupting the reorganization
process could cause all files on the hard disk to be lost.
Formatting a Hard Disk
Use the Administration/Disk Operations/Format Disk menu to format
a hard disk. See chapter 6, “Printer Options,” for instructions.
»
Note: If a FORMAT FAILED message displays in the message
window during the Format Disk operation, the disk cannot be used.
Press the Menu key to remove the message and contact your QMS
vendor.
Printer Configuration
4-29
Hard Disks
Installing an Optional Font
Use the Administration/Disk Operations/Install Option menu to add
optional fonts to the hard disk from a font card. This selection copies
data from the card to the hard disk. See chapter 6, “Printer Options,”
for instructions.
»
Note: If an error message displays in the message window during
this operation, press the Menu key to remove the message and
restart the operation from the beginning.
▲ Caution: Before you install any optional fonts, ensure that the printer
has enough memory, or they may not all be available for use. If it
doesn’t, you can install SIMMs (see chapter 6, “Printer Options”) to
increase printer memory, or you can install a hard disk (see chapter 6,
“Printer Options”) and enable disk swapping (Administration/Memory/
Enable Disk Swap menu–see the “Memory” section, later in this
chapter).
Removing an Optional Font
Use the Administration/Disk Operations/Remove Option menu to
remove a previously installed optional font. See chapter 6, “Printer
Options,” for instructions.
»
4-30
Note: If an error message displays in the message window during
this operation, press the Menu key to remove the message and
restart the operation from the beginning.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Interfaces
Interfaces
You can customize all of the printer’s interfaces through the Administration/Communications menu.
Setting Ethernet Interface Parameters
Use the Administration/Communications/Network 2/CrownNet menu
to set the printer-host communication values for the Ethernet interface. Complete configuration information is included in the QMS
CrownNet Interface System Administrator’s Guide.
Setting LocalTalk Interface Parameters
Use the Administration/Communications/Network 1/LocalTalk menu
to set the printer-host communication values for the optional LocalTalk interface. Complete configuration information is included in chapter 6, “Printer Options,” of this manual.
Setting Optional Network Interface
Parameters
Use the Administration/Communications/Network 1/Interface menu to
set the printer-host communication values for an optional network
interface, such as CrownNet. The documentation that comes with the
interface contains complete configuration information.
Setting Parallel Interface Parameters
Use the Administration/Communications/Parallel menu to set the parallel interface values used for printer-host communications.
Data Bits
Sets the number of data bits transmitted per character.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Parallel/Data Bits
Choices
7 Bits, 8 Bits
Default
8 Bits
Printer Configuration
4-31
Interfaces
Default Job Priority
Allows you to specify which jobs are printed first, according to the
interface through which they are received, when jobs are received
simultaneously. In other words, you can give jobs received via the
parallel interface priority over jobs received via other interfaces.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Parallel/Def Job Prio
Choices
001-100 (highest-lowest priority)
Default
001 (highest priority)
Emulation
Sets the parallel interface emulation.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Parallel/Emulation
Choices
ESP, Hexdump, HPGL, Lineprinter, PCL5, PostScript
Other optional emulations also appear, if installed.
Default
ESP
End Job Mode
Enables (and identifies an end-of-job sequence) or disables data
stream sensing for the end-of-document (EOD) command. These
sequences allow hosts to enforce print job sequencing without considerations for interacting timeouts. See chapter 5, “Additional Technical Information,” for details on how to implement this feature on your
QMS 1660E Print System.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Parallel/End Job Mode
Choices
None—The printer recognizes only the PostScript ^D
command.
QMS EOD—The printer recognizes only the QMS
%%EndOfDocument command.
HP EOD—The printer recognizes only the HP <ESC>%12345X command.
Default
4-32
None
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Interfaces
Minimum Number of Kilobytes for Spooling
Sets the minimum number of kilobytes of system memory allocated to
the parallel interface.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Parallel/Min K Spool
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00015
Notes
This value must be less than K Mem For Spool.
A 00000 value does not turn off the spooling buffer for the
parallel interface. If the value is set to 00000, the printer
calculates the Min K Spool automatically at initialization.
The printer must be restarted for changes to the Min K Spool
menu to take effect. You can either let the printer restart
automatically after you save the change and exit from the
configuration menu, or you can wait for the change to take
effect the next time you manually turn on the printer.
Mode
The parallel interface supports Centronics parallel communication as
well as IEEE 1284 bidirectional (two-way) parallel communication,
which provides five modes of operation: byte, compatibility, ECP
(enhanced compatibility port), EPP (enhanced parallel port), and
nibble. See chapter 5, “Additional Technical Information,” for a
discussion of the different modes.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Parallel/Mode
Choices
Interactive—Establish bidirectional (IEEE 1284) parallel
communication between the host and the printer.
Noninteractive—Establish Centronics parallel communication
from the host to the printer.
Disabled—Turn off parallel communication with the host. The
printer stops accepting print jobs over the parallel interface.
Default
Noninteractive
Printer Configuration
4-33
Interfaces
Notes
The printer must be restarted for changes to the menu to take
effect. You can either let the printer restart automatically after
you save the change and exit from the configuration menu, or
you can wait for the change to take effect the next time you
manually turn on the printer.
PS Protocol
Sets the binary communications protocol (BCP) for communicating
over a parallel interface to a PostScript printer. See chapter 5, “Additional Technical Information,” for a full discussion of PS Protocol.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Parallel/PS Protocol
Choices
Normal—Enable standard, ASCII hex protocol. Data is sent
and received in ASCII format. This mode is recommended if
you do not print binary data. It was designed for data in the
printable ASCII range. Print jobs can alter the PS protocol
value through PostScript operators.
Normal Fixed—Enable standard, ASCII hex protocol. Print
jobs cannot alter this value through PostScript operators.
Binary—Enable binary communications protocol. Print jobs
can alter this value through PostScript operators. Data in the
printable ASCII range also prints.
Binary Fixed—Enable binary communications protocol. Print
jobs can not alter this value through PostScript operators. Data
in the printable ASCII range also prints.
Default
Normal
Spooling Timeout
Sets the number of seconds the interface waits for data from the host
before terminating a spooled print job.
4-34
Menu
Administration/Communications/Parallel/Spool Timeout
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00030
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Interfaces
Setting Serial Interface Parameters
Use the Administration/Communications/Serial menu to set the serial
interface communication values used for printer-host communications. The following options are available.
Baud Rate
Sets the rate data is received (bits per second) from the host over the
serial interface.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Baud Rate
Choices
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
Default
9600
Notes
Set this option to match the baud rate used by the host. Baud
rates of 19200 and 38400 require RTS/CTS hardware flow
control (Administration/Communications/Serial/Hdwe Flow Ctl
menu). These rates do not support XON/XOFF software flow
control (Administration/Communications/Serial /Rcv Sw Flow
Ctl menu).
When selecting a baud rate of 2400 or below, increase the
Administration/Communications/Timeouts/Emul Timeout
value as follows:
Baud Rate
2400
1200
600
300
Emulation Timeout (seconds)
10*
20
40
80
*A baud rate of 2400 works with a 5-second emulation timeout
value, but there is no margin for delays between characters.
Data Bits
Sets the number of data bits transmitted per character.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Data Bits
Choices
7 Bits, 8 Bits
Default
8 Bits
Printer Configuration
4-35
Interfaces
Default Job Priority
Allows you to specify which jobs are printed first, according to the
interface through which they are received, when jobs are received
simultaneously. In other words, you can give jobs received via the
serial interface priority over jobs received via the other interfaces.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Def Job Prio
Choices
001-100 (highest-lowest priority)
Default
001 (highest priority)
Emulation
Sets the serial interface emulation.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Emulation
Choices
ESP, Hexdump, HPGL, Lineprinter, PCL5, PostScript
Other optional emulations also appear, if installed.
Default
ESP
End Job Mode
Enables (and identifies an end-of-job sequence) or disables data
stream sensing for the end-of-document (EOD) command. These
sequences allow hosts to enforce print job sequencing without considerations for interacting timeouts. See chapter 5, “Additional Technical Information,” for details on how to implement this feature on your
QMS 1660E Print System.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/End Job Mode
Choices
None—The printer recognizes only the PostScript ^D
command.
QMS EOD—The printer recognizes only the QMS
%%EndOfDocument command.
HP EOD—The printer recognizes only the HP
<ESC>%12345X command.
Default
4-36
None
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Interfaces
Hardware Flow Control
Controls the flow of data between the printer and the host.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Hdwe Flow Ctl
Choices
CTS
DSR
DSR POL
DTR
DTR POL
RTS
Off, on
Off, on
Normal, reverse
Off, on
Normal, reverse
Off, on
Defaults
CTS
DSR
DSR POL
DTR
DTR POL
RTS
Off
Off
Normal
On
Normal
Off
Notes
If the host uses hardware flow control, set this option to match
the type used by the host.
Baud rates of 19200 and 38400 require that both RTS and
CTS hardware flow control ((Administration/Communications/
Serial/Hdwe Flow Ctl menu) be selected. These baud rates do
not support XON/XOFF software flow control) Rcv Sw Flow
Ctl).
To download print system software to flash memory via the
serial port, RTS and CTS must both be set to On also, and the
cable pinouts must be connected as shown in appendix B,
“Technical Specifications.”
Ignore Parity Errors
Specifies how the printer should handle parity errors.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Ignore Par. Err.
Choices
Off—Ignore parity errors. The printer prints its best
interpretation of the character(s) affected by the error.
On—Don’t ignore parity errors. The printer replaces the
character(s) affected by the error with a question mark.
Default
Off
Printer Configuration
4-37
Interfaces
Notes
Use the Administration/Communications/Serial/Parity menu to
set parity.
Minimum Number of Kilobytes for Spooling
Sets the minimum number of kilobytes of system memory allocated to
the serial interface.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Min K Spool
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00015
Notes
This value must be less than K Mem For Spool.
A 00000 value does not turn off the spooling buffer for the
serial interface. If the value is set to 00000, the printer
calculates the Min K Spool automatically at initialization.
The printer must be restarted for changes to the Min K Spool
menu to take effect. You can either let the printer restart
automatically after you save the change and exit from the
configuration menu, or you can wait for the change to take
effect the next time you manually turn on the printer.
Mode
Enables or disables the PostScript interactive mode from the host.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Mode
Choices
Interactive—Establish two-way communication between the
host and the printer.
Noninteractive—Establish one-way communication from the
host to the printer.
Disabled—Turn off serial communication with the host. The
printer stops accepting print jobs over the serial interface.
4-38
Default
Interactive
Notes
The printer must be restarted for changes to the Mode menu to
take effect. You can either let the printer restart automatically
after you save the change and exit from the configuration
menu, or you can wait for the change to take effect the next
time you manually turn on the printer.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Interfaces
Parity
Sets the check bit used to identify data transmission errors.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Parity
Choices
Even, None, Odd
Default
None
Notes
The printer’s parity setting must match that of the host or
application.
Use the Administration/Communications/Serial/Ignore Par. Err.
menu to specify how the printer handles parity errors.
PS Protocol
Sets the binary communications protocol (BCP) for communicating
over a serial interface to a PostScript printer. See chapter 5, “Additional Technical Information,” for a full discussion of PS Protocol.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/PS Protocol
Choices
Normal—Enable standard, ASCII hex protocol. Data is sent
and received in ASCII format. This mode is recommended
if you do not print binary data. It was designed for data in
the printable ASCII range. Print jobs can alter the PS
protocol value through PostScript operators.
Normal Fixed—Enable standard, ASCII hex protocol. Print
jobs cannot alter this value through PostScript operators.
Binary—Enable binary communications protocol. Print jobs
can alter this value through PostScript operators. Data in
the printable ASCII range also prints.
Binary Fixed—Enable binary communications protocol. Print
jobs cannot alter this value through PostScript operators.
Data in the printable ASCII range also prints.
Default
Normal
Receive Software Flow Control
Sets the software communication protocol used by the printer to control communication from the host computer.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Rcv Sw Flow Ctl
Printer Configuration
4-39
Interfaces
Choices
ETX/ACK, None, Robust XON/XOFF, XON/XOFF
Default
XON/XOFF
Spooling Timeout
Sets the number of seconds the interface waits for data from the host
before terminating a spooled print job.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Spool Timeout
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00030
Stop Bits
Sets the number of stop bits transmitted per character.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Stop Bits
Choices
1 Bit, 2 Bits
Default
1 Bit
Transmit Software Flow Control
Sets the software communication protocol used by the host computer
to control communication with the printer..
4-40
Menu
Administration/Communications/Serial/Xmit Sw Flow Ctl
Choices
ETX/ACK, None, XON/XOFF
Default
None
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Input
Media Input
Your QMS 1660E Print System comes standard with two media cassettes. Using the control panel, you can select a default media input
source, chaining these input sources, and name them.
Selecting a Media Input Source
An option in the Operator Control menu allows you to select the
default tray or cassette (inputbin) from which media is drawn into the
printer.
Menu
Operator Control/Inputbin
Choices
Lower—Standard cassette
Multipurpose—Multipurpose tray
Optional—Optional cassette (if installed)
Default
Lower
Notes
The current default inputbin is indicated by the appropriate
LED on the print control panel.
Chaining Media Input Sources
An option in the Operator Control menu allows you to “chain” inputbins (tray and cassettes) so that when the first inputbin empties, the
printer will automatically draw media from another inputbin.
Menu
Operator Control/Chain Inputbins
Choices
Off—Doesn’t switch inputbins; uses only the default inputbin.
On—Switches to the next inputbin with the same size and type
of media when the default inputbin is empty.
On Any—Switches to the next inputbin, regardless of the size
and type of media installed, when the default inputbin is empty.
Default
On
Notes
Use the Operator Control/Inputbin menu to set the default
inputbin.
Printer Configuration
4-41
Media Input
Naming Media Input Sources
Options in the Administration/Engine menu allow you to give each
inputbin a more descriptive name. These names are displayed in the
printer message window, where appropriate. You can also use them
with DOC commands. (See the QMS Crown Document Option Commands manual (available for purchase from your QMS vendor) for
complete information on DOC commands.)
Inputbin 1
Inputbin 1 is the multipurpose tray.
Menu
Administration/Engine/Inputbin 1 Name
Choices
Up to 16 characters
Default
multipurpose
Inputbin 2
Inputbin 2 is the standard paper cassette.
Menu
Administration/Engine/Inputbin 2 Name
Choices
Up to 16 characters
Default
lower
Inputbin 3
Inputbin 3 is the optional paper cassette.
4-42
Menu
Administration/Engine/Inputbin 3 Name
Choices
Up to 16 characters
Default
optional
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media
Orientation
Media Orientation
While you can usually specify the orientation of a print job in your
application, if you consistently use a certain media orientation, you
can set this in the Operator Control/Orientation menu.
Menu
Operator Control/Orientation
Choices
Portrait—Vertical
Landscape—Horizontal
Default
Portrait
Media Output
Naming the Media Outputbin
Even though there is only one outputbin, you may want to name it.
You can use this name with DOC commands. (See the QMS Crown
Document Option Commands manual, available for purchase from
your QMS vendor, for complete information on DOC commands.)
Menu
Administration/Engine/Outputbin 1 Name
Choices
Up to 16 characters
Default
Upper
Media Size
Identifying the Media Size
Use the Operator Control/Multipurpose Sz menu to identify the size
media in the multipurpose tray (inputbin 1).
Printer Configuration
4-43
Media Size
Menu
Operator Control/Multipurpose Sz
Choices
11x17
11.00"x17.00"
279.40x431.80 mm
12x19
11.70x19.50"
297.18x495.30 mm
A3
11.69"x16.54"
296.93x420.12 mm
A4
8.27"x11.69"
210.06x296.93 mm
A5
5.83"x8.27"
148.09x210.06 mm
B4
10.12"x14.32"
257.05x363.73 mm
B5
7.16"x10.12"
181.86x257.05 mm
B6
5.06"x7.17"
128.52x182.12 mm
Executive
7.25"x10.50"
184.15x266.70 mm
Full Ledger
17.40"x11.70"
439.42x297.18 mm
Legal
8.50"x14.00"
215.90x355.60 mm
Letter
8.50"x11.00"
215.90x279.40 mm
Postcard
4.13"x5.85"
104.90x148.59 mm
Universal
11.70"x17.00"
297.18x431.80 mm
Default
Letter
Identifying a Default Media Size
Use an option in the Administration/Engine menu to identify the size
media the print should use if it does not recognize the size specified
for a print job or if no size is specified.
Menu
Administration/Engine/Default Paper
Choices
Letter
8.50"x11.00"
279.4x215.9 mm
A4
11.69"x8.27"
297.2x420.4 mm
Default
4-44
Letter
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
Memory
Your printer is shipped with either 12 MB or 24 MB of memory (RAM),
but this memory can be upgraded to 64 MB. The Administration/
Memory menu allows experienced users (systems engineers and
technical support staff) to custom-configure the RAM among the
various memory users (or “clients”) to best meet specific printing,
computing, and network needs.
This section briefly describes each of the memory clients. See chapter 5, “Additional Technical Information,” for more detailed information
on the printer’s memory and what benefits, if any, may result from
adding memory to each client.
To find out how memory is currently allocated, print a status page
Administration/Special Pages menu) or check each client individually
in the configuration menu. The printer automatically distributes added
or freed memory among all of the memory clients, but it can be reallocated to specific memory clients.
»
Note: Keep in mind that misallocating memory may hinder printer
performance and that the print engine’s fastest speed is 16 pages per
minute, no matter how you configure the memory. If you try to set a
memory client below a minimum required value, the message
INCORRECT VALUE appears in the control panel message window.
Disk Cache
The K Mem Disk Cache memory client is the number of kilobytes of
RAM dedicated to the disk cache. This memory client speeds file
system throughput on the hard disks, if one or more are installed, by
storing frequently used data in system memory instead of continually
storing it to and retrieving it from a hard disk.
Menu
Administration/Memory/K Mem Disk Cache
Choices
00032-08192
Default
00036
Printer Configuration
4-45
Memory
Notes
If no hard disk is used, the disk cache should be set to the
minimum. The printer then reallocates the released memory to
other clients that need additional memory.
If one or more hard disks are installed and formatted, they
remain unavailable until sufficient memory is available to the
disk cache. You may need to do one of the following:
n
n
n
O
Add more memory, which automatically increases the
disk cache client’s size. See chapter 6, “Printer Options,”
for information on installing additional printer memory
(SIMMs).
Set Administration/Memory/Enable Disk Swap to Yes.
Any extra memory is distributed to all memory clients.
Take any memory, if available and not being used by
other clients, and add it to the Administration/Memory/K
Mem Display memory setting.
Caution: This option should be used only by individuals who are
familiar with adjusting m emory client’s values. Incorrect use of
this option could cause the system to operate incorrectly.
If you change the K Mem Disk Cache value, the printer
automatically restarts after you save your changes and exit
from the configuration menu.
The amount of memory needed for this memory client depends on the
size and number of hard disks, the number of subdirectories on each
disk, and the amount of memory dedicated to caching.
»
Note: If sufficient memory is available to the disk cache, all disks are
accessible. If insufficient memory is available to the disk cache, some
disks may be accessible while others may not be.
The recommended amount of memory for the disk cache client is
n
n
120 KB minimum
0.5 KB per MB of disk storage total for all disks
For example, the recommended amount of memory for the disk
cache for a single 120 MB hard disk is 180 KB, and for two 120 MB
hard disks it is 240 KB. These are recommended values. The printer
4-46
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
will still operate with a smaller cache, but decreased performance
may result.
Display
The K Mem Display memory client is the number of kilobytes of RAM
dedicated to the display lists. The display list holds the intermediate
representation of pages to be printed.
Menu
Administration/Memory/K Mem Display
Choices
00128-12288
Default
00208
Notes
If you change the K Mem Display value, the printer
automatically restarts after you save your changes and exit
from the configuration menu.
Emulation
The K Mem Emulation memory client is the number of kilobytes of
RAM to be used by non-PostScript emulations for temporary storage
and for loading optional emulations. If you receive an emulation error,
you may need to increase the amount of memory for this client.
Menu
Administration/Memory/K Mem Emulation
Choices
00768-08192
Default
00848
Notes
If you change the K Mem Emulation value, the printer
automatically restarts after you save your changes and exit
from the configuration menu.
Emulation (Temporary)
The K Mem Emul Tmp memory client is the number of kilobytes of
RAM to be used by non-PostScript emulations for storing downloaded
(soft) fonts, forms, or macros. Data in this client disappears when the
printer is turned off. This client is listed as Temporary on the status
Printer Configuration
4-47
Memory
page. Increasing this client's size increases the number of PCL downloaded fonts which can be accepted.
Menu
Administration/Memory/K Mem Emul Tmp
Choices
00256-08192
Default
00256
Notes
This value must be greater than the sum of the Min K Spool for
all installed and enabled interfaces.
If you change the K Mem Emul Tmp value, the printer
automatically restarts after you save your changes and exit
from the configuration menu.
Enable Disk Swap
The Enable Disk Swap memory client gives your printer virtual memory capability for all memory clients through the creation of a “swap
file” on the printer’s hard disk. The default size of the swap file
depends on the amount of RAM installed. The more RAM installed,
the larger the default swap file size will be. The printer uses this file as
an extension of its memory. As the physical RAM fills, the printer can
swap the contents to the hard disk file to allow more space. This file
swapping between disk and RAM occurs at various times throughout
the printing process and is completely transparent.
»
Note: The printer must have a hard disk to take advantage of this
feature.
Menu
Administration/Memory/Enable Disk Swap
Choices
No—Don’t enable disk swapping.
Yes—Enable disk swapping.
Default
4-48
No
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
Notes
If disk swapping is enabled and the system hard disk is
removed or not turned on, the printer automatically resets to
the factory defaults. It is then necessary to re-enable disk
swapping if you want this functionality.
Before you install printer options, such as fonts and macros,
ensure that the printer has enough memory, or they may not all
be available for use. If it doesn’t, you can install SIMMs (see
chapter 6, “Printer Options”) to increase printer memory, or you
can install a hard disk (see chapter 6, “Printer Options”) and
enable disk swapping.
The printer must be restarted for changes to the Enable Disk
Swap menu to take effect. You can either let the printer restart
automatically after you save the change and exit from the
configuration menu, or you can wait for the change to take
effect the next time you manually turn on the printer.
If you enable disk swapping and restart the printer, the disk
cache size automatically increases to 256 KB.
Frame Buffer
The Frame Buffer memory client holds rasterized or bitmapped
images of page faces which are ready to be sent to the print engine.
A frame holds the contents of each single page image.
If you are uncertain about how to configure your printer’s memory,
use only the Administration/Memory/Frame Buffer menu. Or use this
menu as a starting point before trying manually to configure your
printer’s memory. It provides a simple method of defining how much
memory should go to each of the clients for the most complicated
printing conditions in your environment. Menu options allow you to
specify the largest media size you plan to use for each resolution.
Memory is then automatically allocated to the clients that require it.
Any excess memory is allocated to the excess memory client. See
chapter 5, “Additional Technical Information,” for more information on
memory and the frame buffer client.
Printer Configuration
4-49
Memory
»
Note: The printer does not allow you to choose features that do not
work with the amount of memory currently installed.
Using this option does not change the media size. It just ensures that
you have enough memory allocated to the appropriate clients to print
on the requested media size.
Menu
Administration/Memory/Frame Buffer/300 dpi
Choices
12x19
Default
12x19
Menu
Administration/Memory/Frame Buffer/600 dpi
Choices
11x17, 12x19, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6, executive, full ledger,
legal, letter, postcard, and universal
Default
11x17
Menu
Administration/Memory/Frame Buffer/1200 dpi
Choices
11x17, 12x19, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6, executive, full ledger,
legal, letter, postcard, and universal
Default
letter
PostScript Fonts
The K Mem for PS Fonts memory client is the number of kilobytes of
RAM dedicated to caching previously scaled bitmap representations
of fonts for the PostScript emulation interpreter. This reduces the
number of times a PostScript font must be converted from outline
form to bitmap form, thus reducing processing time. K Mem for PS
Fonts is listed on the status page as Font Cache.
4-50
Menu
Administration/Memory/K Mem for PS Fonts
Choices
00088-08192
Default
00168
Notes
If you change the K Mem for PS Fonts value, the printer
automatically restarts after you save your changes and exit
from the configuration menu.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
PostScript Heap
The K Mem for PSHeap memory client, listed on the status page as
Heap, is the number of kilobytes of RAM dedicated to the PostScript
emulation interpreter. This memory client holds downloaded PostScript emulation fonts, operators, and forms.
Menu
Administration/Memory/K Mem for PSHeap
Choices
01024-08192
Default
01360
Notes
If you change the K Mem for PSHeap value, the printer
automatically restarts after you save your changes and exit
from the configuration menu.
Printer Memory
The MB Printer Mem memory client, listed as System Use on the status page, is the number of megabytes of RAM available to be split
among the various memory clients. The size of this client's memory
limits the number of jobs that may be queued simultaneously. When
this client's memory is exhausted, the printer slows down, and the
hosts are forced to wait.
Menu
Administration/Memory/MB Printer Mem
Choices
00012-00064
Default
Depends on the amount of memory installed.
Notes
This memory client is not user-configurable.
If disk swapping is enabled (Administration/Memory/Enable
Disk Swap menu), the amount of memory displayed is larger
than the actual amount of memory installed in the printer.
Spooling
The K Mem for Spool memory client, listed on the status page as
Host Input, is the total number of kilobytes of RAM allocated to all
spooling buffers. This memory client stores incoming data from the
various interfaces until it is processed and printed.
Menu
Administration/Memory/K Mem for Spool
Printer Configuration
4-51
Optional
Features
Choices
00112-06144
Default
00200
Notes
This value must be greater than the sum of the Min K Spool for
all installed and enabled interfaces.
Notes
If you change the K Mem for Spool value, the printer
automatically restarts after you save your changes and exit
from the configuration menu.
When the sum of the Min K Spool for all interfaces is less than K Mem
for Spool, memory is allocated as follows:
1
Interfaces with Min K Spool (in the Administration/Communications menu) value greater than zero to receive their specified allocation.
2
Half of the remaining memory is equally distributed among any
interfaces with a Min K Spool value of zero.
3
The other half of the remaining memory is called float memory.
This memory is divided among all ports with a Min K Spool value
of zero. If only one port has a Min K Spool value of zero, that port
receives all float memory.
Optional Features
Several printer options (for example, an optional emulation, an
optional network interface, and internal and external hard disks) affect
printer configuration and the configuration menu. When an option is
installed, its configuration information merges into the configuration
menu. New menu entries may appear, and the choices for existing
configuration values may be extended. See the documentation
accompanying the option to learn exactly how it affects the configuration menu.
4-52
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Passwords
Passwords
Use the Installation menu to password-protect the Operator Control
and Administration menus. The Installation menu appears when an
optional security card is installed in your printer. See chapter 6,
“Printer Options,” for more information on using a security card.
Selecting Passwords
Menus
Installation/Admin Password
Choices
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Default
Blank (no password)
Notes
Enable the password in the Installation/Use Admin Pwd menu.
Menus
Installation/Operator Passwrd
Choices
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Default
Blank (no password)
Notes
Enable the password in the Installation/Use Operator Pwd
menu.
Printer Configuration
4-53
Passwords
Enabling Passwords
Menus
Installation/Use Admin Pwd
Choices
On—Require a password to enter the Administration menu.
Off—Don’t require a password to enter the Administration
menu.
Default
Off
Notes
Select the password in the Installation/Admin Password menu.
Menus
Installation/Use Operator Pwd
Choices
On—Require a password to enter the Operator Control menu.
Off—Don’t require a password to enter the Operator Control
menu.
Default
Off
Notes
Select the password in the Installation/Operator Passwrd
menu.
Using Passwords
When a password is required to enter the Operator Control or Administration menu, the message window displays
ENTER PASSWORD
when you use the Select key to enter the menu. Enter the password
or press the Menu key to return to the menu.
If you specify the correct password, access to the selected menu is
granted. However, if you enter an invalid password, the message window flashes
INVALID PASSWORD
for three seconds and then returns you to the configuration menu.
4-54
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Printer Engine
Features
Printer Engine Features
Through the Administration/Engine menu you can set print enginerelated parameters.
Adjusting the Image Alignment
Usually, you don’t need to change the way images are placed on the
printed page. But if you do, the Image Alignment option allows you to
adjust both the horizontal and the vertical placement.
To check image alignment, print a standard status page (use the Status Page key on the printer control panel) on letter/A4-size paper.
When the printer is placing images properly, the alignment angle bar
in the lower-left corner of the status page is 0.5"/12.7 mm from the left
and bottom edges of the page. If the angle bar is off, use the Image
Alignment option to align the image horizontally and vertically in pixel
increments (1/300" or 0.08 mm).
»
Note: Engine constraints may limit the accuracy of pixel alignment.
Horizontal Offset
Menu
Administration/Engine/Image Alignment/Horiz Offset
Choices
000-300 (0.00"/0 mm-1.00"/25.4 mm)
Default
100 (0.33"/.84 mm)
Notes
See the following sections, “Horizontal and Vertical Controls,”
and “Image Alignment Guidelines.”
Vertical Offset
Menu
Administration/Engine/Image Alignment/Vertical Offset
Choices
000-300 (0.00"-1.00")
Default
100 (0.33"/.84 mm)
Notes
See the following sections, “Horizontal and Vertical Controls,”
and “Image Alignment Guidelines.”
Printer Configuration
4-55
Printer Engine
Features
Horizontal and Vertical Controls
Horizontal and vertical controls are based on the leading edge of the
paper. Although they are consistent, they may seem to be reversed in
function, depending on the leading edge of the paper.
n
n
n
n
Media fed long edge first (for example, letter/A4) with portrait-oriented printing—horizontal and vertical seem reversed.
Media fed long edge first (for example, letter/A4) with landscape-oriented printing — horizontal and vertical operate as
expected.
Media fed short edge first (for example, 11x17/A3) with portrait-oriented printing—horizontal and vertical operate as
expected.
Media fed short edge first (for example, 11x17/A3) with landscape-oriented printing—horizontal and vertical seem
reversed.
Image Alignment Guidelines
Use the following table to determine which value to adjust and
whether to increase or decrease it to get the desired results:
With this
feed
edge...
and this
orientation...
up
down
right
left
vertical
below 100
vertical
above 100
horizontal
above 100
horizontal
below 100
landscape
horizontal
above 100
horizontal
below 100
vertical
above 100
vertical
below 100
portrait
horizontal
above 100
horizontal
below 100
vertical
above 100
vertical
below 100
landscape
vertical
above 100
vertical
below 100
horizontal
below 100
horizontal
above 100
short edge portrait
long edge
4-56
...adjust this control to move the image...
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Printer Engine
Features
Enabling/Disabling the Warning Buzzer
You can enable or disable the warning buzzer the print engine sounds
when it encounters an error (such as paper out).
Menu
Administration/Engine/Buzzer
Choices
On, Off
Default
Off
Specifying Page Recovery Action
When a media jam or other similar error occurs, the printer has the
capability of reprinting the print job from the page on which the jam
occurred.
Menu
Administration/Engine/Page Recovery
Choices
On—Reprints a print job from the page on which the jam or
error occurred.
Default
Off
Off—Don’t reprint a print job when a jam or error occurs.
Setting Default Resolution
This option sets the print engine’s default resolution.
Menu
Administration/Engine/Def Resolution
Choices
300 dpi—300x300 dpi resolution.
600 dpi—600x600 dpi resolution.
1200 dpi—1200x600 dpi resolution.
Default
600 dpi
Notes
If you purchased a printer with 24 MB RAM, all resolutions are
available with all media sizes. However, if you purchased a
printer with 12 MB RAM, 600x600 dpi and 1200x600 dpi are
available only with certain media sizes. Using these
resolutions with other media sizes requires additional memory.
See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for details.
Printer Configuration
4-57
Printer Engine
Features
Setting Toner Options
Two toner cartridge configuration options are available: Conserve
Toner and Toner Out Act[ion].
Conserve Toner
To help you conserve toner, your printer can simulate draft-quality
printing. The amount of toner used during printing is reduced by
screening the black dots in a 1:4.5 ratio. In other words, 1 black dot is
printed for every 4.5 black dots that would in normal printing mode.
»
Note: The Conserve Toner option is designed for draft printing only.
Turn off the Conserve Toner option when printing proof or final copies
of documents to avoid any possible distortion of patterns, halftone,
and images. Unlike the control panel, PS Executive allows you to set
Conserve Toner on a per-job basis
Menu
Administration/Engine/Conserve Toner
Choices
On—Conserve toner; print draft-quality documents.
Off—Don’t conserve toner; print normal, laser-quality
documents.
Default
Off
Toner Out Action
You can configure the printer to stop when a TONER OUT error message is displayed in the message window or to continue printing.
Menu
Administration/Engine/Toner Out Act.
Choices
Continue—Continue printing when a TONER OUT message
displays.
Stop—Stop printing when a TONER OUT message displays.
Default
Continue
Setting Energy Conservation
Your printer is compliant with US Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) Energy Star regulations. The EPA Energy Star Computers
program promotes the use of energy-efficient personal computers,
4-58
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Printer Start-Up
Options
monitors, and printers and the reduction of air pollution caused by
power generation.
»
Note: The addition of some optional interfaces, in some
combinations, may cause the product to become non-compliant.
The Energy Saver option specifies whether the printer changes to a
low-power state (the engine remains on, but the fuser turns off) after a
specified period of inactivity. When a print job is received, the printer
begins processing it in the background and returns to normal power
within 90 seconds.
Menu
Administration/Engine/Energy Saver
Choices
15 Min—Use lower power after 15 minutes of inactivity.
30 Min—Use lower power after 30 minutes of inactivity.
1 Hour—Use lower power after 1 hour of inactivity.
2 Hours—Use lower power after 2 hours of inactivity.
3 Hours—Use lower power after 3 hours of inactivity.
Off—Use normal power all of the time.
Default
1 Hour
Printer Start-Up Options
The Administration/Startup Options menu allows you to configure
your printer to run certain options automatically when you turn it on.
Enabling/Disabling the Start-Up Page
By default, the printer prints a start-up page when you turn it on. The
start-up page lists basic information about the printer, such as its
name, the PostScript emulation level and version, and various printer
settings. However, you can turn the start-up page off to conserve
paper and toner.
Menu
Administration/Startup Options/Do Start Page
Printer Configuration
4-59
Printer Start-Up
Options
Choices
Yes—Print a start-up page each time the printer is turned on.
No—Don’t print a start-up page each time the printer is turned
on.
Default
Yes
Notes
If you used the Administration/Engine/Inputbin x Name options
to change the names of the inputbins, these names replace
Multipurpose, Lower, and Optional in the message window.
Enabling/Disabling the SYS\START File
If you have a hard disk and Do Sys Start is enabled, when the printer
is turned on, the controller checks the hard disk for a PostScript file
named SYS\START and executes this file. This file does not print.
Menu
Administration/Startup Options/Do Sys Start
Choices
Yes—Check the hard disk for and execute the SYS\START file
when the printer is turned on.
No—Don’t check the hard disk for a SYS\START file.
Default
Yes
Loading the PostScript Error Handler
You have the option of loading Error Handler, a diagnostic tool that
allows you to identify PostScript errors encountered during a print job.
Refer to the PostScript Language Reference Manual (Adobe
Systems Incorporated, Reading, PA: Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0201-18127-4) for more information on PostScript errors.
Menu
Administration/Startup Options/Do Error Handler
Choices
Yes—Load the Error Handler.
No—Don’t load the Error Handler.
4-60
Default
No
Notes
You must turn the printer off and on again for this option to take
effect.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Special Pages
Special Pages
Use the Administration/Special Pages menu to print special pages,
such as status pages, calibration pages, header pages, and trailer
pages.
Working with Status Pages
Printing a status page is a two-step procedure: Identify the type of
status page you want to print, and then print it.
Identifying a Status Page Type
Two types of status pages are available:
n
n
Standard—This one-page document lists printer identification
information, current memory configuration, timeouts, communication settings, input buffer sizes, and available fonts.
Advanced—This document, which can be five or more pages
long, contains the same information as the standard status page
as well as configuration menu settings, fonts, and downloaded
emulations.
Menu
Administration/Special Pages/Status Page Type
Choices
Standard—Choose the single-page status page.
Default
Standard
Advanced—Choose the multipage status page.
Printing a Status Page
After you have identified the type of status page to print, use the Status Page key on the printer control panel to print it.
»
Note: If you choose an advanced status page but only a standard
status page prints, the printer has run out of RAM. Either reallocate
memory among the memory clients (see chapter 5, “Additional
Technical Information”) or add more memory to the printer (see
chapter 6, “Printer Options”).
Printer Configuration
4-61
Special Pages
Working with Calibration Pages
A calibration page helps you test and maintain optimal print quality.
The calibration image contains a gray-scale chart that lets you check
print density and gamma correction to get the best possible gray scaling from your printer.
In addition, the calibration page can serve as a quick reference to
help you determine whether you need lower or higher resolution for a
print job. Print a calibration page at each resolution. By comparing the
pages, you can easily see the difference in the screens, the type quality, and the precision of curves and diagonal lines.
Menu
Administration/Special Pages/Calibration Page
Choices
Yes—Print a calibration page.
No—Don’t print a calibration page.
Default
Yes
Note
The calibration page prints when you exit from the menu.
Working with Header Pages
A header page is a separator page that prints before a print job to
help users sort out their jobs. The information on the header page can
be customized. See the QMS Crown Document Option Commands
manual (available for purchase from your QMS vendor) for more
information.
Enabling/Disabling Header Pages
Menu
Administration/Special Pages/Header Page
Choices
On—Print a header page before each job.
Off—Don’t print a header page before each job.
Default
4-62
Off
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Special Pages
Identifying a Header Page Input Source
You can select the inputbin (tray or cassette) from which the printer
pulls media when printing the header page.
Menu
Administration/Special Pages/Header Inputbin
Choices
Multipurpose—Pull header page media from the multipurpose
tray.
Lower—Pull header page media from the 250-sheet paper
cassette.
Optional—Pull header page media from the optional paper
cassette.
Default
Multipurpose
Notes
If you used the Administration/Engine/Inputbin x Name options
to change the names of the inputbins, these names replace
Multipurpose, Lower, and Optional in the message window.
Working with Trailer Pages
A trailer page is a separator page that prints after a print job to help
users sort out their jobs and, if requested, identify print job errors. The
information on the trailer page can be customized. See the QMS
Crown Document Option Commands manual (available for purchase
from your QMS vendor) for more information.
Enabling/Disabling Trailer Pages
Menu
Administration/Special Pages/Trailer Page
Choices
Off—Don’t print a trailer/error page for each print job.
On—Print a trailer/error page for each print job.
On Error—If any print job errors exist, print a trailer page that
lists the errors as well as other trailer page information.
Errors Only—If any print job errors exist, print a trailer page
that lists the errors but omits other trailer page information.
Default
Off
Printer Configuration
4-63
Timeouts
Identifying a Trailer Page Input Source
You can select the inputbin (tray or cassette) from which the printer
pulls media when printing the trailer page.
Menu
Administration/Special Pages/Trailer Inputbin
Choices
Multipurpose—Pull trailer page media from the multipurpose
tray.
Lower—Pull trailer page media from the 250-sheet paper
cassette.
Optional—Pull trailer page media from the optional paper
cassette.
Default
Multipurpose
Notes
If you used the Administration/Engine/Inputbin x Name options
to change the names of the inputbins, these names replace
Multipurpose, Lower, and Optional in the message window.
Timeouts
You can configure a number of printer timeout settings to set a limit to
the amount of time the printer waits to perform a certain task.
Setting an Emulation Timeout
The emulation timeout is the maximum number of seconds emulations other than PostScript (such as HP-GL, HP PCL 5, and Lineprinter) wait for incoming data.
4-64
Menu
Administration/Communications/Timeouts/Emul Timeout
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00005 (5 sec.)
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Timeouts
Notes
A value of 000 is the same as infinity (no timeout).
When selecting a baud rate of 2400 or below (Administration/
Communications/Serial/Baud Rate menu), increase the
emulation timeout value as follows:
Baud Rate
2400
1200
600
300
Emulation Timeout (seconds)
10*
20
40
80
*A baud rate of 2400 works with a 5-second emulation timeout
value, but there is no margin for delays between characters.
Setting an ESP Timeout
The ESP (Emulation Sensing Processor) timeout is the maximum
number of seconds the printer uses to match an emulation before
printing the job in the ESP default emulation (Administration/Emulations/ESP Default Emul menu).
Menu
Administration/Communications/Timeouts/ESP Timeout
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00003 (3 sec.)
Notes
A value of 000 is the same as infinity (no timeout).
Setting a Manual Feed Timeout
The manual feed timeout is the maximum number of seconds the
printer waits for the next sheet of media to be placed in the manual
feed tray. If the timeout occurs, the manual feed job is canceled. The
multipurpose tray, when accessed by a PostScript emulation operator
as bin 0, is the manual feed tray.
Menu
Administration/Engine/Man Feed Timeout
Choices
000-300 (0-5 min.)
Default
060 (1 min.)
Notes
A value of 000 is the same as infinity (no timeout).
Printer Configuration
4-65
Timeouts
Setting a PostScript Emulation Timeout
The PostScript emulation timeout is the maximum number of seconds
the PostScript emulation waits for incoming data.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Timeouts/PS Wait Timeout
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00030 (30 sec.)
However, when a print job is sent from a Macintosh, the PS
Wait timeout is automatically changed to 00300 (5 min.).
Notes
A value of 000 is the same as infinity (no timeout.)
The job is closed and the next job in the queue begins if all of
the following occur:
n
n
n
No additional data is received during the
specified period of time.
The interface didn’t time out.
An EOD (end-of-document commands) was
not seen.
Large print jobs, such as those generated by graphics or
computer-aided design applications, require that this number
be increased to 00300 (5 min.).
Setting a Print Job Timeout
The print job timeout is the maximum number of seconds the printer
processes a print job before it ends the job.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Timeouts/Job Timeout
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00000 (infinity, no timeout)
Notes
A value of 000 is the same as infinity (no timeout).
v
4-66
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
5
Additional
Technical
Information
In This Chapter . . .
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Printer-host communication
Gamma correction
Memory
End job mode
IEEE 1284 bidirectional parallel interface modes
PS Protocol option
HP-GL color encoding
Introduction
Introduction
This chapter provides additional technical information on memory
management, end job mode, the PS Protocol option, and HP-GL
color-to-grayscale conversion.
Printer-Host Communication
Interface
An interface is the point at which two elements connect so they can
work together. A printer-host interface is the way a printer connects to
and works with a host (a microcomputer, workstation, minicomputer,
mainframe computer, or network), and it involves both hardware and
software. The way your printer interfaces with a host depends on
many things, including computer type, computer ports available, interface cabling, application software, printer emulations, and printer drivers.
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO)
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO), a standard feature of QMS
Crown architecture, enables your QMS 1660E Print System to
communicate simultaneously with hosts through the parallel, serial,
Ethernet, and optional interface ports. In other words, SIO allows you
to have more than one host communicating with the printer at one
time.
ESP Technology
Emulation Sensing Processor (ESP) technology is another standard
feature of QMS Crown architecture. ESP technology, which works
with most popular commercially available applications, uses a form of
artificial intelligence to analyze incoming file data and select the
appropriate printer emulation (for example, PostScript emulation,
5-2
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Printer-Host
Communication
HP-GL emulation, HP-PCL emulation, or another optional emulation)
from those installed on the printer.
The print job is processed without your having to change printer
switch settings or send software commands to accommodate different printer emulations.
When your printer is in ESP mode, you can easily print files prepared
for a PostScript printer, an HP LaserJet, or an HP-GL plotter. The file
prints correctly as long as it begins with the traditional PostScript or
HP-GL commands for such items as page formats and job parameters (number of copies, page margins, fonts).
The QMS 1660E Print System prints almost any file sent in a language ESP technology understands, whether you have one, two, or
more hosts, and whether you are communicating through a parallel,
serial, Ethernet, or optional interface. Most users never have to
change from ESP mode to another mode.
Communication Modes
You can either allow your printer to operate in its default ESP mode or
configure its ports to accept jobs in only a particular emulation mode
(for example, PostScript emulation only, HP PCL only, or HP-GL emulation only). The default printer communication settings can be
changed through the Configuration menu, which you access through
the control panel—in the Administration/Communications menu, you
can choose a default emulation for the parallel and serial interfaces,
and in the Administration/Emulations menu, you can configure the
printer defaults for each emulation mode. (The optional LocalTalk
interface uses only PostScript.)
Advanced users can also use PostScript operators to reconfigure
printer ports. Generally, it is best to keep your printer in ESP mode.
Since ESP mode is the factory default, all you have to do to use it initially is connect your host and printer and then send a file.
If you do want to reconfigure the interface ports for specific emulations (or if you need to return the printer to ESP mode), use the
printer's control panel (the Administration/Communications menu).
Additional Technical Information
5-3
Gamma
Correction,
Halftones, and
Screens
Configuring the printer through the control panel is described in chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” of this manual.
Gamma Correction, Halftones,
and Screens
Gamma correction is the compression or expansion of the ranges of
dark or light shades in a printed image to provide the best copy of
scanned images.
Terms
Several terms related to gamma correction are explained in this section to help you better understand the gamma correction concept.
Gray Levels
Gray levels are a progressive series of gray tones between black and
white. Gray levels are obtained by varying the ratio of black to white
dots. The number of gray levels depends on printer resolution and
screen frequency.
»
Note: The number of gray levels at 600x600 dpi , 1200x600, and
1200x1200 dpi is the same. The enhanced print quality is due to
elongated halftone cells rather than to an increased number of gray
levels.
Halftone
A halftone is a printed copy of a scanned image as a set of tiny,
evenly spaced spots of variable diameter that, when printed, visually
blur together to appear as shades of gray. Your QMS 1660 Print System creates halftone cells by mapping each gray level onto a collection of dots.
5-4
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Gamma
Correction,
Halftones, and
Screens
The following factors influence the quality of a halftone:
n
n
n
n
Printer resolution
Screen frequency of the halftone
Quality of the scan
Diameter of the laser beam
Changing print resolution from 300x300 dpi to a higher resolution
smooths the resulting spots. In addition, because each spot is represented by a wider range of dots, a greater the number of gray levels
is possible. The laser beam is part of the print engine, so it’s not a factor you can adjust.
»
Note: The number of gray levels at 600x600, 1200x600, and
1200x1200 dpi is the same. The enhanced print quality is due to
elongated halftone cells rather than to an increased number of gray
levels.
Halftone Types
Your printer provides two different types of halftones—basic and
advanced. These two options allow you to customize the smoothness
of the printed image according to the number of grayscales it uses.
n
n
»
Basic—Regular dot placement at 53 lpi for 300x300 resolution or 71 dpi
for 600x600 resolution.
Advanced—Variable dot placement according to the grayscale
within the image. Generally, this option provides smoother transitions between grayscales within the image.
Note: When the advanced halftone type is chosen, gamma
correction has no effect on the image. In addition, the basic
halftone type provides the same result as the advanced halftone
type at 1200x1200 dpi resolution.
Screen Frequency
Screen frequency is the number of lines of dots that compose each
inch of a halftone screen. The screen frequency of a halftone determines the number of spots used to represent gray levels in a given
area. A 71 lines per inch (lpi) screen frequency has 71 lines of dots
for each inch of the halftone screen.
Additional Technical Information
5-5
Gamma
Correction,
Halftones, and
Screens
The following illustration shows the relationship between screen frequency, gray levels, and print resolution. As the screen frequency
increases, the number of gray levels decreases.
300x300 dpi
Gray Levels
600x600 dpi
250
201
200
150
129
100
73
51
33
50
19
33
9
0
42
53
71
106
Screen Frequency (lpi)
The number of gray levels that your printer can produce depends on
the screen frequency and the print resolution. The default value for
screen frequency using 600 dpi is 71 lpi. This typically allows 73 different levels of gray. The default value for screen frequency using 300
dpi is 53 lpi. This typically allows 33 different levels of gray. You can
change screen frequency through your application or by using the
PostScript setscreen operator.
The extra gray levels available through higher resolution provide a
smoother shift from the darkest black to very light grays while higher
resolution provides sharper image outlines.
Screen Angle
A screen angle is the angle at which a halftone screen prints. The
default screen angle for your QMS 1660 Print System is 45° at
300x300 and 600x600 dpi. This is the normal angle for black and
white printers. At 1200x600 dpi the screen angle is 26.56°.
You can change the screen angle through the PostScript setscreen
operator.
5-6
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Gamma
Correction,
Halftones, and
Gamma Correction Concept
Screens
Often in scanned images, gray scaling may be too light or dark to
show details clearly. Using gamma correction on a gray-scale image
is similar to using a graphic equalizer on a home stereo; the range of
gray levels is adjusted for the best possible image. This sharpens
overall midrange contrast while blacks (shadows) and whites (highlights) keep their original values. Gamma correction sets grayscale
values specified through the PostScript setgray operator to your
printer’s gray-scale values.
Gamma correction is linked to print resolution. The main benefit of
gamma correction is that it improves the print quality of a scanned
image by improving halftoning at a given resolution. To get the best
gray-scale PostScript image at any resolution, gamma correction
should be turned on.
You can set gamma correction through PS Executive or through the
Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Gamma Correction menu
Menu
Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Gamma Correction
Choices
No—Don’t use gamma correction
Yes—Use gamma correction
Default
No
Notes
Gamma correction is automatically adjusted when printer
resolution is changed.
Gamma correction applies only to PostScript images.
Gamma correction has no affect when the printer is set to
1200x1200 dpi resolution.
If turning on gamma correction doesn’t yield a suitable grayscale image for your needs, set a specific gamma correction
value through your drawing application or through the
PostScript settransfer operator. (See your drawing application
documentation and the PostScript Language Reference
Manual for more information.)
Additional Technical Information
5-7
Gamma
Correction,
Halftones, and
Screens
A Special Note for QuarkXPress Users
Make sure you have installed the QMS 1660 and 1660E PDFs in the
PDF folder in the QuarkXPress folder. While QuarkXPress 3.3 allows
you to access either a PDF or a PPD, to have access to all of your
printer’s features, you should use the PDF. To select the PDF, go to
the Page Setup dialog box in QuarkXPress, and hold down the Shift
key while clicking the Printer Type list box. (The italicized selections
are PPDs, and the non-italicized selections are PDFs.)
»
Note: The 1660E PDF allows you to choose between basic and
enhanced (advanced) screening (or halftoning) in QuarkXPress. If
this PDF is not present, you won’t be able to used enhanced
halftoning even though the printer supports it.
Enhanced Screening
To use enhanced (advanced) screening (or halftoning), do the
following:
At the Printer
n
n
In the Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Halftone Type menu
select Advanced.
In the Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Gamma Correction
menu select No.
In Your QuarkXPress Document (Page Setup Dialog Box)
n
n
n
n
n
In the Printer Type listbox select 1660 Enhanced Screening PDF.
If you have EFIcolor software loaded, select None.
Set the Halftone Screen (lpi) to 95.
Select Use PDF Screen Values.
Ensure that the Halftoning box reads
C
M
Y
K
5-8
45
45
45
45
lpi
lpi
lpi
lpi
0
0
0
0
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
Basic Screening
To use basic screening (or halftoning), do the following:
At the Printer
n
n
In the Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Halftone Type menu
select Basic.
In the Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Gamma Correction
menu select Yes.
In Your QuarkXPress Document (Page Setup Dialog Box)
n
n
n
n
In the Printer Type listbox select 1660 Basic Screening PDF.
If you have EFIcolor software loaded, select None.
Set the Halftone Screen (lpi) to the lpi of your choice.
Deselect Use PDF Screen Values.
Memory
Memory allows your printer to store and retrieve information that’s
required to perform many of its tasks. The memory requirements of
each printer are dictated by the applications to be run. Each printer
comes standard with a certain amount of memory, but you may add
more memory as necessary.
The memory is divided among users (or “clients”), each of which allocated a specific amount (or “block”) of memory. Each memory client is
dedicated to a specific printing and application purpose. Your QMS
1660E Print System allows you to distribute its memory among the
various memory clients where it can best serve your specific printing
needs. The following sections provide information on memory management so you can get the most from your printer.
Generally, there are two main reasons for wanting to reconfigure your
printer’s memory:
n
To achieve maximum performance
Additional Technical Information
5-9
Memory
n
To enable additional features
The ability to configure your printer's memory doesn’t necessarily
mean that you must change your current configuration. If you’re presently using all the features you need and the printer is performing efficiently, you shouldn’t feel compelled to reconfigure your printer's
memory. Just remember that if your printing needs change, not only
do you have the ability to increase the amount of printer memory, but
you also can redistribute it where you feel it would best meet your
printing requirements.
QMS Memory Management
Managing the memory on your printer is much the same as managing
your personal income. In money management, you have a certain
amount of income and many ways of spending that income. You
decide where that money goes according to what’s important to you.
There’s no single correct way to manage money, but there is one best
way for you according to your financial obligations. Just as long as
your method works for you.
The same is true for managing the memory on your printer. There’s
no single correct way for everyone to allocate available printer memory. There is, however, a best way to configure your printer's memory
for maximum efficiency in your specific printing environment. For
example, if you use a large number of PostScript fonts of various
point sizes, you may want to increase the amount of memory allocated to the area specified for PostScript fonts. Or you may want to
increase memory to the area that minimizes slowdowns when collating large print jobs.
Memory configuration affects these things as well as the number of
jobs that can be accepted by the printer, the number of options
available simultaneously, the number of downloadable fonts and
emulations that can be stored, and overall printer performance.
Memory Terms
Before you can configure your printer's memory efficiently, you must
first understand the different types of memory and how they work
5-10
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
together. Your QMS 1660E Print System documentation uses the following memory terms:
Memory
Memory allows your printer to store and retrieve information. It’s the
space within your printer where information is stored while being
actively worked on.
Memory Client
A memory client is a user of a block of memory dedicated to a specific
function. Each memory client controls certain features. When insufficient memory is allocated to a specific client, the features it controls
may not be accessible.
Excess Memory
Some printers designate one or two memory clients to receive all the
excess, or undesignated, memory. On your QMS 1660E Print System
excess memory is distributed among all the memory clients.
Storage
Storage is a device in (or on) which information can be kept. There
are three main types of storage—ROM, RAM, and hard disk drives.
ROM stores read-only data, RAM represents temporary storage, and
hard disk drives hold information on a more permanent basis (see the
following definitions).
ROM (Read Only Memory)
This type of memory contains data and/or machine-executable
instructions that can be read but not modified. This information is not
lost when the printer’s power is turned off.
RAM (Random Access Memory)
RAM is the memory your printer uses to perform each task. It can be
written to and read from. Once a task is complete, the memory is free
again to be used for another file. This memory is volatile, so if your
printer loses power while a file is being sent, you must resend the file.
Additional Technical Information
5-11
Memory
The number and type of features you can run on your printer simultaneously depend on the amount of RAM you have and how that RAM
is distributed. Your printer comes with either 12 MB or 24 MB of RAM,
but it is upgradable to 64 MB by adding Single In-line Memory Modules (SIMMs).
RAM Disk
Also called a virtual disk, the RAM disk is an area of RAM that is used
to simulate an additional hard disk. Data can be written and read
more quickly than on a hard disk, but a RAM disk loses any
information stored on it when the printer's power is turned off. The
spooling buffer is a RAM disk client if a hard disk is not available.
SCSI (Small Computer System Interface)
The printer’s SCSI port (located on an optional IDE-SCSI board)
allows you to connect up to three optional SCSI hard disks, providing
storage for fonts, emulations, and other files. Hard disks are also
used to increase the amount of collation that can be accepted and
provide a secondary storage area for spooled data, while providing
virtual memory capabilities.
IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics)
The optional IDE-SCSI board also allows you to connect an internal
IDE hard disk. “Integrated” refers to the fact that all of the controller
electronics are on the drive itself, so no separate adapter card or
expansion slot is required.
Volatile Memory
This type of memory is cleared when the printer is turned off. For
example, most RAM is volatile.
Non-volatile Memory
This type of memory is not lost when the printer loses power.
5-12
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
NV RAM
This protected form of RAM is used to store information such as your
printer’s configuration menu. Configuration options you have chosen,
such as emulations, memory settings, and input bins, are saved to
this non-volatile RAM. This information is not lost when you turn off
your printer.
Physical Memory
Physical memory refers to the amount of RAM installed in the printer.
Virtual Memory
Virtual memory extends the effective size of the printer’s memory by
using a disk file or swap file to simulate additional memory space. It
enables the hard disk to accept data swapped from RAM to free temporarily the RAM for other tasks.
Flash ROM
Quick loading, reprogrammable memory that holds information even
when the printer is turned off is known as flash ROM. Your 1660E
Print System has flash ROM available to hold system code (except
for the Ethernet code) and future system upgrades. The chief advantage of flash ROM is that system upgrades can be loaded from your
computer without the necessity of swapping out expensive EPROMS
or having to place a service call.
Spool
Spooling is temporary storage to hold print jobs until the printer is
available to process them.
Evaluation of Your Printing Environment
The first step in allocating your printer’s memory is to define your
printing needs. Each of your printer’s features requires a minimum
amount of memory. If you use a feature, you must allocate enough
memory to the client which controls it. On the other hand, if there are
features you don’t use, you can take the memory in the clients that
Additional Technical Information
5-13
Memory
control the unused features and assign it to other clients that need
additional memory.
Evaluation Questions
To get a better idea of what your printing requirements and your
printer’s capabilities are, answer the following questions:
1
How much RAM does your printer have (standard and additional
memory)?
2
Do you have the option of installing additional memory if it’s
needed?
3
Does your printer have any internal or external hard disks connected? If so, how many and what size?
4
Which resident emulations will you be running?
5
Will you be loading any non-resident emulations? If so, how many
and which ones?
6
How many printer ports will be connected?
7
Do you have an optional interface connected?
8
How many people will be using this printer simultaneously?
9
How many downloadable fonts will you be using? What sizes?
From which emulation?
10 Will you use many different sizes of fonts/typefaces?
11 How large are the files you typically print? How large is the largest file you’ll be printing?
12 Are most of your files text, or are any graphics intensive?
13 Will you want to download fonts, forms, or operators to memory?
14 Will you be collating documents? If so, how large and complex
will these documents be?
15 What media sizes will you be using?
16 At which resolution will you be printing?
5-14
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
After you have answered all of these questions, read the following
sections to find out which memory clients control features you plan to
use and which memory clients control features you don’t need.
Memory Clients
Memory clients are users of printer memory that are dedicated to a
specific purpose. Each of the memory clients is located in the Administration/Memory menu. When you allocate memory to a specific client through the control panel, it’s allocated in kilobytes (KB). Each
time you make changes in the Administration/Memory menu, print out
a status page to confirm the memory reallocation.
»
Note: The value for each memory client must be divisible by 4 KB.
Therefore, if a value is entered that is not evenly divisible by 4 KB, it’s
automatically converted to the next lower value that’s divisible by 4
KB. For example, if you enter 102 KB, the actual value is lowered to
100 KB, assuming there is enough memory available to allocate to
this client. See the “Memory” section of chapter 4, “Printer
Configuration,” for each memory client’s minimum and default
settings.
Frame Buffer
The Frame Buffer memory client holds rasterized or bitmapped
images of page faces which are ready to be sent to the print engine.
A frame holds the contents of each single page image.
Because the frame buffer memory is so critical to the actual printing of
a page, its allocation takes precedence over that of other memory clients. The number of frames needed to print at engine speed is engine
specific and depends on the size media and resolution. For example,
printing at 600x600 dpi requires four times the amount of memory in
the frame buffer than does 300x300 dpi.
If you are uncertain about how to configure your printer’s memory,
use only the Administration/Memory/Frame Buffer menu. Or use this
menu as a starting point before trying manually to configure your
printer’s memory. It provides a simple method of defining how much
memory should go to each of the clients for the most complicated
printing conditions in your environment. Menu options allow you to
Additional Technical Information
5-15
Memory
specify the largest media size you plan to use for each resolution.
Memory is then automatically allocated to the clients that require it.
»
Note: The printer does not allow you to choose features that do not
work with the amount of memory currently installed.
Using the Frame Buffer option does not change the media size. It just
ensures that you have enough memory allocated to the appropriate
clients to print on the requested media size.
Menu
Administration/Memory/Frame Buffer/300 dpi
Choices
12x19
Default
12x19
Menu
Administration/Memory/Frame Buffer/600 dpi
Choices
11x17, 12x19, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6, executive, full ledger,
legal, letter, postcard, and universal
Default
11x17
Menu
Administration/Memory/Frame Buffer/1200 dpi
Choices
11x17, 12x19, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6, executive, full ledger,
legal, letter, postcard, and universal
Default
letter
Minimum Frame Buffer Size
The following table lists the minimum number of KB that must be
devoted to the frame buffer for all media size and resolution combinations.
Media
5-16
Minimum Frame Buffer Size (in KB)
300x300 dpi
600x600 dpi
1200x600 dpi
1200x1200 dpi
11x17
12x19
1976
2428
7852
9660
15668
19228
31332
38456
A3
A4
A5
A6/Postcard
2052
1004
492
240
8164
3980
1940
944
16252
7940
3864
1860
32500
15880
7724
3720
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
Media
Minimum Frame Buffer Size (in KB)
300x300 dpi
600x600 dpi
1200x600 dpi
1200x1200 dpi
B4
B5
B6
1528
748
372
6072
2964
1444
12076
5892
2868
24148
11784
5732
Executive
788
3124
6220
12440
Full Ledger
2164
8604
17124
34244
Legal
Letter
1252
968
4968
3848
9868
7676
19732
15352
Postcard/A6 240
944
1860
3720
Universal
8400
16720
33440
2112
Display List
Also known as K Mem Display, this client stores compressed representations, or blocks, of the pages to be printed. It takes approximately one compressed block for a normal 8.5" x 11" (215.9 mm x
279.4 mm) text page, four compressed blocks for an 8.5" x 11"
(215.9 mm x 279.4 mm) page that includes some graphics, and as
many as 500 compressed blocks for an extremely complex page.
Many pages of compressed blocks belonging to multiple print jobs
can be stored at the same time in the display list. If enough memory is
allocated to this memory client, a page can always be ready to print
as soon as another page has been imaged to the print engine.
The amount of memory required for each compressed block is printer
specific. The QMS 1660E Print System takes approximately 64 KB of
memory from the display list for each compressed block. However, if
a page includes raster image data (for example, TIFF or bitmap data),
each compressed block will require much more memory.
Increasing the amount of memory in this client may improve printing
throughput and minimize slowdowns due to collating or printing complex pages. If not enough memory is allocated to this client, memory
is taken from the excess memory client to complete a print job.
Additional Technical Information
5-17
Memory
PostScript Font Cache
Also known as K Mem PS Fonts and Font Cache, this memory client
stores bitmapped representations of previously scaled PostScript
fonts. This process reduces the number of times a font must be converted from outline form to bitmap form. Printing pages that have
characters already stored in the font cache is immensely faster than
printing characters not yet in the font cache.
As the font cache memory fills, the printer makes room for new bitmapped characters by erasing those that have been in the cache
longest without being used. By increasing the memory allocated to
this client, the printer can store more characters and spend less time
erasing and replacing characters in the cache. This client has a limit
to the maximum point size it will store.
Normally, you don’t need to change this memory client unless you
use a large number of fonts at various point sizes. If you do, you may
allocate additional memory to this client to improve printer performance. There’s no specific formula to use in figuring the amount of
memory required by the font cache, but after a certain point, large
font caches cause the printer to take longer to print than smaller font
caches because of the search time through the cache. The recommended font cache size is in the following ranges:
n
n
n
n
128-256 KB for 300x300 dpi printing
256-512 KB for 600x600 dpi printing
256-512 KB for 1200x600 dpi printing
384-512 KB for 1200x1200 dpi printing
You should experiment to see what font cache size works best for
you.
PS Heap
Also known as K Mem PSHeap, Heap, PostScript VM, and Virtual
Memory, this client holds downloaded fonts, PostScript operators,
and forms.
Inefficiently coded PostScript jobs can consume an extremely large
amount of virtual memory or leave objects in the PostScript heap after
5-18
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
the print jobs are completed, leading to virtual memory errors. If not
enough memory is allocated to the PS heap, the job cannot print.
Increasing the memory allocated to this client allows more complex
jobs to print and increases the number of fonts that can be downloaded to virtual memory. However, this client should be increased
only if you receive a virtual memory error when attempting to print a
job or download a font, and even then it should be increased only in
small increments until the error message goes away. Excess memory
in the PS heap is not used.
Emulation
Also known as K Mem Emulation, this client is used to store any
optional or loadable emulations, such as LN03 Plus or QUIC II.
Increasing this client’s memory allows you to load more than one
optional emulation so that it doesn’t have to be reloaded every time
the print job is sent.
If an emulation is loaded to process a print job and there is not
enough memory in the emulation client, another emulation already
loaded may be unloaded automatically to obtain enough memory. If
you notice a delay in printing between jobs that have different nonresident emulations, it’s possible that the emulations are having to
reload each time they’re run. Adding to the emulation client may eliminate the unloading and reloading of these emulations and, consequently, increase throughput.
Also increase the emulation client if you’re printing complex nonPostScript jobs that may require more memory to process correctly.
Temporary Emulation
Also known as K Mem Emul Tmp and Emulation Temporary, this client sets the amount of system memory to be used by non-PostScript
emulations for storing downloaded fonts, forms, and macros. By dedicating a portion of memory to this client, your printer can perform
“context switching,” the ability to retain downloaded fonts and forms
even after the printer changes from one emulation to another. Context
switching prevents unnecessary repetitive downloading and traffic
congestion on networks.
Additional Technical Information
5-19
Memory
Normally, this memory client doesn’t need to be changed unless you
plan to download many different non-PostScript fonts.
Spool Buffers
Also known as Host Input and K Mem for Spool, this memory client
stores incoming data from all the interfaces until the emulation can
process the print job. When enough memory is allocated to this client,
the host becomes free more quickly, and the number of jobs that the
printer can accept simultaneously is increased. You should consider
the amount of data being sent simultaneously when allocating memory to the spool buffer. If available, a hard disk can supplement this
client with additional memory needed for spooling. See the “Hard
Disk Management” section later in this chapter.
»
Note: While increasing this client is beneficial in reducing network
traffic, throughput is not necessarily increased. In addition, making
this client too large could actually decrease throughput because of
the overhead involved with managing a large spool.
Disk Cache
This memory client stores frequently used data in system memory
instead of continually storing and retrieving it from a hard disk. If a
hard disk is used and a lot of disk access is required, adding memory
to the disk cache may increase the printer’s performance. For example, if many fonts are stored on disk, faster access to these fonts is
achieved by increasing the disk cache size. Conversely, if no hard
disk is used, the disk cache should be set to 36 KB until a hard disk is
installed and formatted. However, when one or more hard disks are
installed and formatted, they are not available until the disk cache client is increased.
The disk cache is a high speed temporary buffer for data going to and
from the hard disk. It can speed the printer in two ways:
n
n
5-20
Information such as frequently referenced fonts and logos may
still be in the cache and may not have to be pulled off a hard disk
each time they’re needed.
Information being written to a hard disk can be held in the cache
temporarily until a more convenient time to be written to disk.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
The amount of memory needed for the disk cache client is dependent
on the size of the disk, the number of disks, the number of subdirectories on each disk, and the amount of memory dedicated to caching.
As long as the disk cache is enabled and there is enough memory in
the disk cache, all disks are accessible. If insufficient memory is allocated to the disk cache, some disks may be seen while others are
not.
The recommended amount of memory for the disk cache client is as
follows:
n
n
n
20 KB internal usage
0.5 KB per MB of disk storage total for all disks
100 KB of memory dedicated to caching
For example, the recommended amount of memory for the disk
cache for a single 120 MB hard disk would be 180 KB, and for two
120 MB hard disks it would be 240 KB.
»
Note: After you format a hard disk and the FORMAT COMPLETE
message is displayed in the message window, the formatted disk may
not be available to the system until the printer is turned off and then
on again.
You can increase the disk cache size in the following ways:
n
n
n
▲
Add more memory, which automatically increases the disk cache
client’s size. See chapter 6, “Printer Options,” for information on
installing additional printer memory (SIMMs).
Set Administration/Memory/Enable Disk Swap to Yes. Any extra
memory is distributed to all memory clients.
Take any memory, if available and not being used by other clients, and add it to the Administration/Memory/K Mem Display
memory setting.
Caution: This option should be used only by individuals who are
familiar with adjusting memory client’s values. Incorrect use of
this option could cause the system to operate incorrectly.
Additional Technical Information
5-21
Memory
MB Printer Mem
This field shows the size of the physical RAM installed in the printer. If
a hard disk is installed and disk swapping is enabled (Administration/
Memory/Enable Disk Swap), this field also gives the size of available
virtual memory.
System Memory
Also known as System Use, this non-configurable client is the amount
of RAM used to run the printer’s operating system. It’s never
increased or decreased. The system memory subtracted from the
total amount of RAM identifies the amount of RAM available for all the
other memory clients.
Hard Disk Management
You can add one internal IDE hard disk and up to three external SCSI
hard disks to your QMS 1660E Print System. These hard disks serve
as secondary storage places for such items as downloaded fonts,
emulations, and spooled data.
»
Note: Hard disk specifications are included in Q-FAX document 6502,
“QMS-tested SIMMs and Hard Disks.” This document contains a
description of each approved hard disk, its manufacturers and part
numbers, and the QMS products on which it can be used. See
appendix A, “QMS Customer Support,” of this manual to find out how
to access Q-FAX documents.
Virtual Memory Support
Your printer supports virtual memory capabilities for the spooling
buffer (Administration/Memory/K Mem for Spool menu) and the display list (Administration/Memory/K Mem Display) clients when a hard
disk is installed and disk swapping is enabled (Administration/Memory/Enable Disk Swap menu). These capabilities extend the amount
of memory available for certain supported features, such as spooling
and collation. If all of the memory in the spooling buffer or display list
is being used Enable Disk Swap is enabled, the printer stores the
“overflow” on a hard disk.
5-22
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
»
Note: Chunk collation begins automatically after 50 pages regardless
of how much memory is available to the display list client.
Specific Printing Environment Example
Since configuring memory is not an exact science, it may be helpful to
see how others in various printing environments have allocated their
printer memory to meet their printing needs best. The following examples are to be used only as a guideline for configuring your own
printer's memory.
Example
A QMS 1660E Print System with 12 MB of RAM. As many as 35 people use this printer, sending text and graphics PostScript files to be
printed on 8.5" x 11" (215.9 mm x 279.4 mm) and 11" x 17" (279.4 mm
x 431.8 mm) media. They have configured their printer to print at
600x600 dpi.
This is what their Current Memory Configuration box on their status
page looks like:
Location
Size
Host Input:
Display List:
Font Cache:
Heap:
Framebuffer:
Emulation:
Emulation Temporary:
Disk Cache:
System Use:
Total Memory:
PostScript Emulation VM:
VM allocated:
VM remaining:
Paper Size:
Resolution:
188 KB
204 KB
164 KB
1356 KB
7852 KB
844 KB
256 KB
36 KB
128 KB
12288
1026716
89940
936776
11" x 17"
600
Additional Technical Information
5-23
End Job Mode
End Job Mode
When sending print jobs through the serial and parallel protocols,
some applications and their printer drivers append an end-of-document command (EOD) to each print job to ensure that each file prints
correctly. The reason for this is that some protocols and print queuing
systems send print jobs to the printer as one continuous data stream
(one print job immediately following another).
But the problem with this system is that some applications are limited
by the printer language and are unable to produce an EOD command. This becomes even more problematic when you’re printing to
a QMS 1660E Print System, where print jobs of all supported emulations can be received simultaneously. ESP technology examines the
first part of each print job to determine its emulation. Once the emulation is identified, the print job processes without further checking. This
minimizes any slowdown resulting from the sensing process. To help
ESP technology determine the proper emulation of successive print
jobs, the printer must be able to identify the end of job for each job.
Therefore, unless a wait timeout (the amount of time the printer is
waiting on data from the host) occurs and ends each print job, or
unless you add an EOD command between each file being printed
through these protocols, some print jobs may be interpreted by the
printer as one job and may “run” together. See chapter 4,”Printer Configuration,” for more information on emulation timeout.
When printing multiple jobs with little or no time delay and with no
EOD command between each job, the serial and parallel protocols
may be unable to detect an end of job automatically. So the End Job
Mode feature on QMS Crown printers was designed to allow you to
set the end of document for print jobs being sent through these protocols.
Common Reasons to Use End Job Mode
If you are printing via the serial and parallel protocols, and one of the
following conditions exists, you may need to set the end job mode:
5-24
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
End Job Mode
n
n
n
n
n
Multiple print jobs with little or no time delay and with no EOD
commands have been sent to the printer and the message window displays only one active job.
Multiple print jobs of the same printer language have been sent to
the printer and they print on the same page. (For example, you
send the AUTOEXEC.BAT file with no EOD command followed
with little or no time delay by the CONFIG.SYS file, and they both
print on the same page.)
Multiple print jobs of different printer languages “run” together as
if they are a single print job. (For example, you send a PCL print
job followed by a PostScript print job, and the PCL job prints and
is followed by what appears to be program code instead of your
PostScript print job.)
You want to print multiple jobs with header pages.
You want to print multiple jobs where job separation is important.
When your printer is in ESP mode, printing multiple jobs through the
serial and parallel protocols and end job mode is not set, ESP technology interprets the emulation for only the first job. The print jobs
that follow are interpreted as being the same emulation as the first
job. For example, if there are two print jobs, the first a PCL file with no
EOD command, and the second a PostScript file with a Ctrl-D (a
PostScript end-of-file character)—ESP technology interprets the
emulation of the first job correctly. But since the first print job has no
EOD command, it “runs” into the second job, and even though the
second job is PostScript, it prints in PCL.
Using the EOD Commands
Since the serial and parallel protocols may not be able to detect an
EOD automatically, due to a lack of an EOD command in some printer
languages, you can insert an EOD command at the end of your file to
tell the printer where your print job ends. QMS Crown printers recognize two end-of-document commands: QMS EOD and HP EOD.
These commands are functionally the same. They enable data
stream sensing for the EOD command, allowing your host computer
to control print job separation. The QMS EOD and the HP EOD
Additional Technical Information
5-25
End Job Mode
commands perform an end of document for all of the printer
emulations supported on your printer (PostScript, HP-GL, HP PCL,
and Lineprinter).
See your system administrator or applications development department to have them identify the standard EOD command for your
organization, or to have them select a standard EOD command.
Setting the End Job Mode for the Serial and
Parallel Protocols
Your printer can be connected through the serial or parallel interface
to a stand-alone PC, to a PC print server, or to some other type of
print queuing system. This section provides a quick guide to the steps
needed to set the end job mode for each environment. The following
sections provide more detailed information for each step.
Stand-Alone PC
1
Set the end job mode from the printer's control panel.
2
Add the EOD command to your file.
Note: If using steps 1 and 2 is not feasible in your stand-alone
PC environment, you can alternatively use a program that either
causes an emulation timeout or that inserts an EOD command
between each print job. See your QMS vendor for more
information on this type of program.
»
PC Print Server
1
Set the end job mode from the printer’s control panel.
2
Create a job separator to append an EOD command and
send it between each print job.
Other Print Queuing Systems
If you use a print queuing system other than a PC print server and
you experience what appears to be an EOD command problem, you
may need to use another procedure, such as a print utility, an initialization sequence, or a header page to add an EOD command. See
5-26
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
End Job Mode
your print queuing system documentation, your network administrator, or your QMS vendor for more information.
Setting the End Job Mode via the Control
Panel
Use the following procedure to set the end job mode from the printer’s
control panel for printers connected via the serial or parallel interface
to a stand-alone PC, a PC print server, or some other type of print
queuing system.
»
Note: If you print both serial and parallel protocol jobs, then you must
set the end job mode for each protocol.
Wait for the printer to go idle, and then press the control panel keys in
the order shown in the following instructions to access the End Job
Mode option. The printer responds by displaying a status message in
the message window.
»
Note: You may need to press the Next key one or more times to
advance through the list of selections or options.
Key
Purpose
Online/
Offline
Turns off the Online/Offline indicator and IDLE
readies the printer for configuration.
Menu
Accesses the configuration menu.
CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
Next
Advances to the Operator Control/
Administration menu.
CONFIGURATION
ADMINISTRATION
Select
Accesses the Administration menu
ADMINISTRATION
COMMUNICATIONS
Next
Advances to the Communications/Parallel COMMUNICATIONS
(or Serial) menu.
PARALLEL (or
SERIAL)
Select
Accesses the Parallel (or Serial) menu.
PARALLEL/SERIAL
MODE
Next
Advances to the Parallel (or Serial)/End
Job Mode menu.
PARALLEL/SERIAL
END JOB MODE
Select
Accesses the End Job Mode menu.
END JOB MODE
OPTION
Additional Technical Information
Message Window
5-27
End Job Mode
Next
Advances to the appropriate option (QMS END JOB MODE
EOD, HP EOD, or None).
OPTION
Select
Selects the option.
OPTION
IS SELECTED
Returns to the Parallel (or Serial)/End Job PARALLEL/SERIAL
Mode menu.
END JOB MODE
Online/
Offline
Asks you if you want to save your
change.
SAVE CHANGES?
NO
Next
Advances to the Yes option.
SAVE CHANGES?
YES
Select
Saves your change and idles the printer.
IDLE
Online/
Offline
Puts the printer back on line.
IDLE
Adding an EOD Command to Your File
When adding an EOD command to your file, use the syntax for the
selected EOD command exactly as written (the command's syntax is
case sensitive).
»
»
5-28
Note: <ESC> represents the escape character. (The decimal value
for the escape character is 027, and the hexadecimal value is 1B.)
How you enter the escape character depends on your application.
Some applications allow you to press and hold the ALT key and then
type 027 to enter the escape character, while others allow you to type
certain character sequences to represent the escape character. See
your computer or application documentation to find out how to enter
the escape character on your system.
For this EOD command...
Use this syntax...
QMS EOD
%%EndOfDocument
<CR><LF>
HP EOD
<ESC>%-12345X
Note: The <CR><LF> sequence following the %%EndOfDocument
line for the QMS EOD is necessary to avoid an INPUT IDLE message
remaining in the printer message window after the document finishes
printing.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
End Job Mode
When the QMS EOD or the HP EOD is set, the printer does not recognize the Ctrl-D EOD command. Add your organization's standard
EOD command to the end of your print file, or add it to a separate file
as follows.
Adding an EOD Command to the End of Your File
Create an output file (for example, ASCII, PCL, or PostScript file to
disk) and add your organization's standard EOD command (QMS
EOD or HP EOD) to the end of that file.
Sample output file:
Text
Text
Text
Text
%%EndOfDocument
Adding an EOD Command to a Separate File
Create an ASCII text file that contains only the EOD command. For
example, create a DOS batch file listing each print filename followed
by the EOD command filename for each file being printed. Then “run”
the batch file to print your list of files.
Sample DOS batch file:
Command
Explanation
Print mktg.doc
Print end.txt
Print acct.doc
Print end.txt
Job filename
EOD command filename
Job filename
EOD command filename
Creating a Network Job Separator
If your printer is connected to a network through a PC and the PC is
acting as a print server managing the printing of shared network files,
then your system administrator must create a job separator and
associate it with a print job queue. Different network environments
have different procedures for creating the job separator, such as
Additional Technical Information
5-29
Parallel
Interface Modes
initialization sequences, custom banner pages, print job headers, or
print job trailers. The print server does not necessarily send multiple
print jobs to the printer in the order that you queued them to the
printer. The network job separator is accessed with each print job, so
this ensures that network job separation is enforced. See QMS
Crown Network Notes for more information on how to create a
network job separator for several commonly used networks.
Parallel Interface Modes
In addition to Centronics parallel communication, your printer’s parallel interface provides IEEE 1284 bidirectional parallel communication,
which supports five modes of operation. The printer automatically recognizes and uses the mode dictated by the host.
Byte Mode
Printer-host communication is done in bytes.The byte mode may be
used by the host device in a DMA (Direct Memory Access) mode for
more efficient operation.
When byte transfer is complete and there is no more data to transmit,
the host may do one of the following:
n
n
n
Terminate and return to the compatibility mode.
Stay in the Host Busy, Data Not Available phase.
Set Host Busy Low, putting the interface into the idle phase.
If there is additional data, the host may do one of the following:
n
n
n
Set Host Busy Low, indicating that the host can accept additional
data.
Stay in the Host Busy, Data Not Available phase.
Terminate and return to the compatibility mode.
Check your host documentation to see if the host is 1284 compatible.
5-30
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
PS Protocol
Option
Compatibility Mode
Printer-host communication is done in a manner that ensures compatibility.
ECP (Enhanced Compatibility Port) Mode
This is an advanced version of byte mode which allows transfer of
data in either direction without returning to the compatibility mode.
The communication is a half-duplex channel with either device, the
host or the printer, making a request for data transfer when there is
available data. In the case of simultaneous requests for transfer, the
printer always defers to the host.
EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port) Mode
Printer-host communication is done via asynchronous bidirectional
eight-bit transfer. A return to compatibility mode is not required.
Nibble Mode
Printer-host communication is done in nibbles (four bits; one-half
byte) with the low order nibble sent first. A transfer of two nibbles is
required for each byte of information.
PS Protocol Option
Your QMS 1660E Print System supports PS Protocol, a new protocol
for communication between the printer and a host computer over the
serial, parallel, and optional interfaces. This binary communications
protocol (BCP) allows any 8-bit binary value (0-255) to be treated as
data, while allowing a few of the values to function as special control
characters. When communicating 8-bit binary data in binary or binary
fixed mode, the printer uses the quoting mechanism of the binary
communications protocol to distinguish between the special control
characters and print job binary data.
Additional Technical Information
5-31
PS Protocol
Option
To differentiate data from the special control characters, any data that
is the same as one of the following special control characters must be
quoted.
ASCII
Keyboard
ASCII
Name
ASCII Hex
Control Function
^A
^C
^D
^E
^Q
^S
T
^\
SOH
ETX
EOT
ENQ
DC1
DC3
DC4
FS
0x01
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x11
0x13
0x14
0x1C
Quote data character
Abort job and flush to end of file
End-of-file marker
(Reserved for future use)
XON in XON/XOFF flow control
XOFF in XON/XOFF flow control
Job status request
(Reserved for future use)
A data byte is quoted by replacing it with a two-character sequence.
The first character is a ^A (ASCII hex 0x01), and the second character is the character itself XORed with the ASCII value 0x40. For
example, to send the value 0x14(^T) as data, send the two-character
sequence 0x01 0x54 (^a T) instead. (ASCII “T” is the result of XORing
^T with 0x40).
This method of quoting guarantees that whenever the printer receives
any of the eight control characters, the control function is intended
regardless of whether the preceding character is a ^A. Any data byte
not equal to one of the eight special control characters is transmitted
by sending the data byte.
For more information on BCP and quoting, see the PostScript Language Reference Manual (Adobe Systems, Inc., Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0-201-18127-4), the “Adobe Serial and
Parallel Communications Protocols Specification” (in Adobe Developer Support. Adobe Systems, Inc., February 14, 1992), and the
“PostScript Language Reference Manual” (in Supplement for Version
2011, Adobe Systems, Inc., January 24, 1992).
5-32
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
PS Protocol
Option
Options
The following options are available in the PS Protocol menu.
Menu
Administration/Communications/Interface/PS Protocol
Choices Name and Description
Interfaces
Parallel, serial,
Normal—Enables standard, ASCII hex
Ethernet, Tokenprotocol. Data is sent and received in
ASCII format. This mode is recommended Ring, LocalTalk
if you do not print binary data. It was
designed for data in the printable ASCII
range. Print jobs can alter the PS protocol
value through PostScript operators.
Normal Fixed—Enables standard, ASCII hex
protocol. Print jobs cannot alter this value
through PostScript operators.
Parallel, serial,
Ethernet, TokenRing, LocalTalk
Binary—Enables binary communications
protocol. Print jobs can alter this value
through PostScript operators. Data in the
printable ASCII range also prints)
Parallel, serial,
Ethernet, TokenRing, LocalTalk
Binary Fixed—Enables binary communications Parallel, serial,
protocol. Print jobs can not alter this value Ethernet, Tokenthrough PostScript operators. Data in the Ring, LocalTalk
printable ASCII range also prints.
Ethernet, TokenQBinary (Quoted Binary)—Enables binary
Ring, LocalTalk
communications protocol. Print jobs can
alter this value through PostScript
operators. Data in the printable ASCII
range also prints. Use the special quoting
mechanism for the special characters and
^D (EOF).
Ethernet, TokenQBinary (Quoted Binary) Fixed—Enables
binary communications protocol. Print jobs Ring, LocalTalk
cannot alter this value through PostScript
operators. Data in the printable ASCII
range also prints. Use the special quoting
mechanism for the special characters and
^D (EOF).
Additional Technical Information
5-33
HP-GL Color
Encoding
Default
Normal
Notes
A data stream sent through the serial or parallel interface using
Binary is treated the same as a data stream sent through an
optional network interface using QBinary. However, a data stream
sent through an optional network interface using QBinary is not
treated the same as a data stream sent through the same interface
using Binary.
Advantages
The main advantage of using the Binary and Fixed Binary PS protocol
modes when sending binary data is that these modes compress the
data stream allowing your documents to be smaller so you can send
smaller jobs to the printer. For example, some device drivers can format bit map images as binary data instead of as ASCII hex data.
Implementation
To implement PS protocol for sending binary data on your system you
need a device driver available with some applications or operating
systems, or you can alternatively use a program to read the data and
write out the quoted characters. See your QMS vendor for any available information on device drivers or binary filter programs.
HP-GL Color Encoding
The term “pen” in the HP-GL emulation refers to a logical pen (in
other words, the current pen position) rather than to a physical pen on
a plotter. A pen and a pen color are selected to draw images. This
emulation supports 8 pens and pen colors.
5-34
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
HP-GL Color
Encoding
Since your QMS 1660E Print System is a monochrome (black and
white) printer, the pen colors are converted to shades of gray. The
default color mappings for the 8 pens are as follows:
»
Pen
Pen Color
Level of Gray
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Black
Black
Red
Green
Blue
Violet
Orange
Brown
100%
100%
70%
41%
89%
59%
25.8%
50%
Note: The default color for both pen 1 and pen 2 is black. However,
the pen width for these two pens is different. Pen 1 is 0.7 mm and pen
2 is 0.3 mm.
The printer maps each pen to its assigned color, then converts the
color to a grayscale using the National Television System Committee
(NTSC) standard equation for encoding color. This equation converts
a given set of CMYK values to grayscale. For the 8 pen colors
assigned to pens 1 - 8, the printer uses the designated grayscale; for
any other pen color, the printer uses the following equation:
[(C*0.3) + (M*0.59) + (Y*0.11) + K] ÷ 255
»
Note: This equation assumes that each grayscale is a byte value that
ranges from 0 to 255 (100%). If the sum of the left-side (calculation in
brackets) of the NTSC equation is greater than 255, then the sum is
set equal to 255.
Additional Technical Information
5-35
HP-GL Color
Encoding
Example
Any color can be reproduced by using some combination of CMYK. If
you have defined the following CMYK values for the color brown in
your application, the NTSC equation that follows shows you how the
percentage of grayscale for the color is derived.
CMYK Value
C (96)
M (128)
Y (224)
K (0)
[(96*0.3) + (128*0.59) + (224*0.11) + 0] ÷ 255 = [(28.80) + (75.52) + (24.64) + 0] ÷ 255 = 50%
v
5-36
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
6
Printer Options
In This Chapter . . .
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Additional paper cassettes, paper feeder, paper cassette
supporter, and paper output ramp
Font and security cards
Downloadable emulations
Single in-line memory modules (SIMMs)
Intellifont SIMM
1200x1200 dpi resolution daughterboard
LocalTalk and network interfaces
Internal and external hard disks
Software-loadable print system software
Introduction
Introduction
QMS offers several options to expand the capabilities of your QMS
1660E Print System. The following are available for purchase from your
QMS vendor:
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Media input options—paper cassettes in all printer-supported
media sizes, paper feeder, and paper cassette supporter
Paper exit ramp for 11.7" x 19.5"/297.18 x 495.30 mm media
Font and security cards
Downloadable emulations
SIMMs (single in-line memory modules)
Intellifont SIMM
1200x1200 dpi resolution daughterboard
LocalTalk and network interfaces
Storage options—IDE-SCSI hard disk board, internal IDE hard
disk, and external SCSI hard disks
Kanji font internal IDE hard disk
Software-loadable print system software
If your vendor cannot offer these options for your printer, see appendix
A, “QMS Customer Support.”
6-2
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Input
Options
Media Input Options
Paper Cassettes
Additional paper cassettes provide two main benefits:
n
n
»
Expanded flexibility—You can switch media size, color, and
type without having to unload and load media. Just slip one cassette out and another in.
Increased paper-feed capacity—Install a paper feeder and second cassette (as well as a cassette support, if necessary), and
then chain cassettes. (See chapter 3, “Advance Printing Features,” in the Operation manual for instructions.)
Note: When using dual cassettes, you must have both cassettes
installed to print.
The QMS 1660E Print System has three user-installable media-input
configurations.
Standard
The 100-sheet multipurpose tray and 250-sheet
standard cassette give you a total paper-feed
capacity of 350 sheets.
250-Sheet Cassette
250-Sheet Cassette
Dual cassette with paper feeder
A paper feeder and a second 250-sheet cassette
increase the printer’s total paper-feed capacity to 600
sheets.
250-Sheet Cassette
250-Sheet Cassette
500-Sheet Cassette
Printer Options
Dual cassette with paper feeder and cassette
supporter
A paper feeder and cassette supporter allow you to
install a 500-sheet cassette (letter/A4-size only),
increasing the printer’s total paper-feed capacity to
850 sheets.
6-3
Media Input
Options
Paper Feeder
The paper feeder allows you to
n
n
Install a second 250-sheet paper cassette, increasing the
printer’s total paper-feed capacity to 600 sheets.
Load two different types/sizes/colors of media and easily change
between them by switching cassettes.
Because the paper feeder attaches to the bottom of the printer, no
extra space is necessary. It is also easy to install.
Unpacking the Paper Feeder
1
Take the paper feeder and rear cassette cover from the shipping carton.
2
Remove any tape and packing materials from the paper
feeder and rear cassette cover.
3
Save the packing materials in case you ever have to move or
ship the printer to a new location.
Installing the Paper Feeder
1
Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and all
interface cables.
This allows easier installation.
2
6-4
Remove the paper cassette from the printer.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Input
Options
3
Remove the
connector
cover on the
lower-right rear
of the printer.
Lift the back
side of the
printer with your
left hand, and
pull the connector cover away
from the printer.
4
Place the paper feeder on a stable, flat surface, with the cassette installation slot toward you.
5
Pull the green lock levers, located on the right and left of the
paper feeder bottom, toward you to release them.
Lock Claws
Media
Cassette
Lock Levers
Printer Options
6-5
Media Input
Options
M
6
Move the connector cable located at the inner left of the paper
feeder to the outside of the paper feeder.
7
Place the printer on the paper feeder.
WARNING! The printer weighs about 50 lbs (23 kg). Don’t lift it by
yourself.
ACHTUNG! Der Drucker wiegt ca 23 kg; bitte versuchen Sie
niemals, das Gerät alleine anzuheben oder zu tragen.
Make sure the
extrusions on the
paper feeder are
inserted into the
holes on the bottom of the printer.
Be careful that the
connector cable is
not caught
between the
printer and the
paper feeder.
Extrusions
Lock Levers
6-6
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Input
Options
8
Push the green lock levers, located at the right and left of the
paper feeder bottom, to the rear to lock them.
9
Plug the paper feeder connector cable into the connector at
the back of the printer.
You moved this cable outside the paper feeder in step 6.
Connector
10 Replace the connector cover on the printer.
You removed this cover in step 3.
11 Reconnect the printer power cord and interface cables, and
then turn on the printer.
12 Replace the paper cassette you removed earlier, and install
the second cassette.
13 If you are using a legal/B4-size or an 11" x 17"/A3-size paper
cassette with the optional paper feeder, place the rear cassette
covers on both cassettes, one at the rear of the printer and
the other at the rear of the paper feeder.
Printer Options
6-7
Media Input
Options
Removing the Paper Feeder
If you installed the paper feeder before the cassette supporter, you
must first remove the paper feeder to install the cassette supporter.
Remove the paper feeder from the printer as follows (referring to the
illustrations in the previous section if necessary):
1
Turn off the printer, and disconnect the power cord and all
interface cables.
2
Remove the paper cassettes from the printer.
3
Remove the paper feeder from the printer.
Follow, in reverse order, the steps in the “Installing the Paper
Feeder” section of this chapter. The following is a quick overview
of the procedure:
a
Remove the connector cover.
b
Unplug the paper feeder's connector cable.
c
Unlock the green lock levers on the paper feeder (pull them
toward you).
d
Lift the printer off the paper feeder.
e
If you are installing a cassette supporter, refer to “Installing
the Cassette Supporter,” later in this chapter.
Otherwise, continue with step f.
6-8
f
Replace the connector cover.
g
Reconnect the power cord and interface cables. Then turn on
the printer and reinstall the paper cassette.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Input
Options
Cassette Supporter
The cassette supporter allows you to
n
n
Install a 500-sheet paper cassette, increasing the printer’s total
paper-feed capacity to 850 sheets.
Load two different types/sizes/colors of media and easily change
between them by switching cassettes.
Because the cassette supporter attaches to the bottom of the printer,
no extra space is necessary. It is also easy to install.
Unpacking the Cassette Supporter
1
Remove the cassette supporter from the shipping carton and
from its vinyl bag.
2
Save the packing material in case you ever have to move or
ship the printer to a new location.
Installing the Cassette Supporter
1
If the paper feeder is already attached to the printer, remove
it.
Refer to the “Removing the Paper Feeder” section earlier in this
chapter for instructions. The cassette supporter is installed on the
paper feeder, and then the paper feeder is installed on the printer.
2
Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and all
interface cables.
This allows easier installation.
3
Remove the paper cassette from the printer.
Printer Options
6-9
Media Input
Options
4
Pull out the lock buttons on the cassette supporter until you
hear them click.
The lock buttons are located on the bottom-left and bottom-right
of the cassette supporter.
Lock
5
Place the cassette supporter on a flat, stable surface with the
cassette installation slot toward you.
6
Fit the holes on the bottom of the paper feeder onto the
extrusions on the cassette supporter.
Extrusions
6-10
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Input
Options
7
Lock together the paper feeder and the cassette supporter.
Stand the paper feeder and the cassette supporter on their ends.
Then, using your thumb, push the lock buttons on the bottom left
and right sides of the cassette supporter until you hear a click.
Lock
8
Attach the paper feeder to the printer.
See the “Installing the Paper Feeder” section earlier in this chapter for instructions.
Removing the Cassette Supporter
If you find it necessary to remove the cassette supporter from the
printer, use the following procedure (referring to the illustrations in the
previous section, if necessary):
1
Turn off the printer, and disconnect the power cord and all
interface cables.
2
Remove the paper cassettes from the printer.
3
Remove the paper feeder from the printer.
Follow the steps in the “Removing the Paper Feeder” section earlier in this chapter.
Printer Options
6-11
Media Input
Options
4
Remove the cassette supporter from the paper feeder.
Follow, in reverse order, the steps in the “Installing the Cassette
Supporter” section of this chapter. The following is a quick overview of the procedure:
a
Pull the lock buttons on the cassette supporter that lock it to
the paper feeder.
b
Take the paper feeder off the cassette supporter.
c
Push the lock buttons in on the cassette supporter.
d
Reconnect the interface cables and power cord.
e
Turn on the printer.
500-Sheet Paper Cassette
Once you have installed a paper feeder and a cassette supporter, you
can use a 500-sheet paper cassette to increase your printer’s total
paper-feed capacity to 850 sheets.
»
Note: 500-sheet cassettes support only letter/A4-size media.
Loading the 500-Sheet Paper Cassette
To ensure that all 500 sheets fit in the cassette and that the paper stack
is properly leveled out, use the following procedure to load the 500sheet paper cassette.
1
6-12
Fan a stack of 500 sheets of paper, and align the paper on a
flat surface.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Media Input
Options
2
3
Load the paper in three steps as follows:
a
Up to the bottom limit mark
b
Halfway to the top limit mark
c
Up to the top limit mark
Top Limit
Ensure that the paper stack lies flat, does not exceed the top
limit mark, and is positioned under the retaining clips.
Retaining Clips
Printer Options
6-13
Paper Output
Ramp
4
Insert the cassette in the cassette installation slot.
Push the cassette straight into the installation slot until it’s firmly
seated.
5
Adjust the media stop to fit the size paper you’re using.
The printer delivers your output print-side down to the output tray
at the top of the printer. The media stop keeps the paper positioned correctly in the output tray.
Paper Output Ramp
The paper output ramp extends the QMS 1660E’s output tray to
accommodate 11.7" x 19.5"/297.18 x 495.30 mm media.
Use the following instructions to install the paper output ramp:
6-14
1
Attach one of the Velcro pieces to the back of the media
stopper.
2
Set the paper output ramp on top of the printer output tray.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Font and
Security Cards
3
Attach the second piece of Velcro to the inside of the paper
output ramp, making sure it is aligned with the first piece you
attached.
4
Slide the paper output ramp along the output tray until the two
pieces of Velcro fit together snugly.
Velcro pieces
▲ Caution: When removing the paper output ramp, carefully separate
the two Velcro pieces so as not to damage the media stopper.
Font and Security Cards
The two PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association) card slots allow you to use the following options to
increase the functionality of your printer:
n
n
Font cards—Such as the HP ProCollection for the HP emulations on your printer
Security card—To password-protect the printer configuration
menu
Printer Options
6-15
Font and
Security Cards
The card slots are located on the right side of the printer below the
output tray. The printer supports up to two cards at once. You may insert
any type of card in either slot.
▲ Caution: Your printer supports only QMS PCMCIA cards. These
cards are not backward compatible with previously released QMS
printers, and cards for previous printers are not compatible with your
printer.
In addition, some cards may require that you add more memory to
your printer.
For a complete list of available font cards, contact your QMS vendor.
▲ Caution: The printer must be off line (the Online/Offline indicator is
off) before you insert or remove cards. Press the Online/Offline key
once to take the printer off line. If you insert a font card in one of the
card slots without taking the printer off line, the card will not be
recognized.
Using a Font Card
Use the following procedure to use a font card on your printer. If your
printer has a hard disk, you can install the font information from the
card onto your hard disk. See “Installing an Optional Font” later in this
chapter for instructions.
1
If you are using an HP ProCollection font card, turn off the
printer.
Otherwise, press the Online/Offline key to take the printer off
line. (The Online/Offline indicator should be off.)
6-16
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Font and
Security Cards
2
Insert the font card.
You can use either slot,
but the card must be
inserted with the QMS
label side facing up. You
should feel the card snap
into place.
3
Depending on the type of card you are installing, either turn
on the printer again or press the Online/Offline key to put the
printer back on line.
The fonts are now ready to be used.
Note: If you’re using a font card, you should also make sure that
the printer driver you have installed for each application supports
the fonts on the card. If it doesn’t, contact your application
manufacturer for support.
»
Removing a Font Card
Use the following procedure to remove a font card:
1
If you are using an HP ProCollection font card, turn off the
printer.
Otherwise, press the Online/Offline key to take the printer off
line.
2
Pull out the card gently.
3
Depending on the type of card you are removing, either turn
on the printer again or put it back on line.
Printer Options
6-17
Font and
Security Cards
Using a Security Card
A security card allows the Operator Control and Administration menus
to be password protected, so only users who know the password can
change printer configuration settings. When a security card is inserted
to one of the card slots, the Installation menu appears in the printer's
configuration menu. See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for complete menu information.
▲ Caution: The printer must be off line (the Online/Offline indicator
must be off) before you insert or remove a security card. Press the
Online/Offline key once to take the printer off line. If you forget to take
the printer off line before you insert or remove a security card, turn the
printer off and back on again to regain access to the data stored in
the printer's memory.
1
Take the printer off line.
The Online/Offline indicator should be off.
2
Insert the security card.
You can use either slot,
but the card must be
inserted with the QMS
label side facing up. You
should feel the card snap
into place.
6-18
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Font and
Security Cards
3
Select the password.
Use the Installation menu to password-protect the Operator Control and Administration menus. The Installation menu appears
only when an optional security card is installed in your printer.
Menu
Installation/Operator Passwrd
Installation/Admin Password
Choices
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Default
Blank
Notes
Enable the passwords in the Installation/Use Passwrd and
Installation/Use Admin Pwd menus.
Chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” has complete information on
using the configuration menu and selecting alphanumeric characters.
4
Enable the password.
Use the Installation menu to enable the passwords.
5
Menu
Installation/Use Operator Pwd
Installation/Use Admin Pwd
Choices
On, Off
Default
Off
Notes
Select the passwords in the Installation/Operator Passwrd
and Installation/Admin Password menus.
Put the printer back on line.
Using Passwords
n
When a password is required to enter the Operator Control or
Administration menu, the message window displays
ENTER PASSWORD
when you use the Select key to enter the menu. Enter the password or press the Menu key to return to the menu. Chapter 4,
“Printer Configuration,” has complete information on using the
configuration menu and on selecting alphanumeric characters.
Printer Options
6-19
Removing the
Printer and
Controller
Board Covers
n
If an invalid password is entered, the message window flashes
INVALID PASSWORD
for three seconds and then returns you to the configuration menu.
If you specify the correct password, access to the selected menu
is granted.
n
If you forget the password, the system administrator can recover
it by using the security card to access the Installation/Operator
Passwrd and Installation/Admin Password menus again.
Removing the Printer and
Controller Board Covers
M
WARNING! The following options which require access to the
controller board—SIMM upgrades and optional network interfaces—
should be performed only by a qualified QMS service technician.
ACHTUNG! Da beim Einbau der nachfolgend aufgeführten
Optionen—Speichererweiteruntgen und Einbau optionaler
Interfaces—Zugriff auf das Controller Board genommen werden muß,
sollten diese Umrüstungen nur durch einen qualifizierten QMS
Servicetechniker durchgeführt werden.
The printer and controller board covers must be removed when a SIMM
or an optional network interface is installed.
6-20
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Removing the
Printer and
Controller
Board Covers
▲ Caution: It's very important to protect the printer controller board from
electrostatic damage while performing this task.
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,
attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient
electrical ground. The bare metal chassis of equipment, such as on
the back of a computer, is suitable if it is plugged in but turned off.
Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an
electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic,
rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not
acceptable grounding points. The printer isn't an acceptable
grounding point either because it must be unplugged before you
perform this task.
If you don't have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body's
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the
controller board cover. If you must walk around before completing
your task, discharge your body’s static electric charge again before
touching the printer controller board.
Procedure
M
WARNING! Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
taking the cover off the printer.
ACHTUNG! Bitte schalten Sie den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den
Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die Druckerabdeckung öffnen.
1
Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the power cord and
all interface cables (parallel, serial, Ethernet, and the
optional interface[s]) from the printer.
Printer Options
6-21
Removing the
Printer and
Controller
Board Covers
2
Using both hands, open the multipurpose tray.
3
Open the printer's front cover.
Push up on the
release button,
located on the
top-right front of
the printer.
6-22
4
Remove and set
aside the two
screws, one on
each end of the
front inside of
the printer.
5
Remove the
printer’s cover.
a
Using both
hands, lift the
printer’s
cover.
b
Hold the
cover with
your right
hand while
you unplug
the connector
cable from the
printer.
c
Remove the
cover and set
it aside.
onnector Cable
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Replacing the
Printer and
Controller
Board Covers
6
Remove the control board cover.
a
Remove and set aside the 15 screws on the metal controller
board cover.
b
Remove the metal cover and set it aside.
Replacing the Printer and
Controller Board Covers
The printer and controller board covers must be reinstalled after a
SIMM or an optional network interface is installed.
▲ Caution: It's very important to protect the printer controller board from
electrostatic damage while performing this task. Review the antistatic guidelines in the “Removing the Printer and Controller Board
Covers” section, earlier in this chapter.
Printer Options
6-23
Replacing the
Printer and
Controller
Board Covers
Procedure
1
2
Replace the controller board cover.
a
Place the metal cover on the controller board.
b
Replace the 15 screws you removed earlier.
Hold the printer's plastic cover over the top of the printer and
slide the connector cable back into the printer's connector.
Connector Cable
6-24
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Single In-Line
Memory
Modules
3
Replace the printer cover.
Lower the printer cover, and position it firmly on the printer. Then
secure the cover to the printer by replacing the two screws you
removed earlier.
4
Reconnect all interface cables and the power cord, and then
turn on the printer.
Single In-Line Memory Modules
Single in-line memory modules (or SIMMs) are compact circuit
boards with surface-mount memory chips. Your printer comes in one
of the following configurations:
n
n
n
12 MB RAM—one 4 MB and one 8 MB SIMM
24 MB RAM—one 8 MB and one 16 MB SIMM
48 MB RAM—one 16 MB and one 32 MB SIMM
However, you can replace one or both of the SIMMs to upgrade the
RAM to as much as 64 MB. SIMMs are available in 4, 8, 16, and 32
MB sizes.
Printer Options
6-25
Single In-Line
Memory
Modules
Additional printer memory (RAM) allows you to download more fonts
and increase the printer's buffer (area where data sent from the computer is stored while it’s waiting to be printed).
Installing a SIMM
M
WARNING! Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
taking the cover off the printer.
ACHTUNG! Bitte schalten Sie den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den
Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die Druckerabdeckung öffnen.
▲
: It's very important to protect the printer controller board and
SIMMs from electrostatic damage while performing this task. Review
the anti-static guidelines in the “Removing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section, earlier in this chapter. Handle SIMMs
carefully, preferably only by the edges.
Caution
SIMMs are installed as follows:
1
Access the printer controller board.
Use the instructions in the “Removing Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
6-26
2
Position the controller board so the interface panel is on your
right.
3
Remove the SIMM from the anti-static bag.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Single In-Line
Memory
Modules
4
Insert the SIMM into the SIMM connector.
Hold the SIMM at a 45° angle to the controller board, with the
notch on the right side. Slide the SIMM into either SIMM connector, and then push gently on it to make sure it is securely seated
in the connector.
»
Note: You can insert a SIMM in either SIMM connector as long as
DRAMØ, the SIMM connector closest to you, is occupied.
“DRAMØ” is marked on the controller board for ease of
identification.
45°
Notch
Printer Options
6-27
Single In-Line
Memory
Modules
5
Tilt the SIMM forward to a 90° angle until you feel it snap into
place.
When seated, the SIMM stands upright, firmly in place. If you
cannot snap the SIMM into place, do not force it. Reposition it,
making sure that the bottom of the SIMM is seated completely in
the connector.
90°
6
Repeat steps 3-5 for each additional SIMM being installing.
7
Replace the printer and controller board covers.
Use the instructions in the “Replacing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
Removing a SIMM
If both of the SIMM connectors are filled and you want to install more
memory (for example, if you want to replace a 4 MB SIMM with an 8
MB SIMM), one or more SIMMs must be removed before a larger SIMM
can be installed. Then refer to the previous section, “Installing a SIMM,”
for installation instructions. A SIMM can be removed from and installed
in either SIMM connector as long as DRAMØ, the SIMM connector
closest to you, is occupied. Also, you must make sure that there is a
total of at least 12 MB of RAM installed.
6-28
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Single In-Line
Memory
Modules
M
WARNING! Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
taking the cover off the printer.
ACHTUNG! Bitte schalten Sie den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den
Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die Druckerabdeckung öffnen.
▲ Caution: It's very important to protect the printer controller board and
SIMMs from electrostatic damage while performing this task. Review
the anti-static guidelines in the “Removing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section, earlier in this chapter. Handle SIMMs
carefully, preferably only by the edges.
Remove a SIMM as follows:
1
Access the printer controller board.
Use the instructions in the “Removing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
2
Position the controller board so the interface panel is on your
right.
3
Release the
SIMM.
Pull the latch on
each side of the
SIMM connector
outward using your
thumbs.
4
Latches
45 °
Remove the
SIMM.
Tilt the SIMM
backward to a 45°
angle away from
the SIMM connector, and then lift it
out.
Printer Options
6-29
Intellifont SIMM
5
If necessary, refer to “Installing a SIMM,” earlier in this section.
6
Replace the printer and controller board covers.
Use the instructions in the “Replacing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
Intellifont SIMM
An optional Intellifont SIMM increases the number of fonts available
to the HP PCL 5 emulation on your printer from 20 to the 37 PCL 5
fonts available on a Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4Si.
Installing the Intellifont SIMM
M
WARNING! Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
taking the cover off the printer.
ACHTUNG! Bitte schalten Sie den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den
Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die Druckerabdeckung öffnen.
▲ Caution: It's very important to protect the printer controller board and
SIMMs from electrostatic damage while performing this task. Review
the anti-static guidelines in the “Removing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section, earlier in this chapter. Handle SIMMs
carefully, preferably only by the edges.
1
Access the printer controller board.
Use the instructions in the “Removing Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
6-30
2
Position the controller board so the interface panel is on your
right.
3
Remove the SIMM from the anti-static bag.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Intellifont SIMM
4
Insert the SIMM into the SIMM connector.
Hold the SIMM at a 45° angle to the controller board, with the
notch in the bottom left corner. Then push gently in on it to seat it
securely in the connector.
Notch
5
Snap the SIMM into
place.
With a thumb on each
top corner, gently press
down on the SIMM to
snap it into place (at
approximately a 30°
angle to the controller
board).
6
Replace the printer and controller board covers.
Use the instructions in the “Replacing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
Printer Options
6-31
Intellifont SIMM
Increasing the Disk Cache Size
If your printer has more than 12 MB of RAM, the size of the disk
cache is adequate.
If your printer has 12 MB of RAM, you must do one of the following
to use the Intellifont fonts:
n
Add 48 KB to the disk cache (Administration/Memory/Disk Cache
menu).
Note: You may need to decrease one of the other memory clients
before increasing the disk cache client.
»
n
n
Enable disk swapping (Administration/Memory/Enable Disk Swap
menu) if a hard disk is available–this automatically increases the
size of the disk cache to 256 KB.
Add more printer memory, which automatically increases the size
of the disk cache. See “Single In-Line Memory Modules,” earlier
in this chapter.
Verifying the Installation
Once you have installed the Intellifont SIMM, print a start-up page
and an advanced status page to verify the installation.
1
Wait for the printer message window to display IDLE.
2
If necessary, use the Administration/Startup Options/Startup
Page menu to enable start-up pages.
3
Turn the printer off and back on again.
In the Options section of the start-up page, the items %cartridge% and %cartridge1% verify the installation of the SIMM.
(Both items appear even though you’ve installed only a single
option.)
6-32
4
If necessary, use the Administration/Special Pages/Status
Page Type menu to change the default Standard setting to
Advanced.
5
Press the Status Page key to print an advanced status page.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Intellifont SIMM
The list of HP PCL fonts includes all of the new Intellifont fonts.
Keep this status page for reference when accessing these fonts.
Font List
The following 37 fonts are now available for use. They can be automatically rotated to landscape orientation. All fonts are scalable and
available in 35 symbol sets unless otherwise noted.
Font
Pi/
Sans
Symbol Serif
Albertus Semi Bold
Albertus Extra Bold
ü
ü
Antique Olive Medium
Antique Olive Italic Medium
Antique Olive Bold
ü
ü
ü
Script
Serif
ü
Clarendon Condensed Bold
ü
Coronet Italic Medium
Courier Medium
Courier Italic Medium
Courier Bold
Courier Italic Bold
ü
ü
ü
ü
Garamond (Stempel) Medium
Garamond (Stempel) Italic Medium
Garamond (Stempel) Bold
Garamond (Stempel) Italic Bold
ü
ü
ü
ü
ITC Zapf Dingbats (1 symbol set)
Letter Gothic Medium
Letter Gothic Italic Medium
Letter Gothic Bold
Line Printer (16.66 pitch, 8.5
points, 25 symbol sets)
Coronet Italic Medium
Printer Options
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
6-33
Intellifont SIMM
Font
Pi/
Sans
Symbol Serif
Serif
ü
ü
ü
ü
Omega Medium
Omega Italic Medium
Omega Bold
Omega Italic Bold
Times Roman
Times Roman
Times Roman
Times Roman
Script
ü
ü
ü
ü
Medium
Italic Medium
Bold
Italic Bold
Univers Medium
Univers Italic Medium
Univers Bold
Univers Italic Bold
ü
ü
ü
ü
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Italic Medium
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Italic Bold
ü
ü
ü
ü
Accessing the Fonts
Using Your PCL Application
Use your PCL application to set the font for a single document. See
your application documentation for information.
Using the Printer Configuration Menu
Use the printer configuration menu to set the default font for all PCL
documents.
»
6-34
Note: Before beginning this procedure, you must have a PCL 5 font
list from the advanced status page. See steps 4 and 5 of the “Verify
the Installation” section, above, for information on printing an
advanced status page.
1
Access the Administation/PCL5/Default Font menu.
2
Choose the Select by Index option.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
1200x1200
dpi Resolution
Daughterboard
3
Access the Administration/PCL5/Default Font Idx menu.
4
Identify the appropriate font selection index.
The font selection indexes are listed in the PCL 5 font list on the
advanced status page.
5
Save your changes and put the printer back on line.
1200x1200 dpi Resolution
Daughterboard
The 1200x1200 dpi resolution daughterboard comes standard on
some QMS 1660E Print Systems and is an option on all others. Use
the following instructions to install the daughterboard.
▲ Caution: Printing at 1200x1200 dpi resolution on certain media sizes
requires additional memory. See the “High-Resolution Printing”
section in chapter 3, “Advanced Printing Features,” of the Operation
manual for details. If you need to add more memory, see “Single InLine Memory Modules,” earlier in this chapter.
Daughterboard Assembly Kit
The daughterboard assembly kit includes the following:
n
n
n
A daughterboard
Two plastic support posts
Latest version of the print system software (8 diskettes)
Printer Options
6-35
1200x1200
dpi Resolution
Daughterboard
Installing the Daughterboard
M
WARNING! Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
taking the cover off the printer.
ACHTUNG! Bitte schalten Sie den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den
Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die Druckerabdeckung öffnen.
▲ Caution: Eliminate static by putting on the anti-static wristband
provided with your printer option accessory kit and grounding it to any
base metal surface (such as the bottom of some telephones). Avoid
walking around after grounding yourself because your body may build
up static and you will have to repeat the grounding process.
1
Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the power cord and
all interface cables (parallel, serial, and AppleTalk) from the
printer.
2
Access the printer controller board.
Use the instructions in the “Removing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
3
6-36
Attach the daughterboard.
a
Snap the two support posts into the controller board.
b
Position the daughterboard over support posts and the 80-pin
connector.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
c
4
Snap the daughterboard onto the two support posts and the
80-pin connector.
Replace the controller board and printer covers.
Use the instructions in the “Replacing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
5
Reconnect all interface cables and the power cord, and then
turn on the printer.
6
Download the new print system software.
Use the instructions in “Updating System Software,” later in this
chapter.
Both the start-up page and the status page indicate that the
1200x1200 dpi daughterboard is installed.
Optional Interfaces
In addition to the three standard interfaces—parallel, serial, and
Ethernet—the QMS 1660E Print System has the option of using a
Printer Options
6-37
Optional
Interfaces
CrownNet (Ethernet/Token-Ring) network interface or a LocalTalk
interface. These additional interfaces allow you greater flexibility when
working in a multiple environments.
An optional interface is installed in the OPT I/O opening on the back
of the printer. This opening is covered with a rectangular metal plate.
OPT I/O
SERIAL
PARALLEL
ETHERNET
The printer’s simultaneous interface operation (SIO) allows the
optional interface to be active at the same time as the other ports. In
other words, your printer can communicate through up to four ports
with four host computers or computer networks. One host can interface through the parallel port, one through the serial port, one through
the Ethernet port, and one through the optional interface port. See
your QMS vendor for a list of optional network interfaces available.
CrownNet Network Interface
The QMS CrownNet network interface card (NIC) is an internal,
RISC-based combination of a network interface card and host
software that allows your printer to be connected to either an Ethernet
or a Token-Ring network. The CrownNet NIC supports the following:
Operating System/Protocol
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
LAN Manager/LAN Server (NetBIOS/
NetBEUI)
NetWare (IPX/SPX)
TCP/IP
»
6-38
Ethernet
Networks
ü
ü
Token-Ring
Networks
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Note: The functionality of the CrownNet Ethernet NIC is identical to
the Ethernet interface resident on your printer.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
LocalTalk Interface
A LocalTalk interface is used to print if
n
n
Your host is any member of the Apple Macintosh family. The
instructions in this section explain how to connect a Macintosh to
the QMS1660E Print System.
Your host is an IBM PC or compatible microcomputer, workstation, minicomputer, or mainframe computer that connects through
a print network (such as TOPS or AppleShare) using LocalTalktype connectors and boxes.
If you’re connecting to one of these hosts, you may need additional hardware or software. See your host or network documentation for details specific to your setup.
Optional Interface Assembly Kit
The interface assembly kit includes the following:
n
n
n
n
An interface card
A plastic standoff
Interface documentation (for CrownNet network interface cards)
Interface software (for CrownNet network interface cards)
The kit may also include additional parts not required for interface
installation on this printer.
Installing an Optional Interface
M
WARNING! Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
taking the cover off the printer.
ACHTUNG! Bitte schalten Sie den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den
Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die Druckerabdeckung öffnen.
Printer Options
6-39
Optional
Interfaces
▲ Caution: It's very important to protect the printer controller board from
electrostatic damage while performing this task.
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,
attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of equipment,
as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but turned off).
Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an
electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic,
rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not
acceptable grounding points. The printer isn't an acceptable
grounding point either because it must be unplugged before you
perform this task.
If you don't have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body's
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the
controller board cover. Redischarge your body’s static electric charge
each time after walking around and before touching the printer
controller board again.
1
Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the power cord and
all interface cables (parallel, serial, and Ethernet) from the
printer.
2
Access the printer controller board.
Use the instructions in the “Removing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
6-40
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
3
Remove the screws from the optional interface plate on the
back of the printer.
Save the screws. (You’ll use them when you install the interface.)
You can either save or discard the plate.
Printer Options
6-41
Optional
Interfaces
4
Attach the interface.
a
Position the interface so the port slides into the opening you
just created.
b
Snap the plastic standoff onto the controller board.
c
Snap the interface onto the 80-pin connector and the plastic
standoff, both on the controller board.
It’s okay to push down gently with your thumb positioned on
the interface right over the connector.
Standoff
80-pin
Connector
5
Secure the interface to the printer with the screws you removed earlier.
6
Replace the controller board and printer covers.
Use the instructions in the “Replacing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
7
6-42
Reconnect all interface cables and the power cord, and then
turn on the printer.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
Using a CrownNet Network Interface
Once a CrownNet network interface is installed, refer to the following
for more information:
n
n
n
Chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” of this manual contains
information about the PS Protocol option in the new optional
network interface menu that appears in the Administration/
Communications menu. Chapter 5, “Additional Technical
Information,” contains a full discussion of PS Protocol.
The documentation that comes with the CrownNet network interface contains information about all other options in the new
CrownNet menu as well as instructions for connecting the printer
to the network and for printing over the network.
Your application and network documentation contain information
on printing over the network.
Using a LocalTalk Interface
Once a LocalTalk interface is installed, three steps are required to
connect to the LocalTalk port: assembling the proper interface cabling
(use a LocalTalk-type kit such as Farallon's PhoneNET, available from
your QMS vendor), making the connection, and making sure the
necessary printing files are installed on the Macintosh.
Printer Options
6-43
Optional
Interfaces
Macintosh Interface Cabling
To connect your printer to a single Macintosh, you must have
n
n
n
Two PhoneNET-type transformer boxes (one for the printer port
and one for the Macintosh port), each with a DIN-8 connector
An RJ11 (telephone) cable
Two terminating resistors to close the open sockets left in the
transformer boxes after the connection is made
Macintosh
Printer
DIN-8 Male Port
DIN-8 Male Port
DIN-8 Female Connector
DIN-8 Female Connector
Transformer Boxes
RJ11 Cable
Terminating
Resistors
If you’re replacing a printer already connected to a Macintosh, you
probably already have this equipment. If not, contact your QMS vendor or a local computer store.
If you’re connecting the printer to an AppleTalk network with more
than one Macintosh, see your PhoneNET and Macintosh documentation for more information.
Making the Connection
Use the following procedure to connect your printer to a Macintosh.
▲ Caution: Turn off both the printer and the Macintosh before making
the connection.
1
6-44
Plug the connector from one transformer box into the
printer’s LocalTalk port.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
2
Plug the connector from the other transformer box into the
Macintosh printer port.
3
Connect the two transformer boxes with the telephone cable.
4
Put terminating resistors in all open sockets in the connector boxes.
This ensures proper communication and helps speed up transmission.
5
Turn on the printer.
A start-up page should print if it has not been disabled.
Installing Macintosh Printing Software
If your Macintosh was previously connected to a PostScript printer,
you can probably start printing now. See your application documentation for instructions on sending a document to the printer or see “Testing Macintosh Communication,” later in this chapter.
However, to be able to use all your printer's special features (like collation, 600x600 and 1200x600 dpi printing, and gamma correction),
or if you've never printed to a PostScript printer before, you need to
take a few minutes to make sure you have the following printing software installed:
n
n
n
PS Executive Series Utilities
The 1660 PPD file
Application-specific printer files
PS Executive Series Printer Utilities
The PS Executive Series Utilities (or PS Exec), included on the Macintosh-format disks we shipped with your printer, is a utilities program
for controlling the printer from the Macintosh. For example, through
PS Exec you can turn off the start-up page, rename the printer, install
printer-resident screen fonts, download fonts, print font samples, and
manage hard disks. Many of the procedures described in this manual
involve using PS Exec.
Printer Options
6-45
Optional
Interfaces
1
With the Macintosh on, insert the Macintosh Format PS
Executive Series Utilities disk in the disk drive.
2
Double-click the PSExec3.xx Installer icon.
3
In the PSExec 3.xx dialog box that appears, verify the Install
Location.
To change the Install Location you can either use the drop-down
list box to display and select the appropriate disk, or you can
choose the Switch Disk button to scroll through the available
disks.
4
Also in the PSExec 3.xx dialog box, choose Easy Install or
Custom Install.
n
n
Easy Install automatically installs all of the utilities, including
the PS Exec application; the LaserWriter 8. x driver; the PDF,
PDX, and PPD files; and the screen fonts.
Custom Install allows you to choose the options you want to
install.
The amount of available space on your Macintosh hard disk
and the amount of space necessary for all of the selected
options are indicated near the bottom of the window.
Note: If you’re using Custom Install, you can click the small
icon (it looks like an I inside a square) to the right of each
install option for more information about that option.
»
5
Click the Install button to begin the installation.
The installation takes approximately one minute. The Installer
places the LaserWriter 8. x driver in the Extensions folder inside
the System Folder and all of the other options inside a newly created PSExec 3.xx ƒ folder in the hard disk window. Also inside this
folder is the Installer log file, which you can view to verify the
installation.
6-46
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
Note: All Macintosh users on a network must use the same
version of the LaserWriter and Laser Prep files to run correctly.
For example, if the network has a mixture of LaserWriter 6.x, 7.x,
and/or 8.x, the printer will experience frequent reinitialization
problems. To check the version number, select the LaserWriter
icon and then hold down the Command key and press the I key.
The driver version number appears in the Info window on the
second-to-last line. LaserWriter 7.x and 8.x do not require a Laser
Prep file to work correctly with your printer. The Laser Prep
information is located within the LaserWriter driver itself.
»
6
When the installation is finished, you are prompted to
choose Continue to install additional options from the Custom installation option or to choose Quit to exit the Installer
program.
Note: The Easy Install procedure automatically installs the
Version 4.x PPDs but not the Version 3.0 PPDs. If you want to
install them, you can do so now as a Custom installation. Return
to step 4.
»
7
Back at the hard disk window, open the new PSExec 3.x ƒ
folder and then, inside that, the PS Exec ƒ folder.
8
Open PSInstall to personalize your copy of PS Exec.
9
Check the README file(s) for updates, and see the PS Exec
on-line help for information on using the utility.
LaserWriter 8.x and the 1660 4.1 PPD
The QMS 1660 Print System 4.1 PPD (a printer description file)
allows you to take advantage of printer-features like multiple-resolution printing and collation that are not available through LaserWriter
8.x alone.
»
Note: Use the 1660 PPD since there is no 1660E PPD. If you have
problems printing with LaserWriter 8.x, reinstall the LaserWriter 7.x
driver that came with your Macintosh (if available), or call the QMS
Customer Response Center (CRC). See appendix A, “QMS
Customer Support,” for a list of telephone numbers.
Printer Options
6-47
Optional
Interfaces
1
If you haven't already, follow the instructions given above in
“Installing PS Executive Series Printer Utilities.”
2
If necessary, create a Printer Descriptions folder:
System 7 users—Create a folder called Printer Descriptions
inside the Extensions folder inside the System Folder.
System 6 users—Create a folder called Printer Descriptions
inside the System Folder.
3
Open the 4.1 PPDs folder inside the PSExec 3.xx ƒ folder.
4
Select the QMS 1660 Print System PDF, and drag it to the
Printer Descriptions folder.
5
From the Apple menu, choose Chooser.
6
In the Chooser window, select the LaserWriter 8.x icon and
select QMS 1660E.
7
Choose the Setup button.
In most cases this causes the LaserWriter driver to query the
printer and automatically choose the appropriate PPD. However,
because you selected a QMS 1660E in the previous step, when
you choose the Setup button a PostScript Printer Description File
dialog box appears.
n
Select QMS 1660E Print System only if you have a QMS
1660E that provides enhanced-image-area printing. "QMS
1660 Edge to Edge" appears in the Printer Model box.
Note: If you're unsure if your 1660E provides enhanced
image-area-printing, see "Enhanced-Image-Area Printing
with the QMS 1660E," shipped with all enhanced-imagearea-capable 1660Es.
»
n
8
Otherwise, select QMS 1660 Print System. "QMS 1660 /
Print System" appears in the Printer Model box.
Exit from the Chooser.
Now, when you open the application, you can access QMS printing options by choosing Options in your application’s Print dialog
6-48
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
box. Choose Help in the Options dialog box for information on
these options.
Application-Specific Printer Files
If you plan to print from Aldus PageMaker, Aldus FreeHand, Aldus
PrePrint, Adobe Separator, or QuarkXPress, you’ll also want to install
the latest printer description file (PPD, PDX, or PDF) for your particular software. You can probably print without this file, but you may not
be able to access all of your printer’s features, and you may get an
error message telling you to change the printer name.
»
Note: The application (PageMaker, FreeHand, PrePrint, Separator, or
QuarkXPress) should be installed before you install the printer
description file(s).
1
If you haven't already, follow the instructions given above in
“Installing PS Executive Series Printer Utilities.”
2
Install the appropriate printer description file(s) for your application from 4.1 PPDs, PDFs, or PDXs folder in the PSExec
3.x ƒ folder:
n
n
n
n
n
»
If you use Adobe Separator, install the PPD file. Your Separator documentation explains where to put it.
If you use Adobe PageMaker 5.x, install the version 4.1
PPD in the Printer Descriptions folder.
If you use Aldus PageMaker 4.x, install the version 3.0 PPD
and PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the
System Folder.
If you use Aldus FreeHand 4.x, install the version 4.1 PPD
in the Printer Descriptions folder.
If you use Aldus FreeHand 3.x, install the version 3.0 PPD
and PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the
System Folder.
Note: Version 3 PPDs are not installed automatically through
the PS Exec Easy Install procedure. You must use the
Custom Install procedure. Refer to the PS Exec installation
instructions at the very beginning of this section.
Printer Options
6-49
Optional
Interfaces
n
If you use Aldus PrePrint, install the version 3.0 PPD and
PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System
Folder.
Note: Version 3 PPDs are not installed automatically through
the PS Exec Easy Install procedure. You must use the
Custom Install procedure. Refer to the PS Exec installation
instructions at the very beginning of this section.
»
n
If you use QuarkXPress, install the QMS 1660 and 1660E
PDFs in the PDF folder in the QuarkXPress folder. While
QuarkXPress 3.3 allows you to access either a PDF or a
PPD, to have access to all of your printer’s features, you
should use the PDF. To select the PDF, go to the Page Setup
dialog box in QuarkXPress, and hold down the Shift key while
clicking the Printer Type list box. (The italicized selections are
PPDs, and the non-italicized selections are PDFs.)
Note: The 1660E PDF allows you to choose between basic
and enhanced (advanced) halftoning (or screening) in
QuarkXPress. If this PDF is not present, you won’t be able to
used enhanced halftoning even though the printer supports it.
See “A Special Note for QuarkXPress Users” in chapter 5,
“Additional Technical Reference,” in the Reference, for more
information on halftones.
»
Testing Macintosh Communication
You can check communication between the printer selected in the
Chooser and the Macintosh by sending a file to the printer from an
application (see your application documentation for more information)
or by printing a directory, as described here:
1
Display a disk or folder window.
2
Set up page information.
Choose Page Setup from the File menu. Select paper size, printing orientation, and any other necessary options. Then select OK.
6-50
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
3
Print a directory or a window.
a
Choose Print Directory or Print Window from the File menu. A
dialog box appears.
b
Select the printing options you want; then click OK. If no page
prints, check chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” of the Operation
manual.
Printing from the Macintosh
You're now ready to print from your Macintosh. From this point, you'll
probably perform most printing tasks from your application. For
specific information, check the printing section in your application
documentation.
For information on print media types and sizes, see chapter 2, “Print
Media,” in the Reference.
A Note for Users of "Aldus” Applications
If you use an Aldus application (or one that used to be owned by
Aldus, such as Adobe PageMaker or MacroMedia FreeHand), when
you want to print, hold down the Option key while selecting Print from
the File menu. This brings up the LaserWriter windows, which contains the QMS printing options. Normally, Aldus applications bypass
LaserWriter and use an Aldus printer driver, which prevents you from
accessing QMS printing options.
A Note for Users of Adobe PhotoShop
If you use Adobe PhotoShop, go to PhotoShop’s Page Setup dialog
box, and select Use Printer’s Default Screen under the Screens
option. This allows your choices in the QMS driver to take effect.
Printer Options
6-51
Optional
Interfaces
Setting LocalTalk Interface Parameters
Use the Administration/Communications/LocalTalk menu to set the
LocalTalk interface values used for printer-host communication.
Mode
Enables or disables the communication interface.
Menu
Administration/Communications/LocalTalk/Mode
Choices
Enabled—Establish one-way LocalTalk communication from
the host to the printer).
Disabled—Turn off the LocalTalk interface, and the printer
stops accepting LocalTalk interface print jobs.
Default
Enabled
Notes
The printer must be restarted for changes to the Mode menu to
take effect. You can either let the printer restart automatically
after you save the change and exit from the configuration
menu, or you can wait for the change to take effect the next
time you manually turn on the printer.
Connection
Allows you to enable or disable print spooling.
Menu
Administration/Communications/LocalTalk/Connection
Choices
Conventional—Allow one LocalTalk connection and accept
only one print job at a time. If two users send print jobs to
the printer, the workstation belonging to the first user is
unavailable until the first job has been printed, and the
workstation belonging to the second user is unavailable
until both jobs have been printed.
Spool—Allow multiple LocalTalk connections and accept
(spools) more than one print job at a time. Workstations are
available while jobs are printing (if background printing is
enabled in the Macintosh Chooser).
Both—Allow both single and multiple LocalTalk connections.
Default
6-52
Conventional
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Optional
Interfaces
Notes
The printer must be restarted for changes to the Connection
menu to take effect. You can either let the printer restart
automatically after you save the change and exit from the
configuration menu, or you can wait for the change to take
effect the next time you manually turn on the printer.
Default Job Priority
Allows you to specify which jobs are printed first, according to the
interface through which they are received, when jobs are received
simultaneously. In other words, you can give jobs received via the
LocalTalk interface priority over jobs received via the parallel and
serial interfaces.
Menu
Administration/Communications/LocalTalk/Def Job Prio
Choices
001-100 (highest-lowest priority)
Default
001 (highest priority)
Minimum Number of Kilobytes for Spooling
Sets the minimum number of kilobytes of system memory allocated to
the LocalTalk interface.
Menu
Administration/Communications/LocalTalk/Min K Spool
Choices
00000-99999
Default
00015
Notes
This value must be less than the K Mem for Spool value.
A 00000 value does not turn off the spooling buffer for the
parallel interface. If the value is set to 00000, the printer
calculates the Min K Spool automatically at initialization.
The printer must be restarted for changes to the Min K Spool
menu to take effect. You can either let the printer restart
automatically after you save the change and exit from the
configuration menu, or you can wait for the change to take
effect the next time you manually turn on the printer.
Printer Options
6-53
Optional
Interfaces
PS Protocol
Sets the binary communications protocol (BCP) for communicating
over a LocalTalk interface to a PostScript printer. See chapter 5,
“Additional Technical Information,” for a full discussion of PS Protocol.
Menu
Administration/Communications/LocalTalk/PS Protocol
Choices
Normal—Enable standard, ASCII hex protocol. Data is sent
and received in ASCII format. This mode is recommended
if you do not print binary data. It was designed for data in
the printable ASCII range. Print jobs can alter the PS
protocol value through PostScript operators.
Normal Fixed—Enable standard, ASCII hex protocol. Print
jobs cannot alter this value through PostScript operators.
Binary—Enable binary communications protocol. Print jobs
can alter this value through PostScript operators. Data in
the printable ASCII range also prints.
Binary Fixed—Enable binary communications protocol. Print
jobs can not alter this value through PostScript operators.
Data in the printable ASCII range also prints.
QBinary (Quoted Binary)—Enables binary communications
protocol. Print jobs can alter this value through PostScript
operators. Data in the printable ASCII range also prints.
Use the special quoting mechanism for the special
characters and ^D (EOF).
QBinary (Quoted Binary) Fixed—Enables binary
communications protocol. Print jobs cannot alter this value
through PostScript operators. Data in the printable ASCII
range also prints. Use the special quoting mechanism for
the special characters and ^D (EOF).
Default
6-54
Normal
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
Storage Options
Hard disks provide true virtual memory as well as storage for character bitmaps, downloaded outline fonts, and other files.
IDE-SCSI Board
An optional internal IDE-SCSI (Integrated Drive Electronics-Small
Computer System Interface) board supports an internal IDE hard disk
and up to three external SCSI hard disks. The board is installed in the
OPT I/O opening on the back of the printer. It is covered with a rectangular metal plate.
»
Note: Hard disk specifications are included in Q-FAX document 6502,
“QMS-tested SIMMs and Hard Disks.” This document contains a
description of each approved hard disk, its manufacturers and part
numbers, and the QMS products on which it can be used. See
appendix A, “QMS Customer Support,” of this manual to find out how
to access Q-FAX documents.
OPT I/O
SERIAL
PARALLEL
ETHERNET
Installing an IDE-SCSI Board
M
WARNING! Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
taking the cover off the printer.
ACHTUNG! Bitte schalten Sie den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den
Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die Druckerabdeckung öffnen.
Printer Options
6-55
Storage
Options
▲ Caution: It's very important to protect the printer controller board from
electrostatic damage while performing this task.
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,
attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of equipment,
as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but turned off). Never
attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical
current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic, rubber,
wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not acceptable
grounding points. The printer isn't an acceptable grounding point
either because it must be unplugged before you perform this task.
If you don't have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body's
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the
controller board cover. Redischarge your body’s static electric charge
each time after walking around and before touching the printer
controller board again.
1
Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the power cord and
all interface cables (parallel, serial, Ethernet, and optional
interfaces) from the printer.
2
Access the printer controller board.
Use the instructions in the “Removing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
6-56
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
3
Remove the screws from the optional interface plate on the
back of the printer.
Save the screws. (You’ll use them when you install the board.)
You can either save or discard the plate.
4
If you are installing an internal hard disk at this time, use the
instructions in a following section, “Installing an Internal Hard
Disk,” and then return to step 5.
Printer Options
6-57
Storage
Options
5
Attach the IDE-SCSI board.
a
Position the board so the port slides into the opening you just
created.
b
Snap the plastic standoff onto the controller board.
c
Snap the board onto the 80-pin connector and the plastic
standoff, both on the controller board.
It’s okay to push down gently with your thumb positioned on
the board right over the connector.
Standoff
80-pin
Connector
Note: This illustration shows an IDE-SCSI board with an internal
IDE hard disk installed.
»
6
Secure the IDE-SCSI board to the rear interface panel with the
screws you removed in step 3.
7
Replace the controller board and printer covers.
Use the instructions in the “Replacing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
8
If necessary, connect the external SCSI hard disk(s) to the new
SCSI interface port on the interface panel.
An adapter cable may be necessary to connect the hard disk to
the DB-25 connector on the board. Your QMS vendor should be
able to provide you with this adapter cable. “External SCSI Hard
6-58
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
Disks,” later in this section, contains more information on external
hard disks.
9
»
Reconnect all interface cables and the power cord, turn on
any external hard disks, and then turn on the printer.
Note: For the printer to recognize external hard disks, each hard
disk must be turned on before you turn on the printer.
10 If you’ve just installed a new hard disk—but not a Kanji hard
disk—format it.
Use the instructions given later in this section.
▲
Caution: DO NOT under any circumstances format a Kanji hard
disk—it is pre-formatted at the factory with QMS Kanji fonts.
Reformatting this disk erases all data, fonts, and files.
If a Kanji hard disk is reformatted or if data is modified so that it
can’t be recognized by the printer, you must return the disk to
QMS for servicing. This is not covered by your warranty.
11 Ensure that the printer recognizes the disk(s).
If the printer recognizes the disk(s)
n
n
n
DISK ONLINE prints on the printer start-up page (if it’s
enabled).
%%diskx% (where x is 0-6 for any external SCSI hard disks,
depending on the SCSI ID set on the back of the disk, and 7
for an internal IDE hard disk) prints on the start-up page (if it’s
enabled).
DISK ONLINE prints on the standard status page or on the
first page of the advance status page.
If the printer doesn’t recognize the disk(s), see chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” in the Operation manual.
Printer Options
6-59
Storage
Options
Removing an IDE-SCSI Board
Use the following instructions if you ever need to remove an IDESCSI board from the printer (for example, if you decide to install an
optional IDE internal hard disk after the IDE-SCSI board is already
installed).
Illustrations are not included with this procedure. However, you can
use the appropriate illustrations in the previous section, “Installing an
IDE-SCSI Board.”
M
WARNING! Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
taking the cover off the printer.
ACHTUNG! Bitte schalten Sie den Drucker aus und ziehen Sie den
Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die Druckerabdeckung öffnen.
▲ Caution: It's very important to protect the printer controller board from
electrostatic damage while performing this task.
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,
attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of equipment,
as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but turned off). Never
attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical
current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic, rubber,
wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not acceptable
grounding points. The printer isn't an acceptable grounding point
either because it must be unplugged before you perform this task.
If you don't have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body's
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the
controller board cover. Redischarge your body’s static electric charge
each time after walking around and before touching the printer
controller board again.
6-60
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
1
Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the power cord and
all interface cables (parallel, serial, Ethernet, and optional)
and SCSI hard disk cables, if any, from the printer.
2
Access the printer controller board.
Use the instructions in the “Removing the Printer and Controller
Board Covers” section of this chapter.
3
Remove the screws securing the IDE-SCSI board to the rear
interface panel of the printer.
Save the screws. (You’ll use them when you reinstall the board.)
4
Remove the IDE-SCSI board from the plastic standoff and the
80-pin connector on the controller board.
To unlock the standoff, squeeze the tip between two fingers until
you can easily remove the board.
5
Install the internal hard disk.
n
n
If you’re installing an internal hard disk for the first time, use
the instructions in a following section, “Installing an Internal
Hard Disk.”
If you’re removing an internal hard disk at this time (for example, if you are removing an IDE hard disk to install a Kanji IDE
hard disk), use the instructions in a following section,
“Removing an Internal Hard Disk,” and then use the instructions in the “Installing an Internal Hard Disk” section.
Internal IDE Hard Disk
The internal IDE hard disk is identified as DSK7.
IDE Hard Disk Assembly Kit
The IDE hard disk assembly kit includes the following:
n
n
n
IDE hard disk
Plastic ribbon cable
4 screws
Printer Options
6-61
Storage
Options
Installing an Internal IDE Hard Disk
Only one internal IDE hard disk is supported. However, you can add
up to three external SCSI hard disks to the printer.
»
Note: Before installing an internal IDE hard disk, you must have an
optional IDE-SCSI board.
If you’re installing an optional IDE-SCSI board for the first time ,
refer
now to “IDE-SCSI Board,” earlier in this section, for installation
instructions. You will be referred to these instructions at the
appropriate time.
If the IDE-SCSI board is already installed ,
you must remove it before
you can install an internal hard disk. Refer to the same section for
information on removing the board.
1
Connect one end of the plastic ribbon cable to the hard disk.
Align the colored stripe on the cable with pin 1 on the hard disk
connector, and then slowly push the cable onto the connector.
▲
Caution: The plastic ribbon cable is fragile. Handle it gently.
Pin 1
6-62
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
2
Connect the other end of the cable to the IDE-SCSI board.
Align the colored stripe on the cable with pin 1 on the IDE-SCSI
board connector, and then slowly push the cable onto the connector.
Notice that the cable is folded so the blue stripe aligns easily with
pin 1 on the connector.
▲
Caution: The plastic ribbon cable is fragile. Handle it gently. Do
not pull on it or push down hard on it.
Pin 1
Printer Options
6-63
Storage
Options
3
Attach the hard disk to the IDE-SCSI board.
Align the hard disk with the 2.5” hard disk outline on the IDESCSI board. The screw holes in the bottom of the hard disk
should match up with the holes in the board.
Fasten the hard disk to the board with the four screws provided in
the kit.
4
Return to “Installing an IDE-SCSI Board,” earlier in this
chapter.
Removing an Internal IDE Hard Disk
Use the following instructions if you need to remove an internal IDE
hard disk (for example, if you have an IDE hard disk and you need to
remove it to install a Kanji IDE hard disk.
Illustrations are not included with this procedure. However, you can
use the appropriate illustrations in the previous section, “Installing an
Internal IDE Hard Disk.”
1
Refer to a previous section, “Removing an IDE-SCSI Board,”
for instructions on accessing the IDE-SCSI board.
You will be returned to this procedure at the appropriate point.
6-64
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
2
Remove the hard disk from the IDE-SCSI board.
Four screws connect the hard disk to the board.
3
▲
Disconnect the plastic ribbon cable from the IDE-SCSI board.
Caution: The plastic ribbon cable is fragile. Handle it gently. Do
not pull on it.
4
▲
Disconnect the other end of the plastic ribbon cable from the
hard disk.
Caution: The plastic ribbon cable is fragile. Handle it gently. Do
not pull on it.
5
If you’re installing another internal hard disk, refer to the
instructions in the previous section, “Installing an Internal IDE
hard disk.”
External SCSI Hard Disks
The documentation that comes with your external SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) hard disk should contain all of the necessary
information for connecting and configuring the disk.
Identifying Hard Disks
Hard disks are identified by device numbers which you assign. Valid
choices for external SCSI hard disks range from DSK0 to DSK6.
However, you cannot repeat numbers; each device number must be
unique. The internal IDE hard disk is identified as DSK7.
Optional
Internal IDE
Hard Disk
Optional External SCSI Hard
(DSK7)
(DSK0 through DSK6)
Printer Options
Disks
6-65
Storage
Options
▲ Caution: If you connect to this printer an external hard disk you previously used with an earlier QMS Crown printer (such as a QMS 860,
860 Plus, 1700, 1725, 1725SLS, 2000, 2025, 3200, 3225, 3825,
4525, ColorScript 210/230, Laser 1000, or magicolor Laser Printer),
this QMS 1660E software release will automatically reorganize the
files on the hard disk when the printer is turned back on again. Once
this reorganization is done, the files on the hard disk can no longer be
accessed if the hard disk is attached to an earlier QMS Crown printer
again.
This reorganization process takes time. If, when you first turn the
printer on after attaching a previously used hard disk, it does not
come on line immediately, be patient. Interrupting the reorganization
process could cause all files on the hard disk to be lost.
Turning on an External Hard Disk
For the printer to recognize one or more external hard disks, each
hard disk must be turned on before you turn on the printer.
If the printer recognizes the disk(s)
n
n
n
DISK ONLINE prints on the printer start-up page (if it’s enabled).
%%diskx% (where x is 0-6 for any external SCSI hard disks,
depending on the SCSI ID set on the back of the disk, and 7 for
an internal IDE hard disk) prints on the start-up page (if it’s
enabled).
DISK ONLINE prints on the standard status page or on the first
page of the advance status page.
The Disk Operations Menu
The Administration/Disk Operations menu contains all of the options
you need to format a hard disk, as well as to install optional fonts on
and remove them from a hard disk.
6-66
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
»
Note: The install, remove, and format disk operations do not include
support for a Font Folio disk. You must download the fonts to your
hard disk from host applications.
Error Messages
One or more of the following messages may appear while you are using
the Disk Operations menu.
Message
Meaning
Action
FORMAT FAILED
The hard disk cannot be
used.
Press the Menu key to
remove the message, and
contact your QMS vendor.
WRITE ERROR
The hard disk encountered a write error, or
there is no room for the
data on the hard disk or in
RAM.
Press the Menu key to
remove the message, and
restart the operation from
the beginning.
Formatting a Hard Disk
You have two ways of formatting a hard disk:
n
n
PS Executive Series Utilities
Printer configuration menu
▲ Caution: DO NOT under any circumstances format a Kanji hard
disk—it is pre-formatted at the factory with QMS Kanji fonts.
Reformatting this disk erases all data, fonts, and files.
If a Kanji hard disk is reformatted or if data is modified so that it can’t
be recognized by the printer, you must return the disk to QMS for
servicing. This is not covered by your warranty.
Using PS Executive Series Utilities
The PS Executive Series Utilities offer formatting options for both
Macintosh and PC setups. See the on-line documentation for details
on formatting disks.
Printer Options
6-67
Storage
Options
Using the Printer Configuration Menu
After you have accessed the Administration/Disk Operations menu,
press the control panel keys in the order shown in the following table.
The printer responds by displaying a status message in the message
window.
»
Note: You may need to press the Next key one or more times to
advance through the list of selections or options.
Use this
key...
to...
The message window
reads...
Select
Access the Administration/Disk
Operations/Format Disk menu.
DISK OPERATIONS
FORMAT DISK
Select
Access the Format Disk/Dsk#: menu.
FORMAT DISK
DSK#: x
Next
Scroll through the list of attached disks. FORMAT DISK
DSK: x
Select
Select the disk and display a format
confirmation message.
Select
Begin the formatting process. The hard FORMAT DISK
disk is formatted while the system
FORMATTING...
reboots.
You are informed when the formatting
process is complete. The printer then
reboots, and a start-up page prints (if
enabled).
»
FORMAT DISK
ARE YOU SURE?
FORMAT DISK
FORMAT COMPLETE
Note: After an unformatted disk is formatted and the FORMAT
COMPLETE message displays, you must turn the printer off and back
on again before the printer can recognize the disk.
Using a Hard Disk
Before you can use a formatted hard disk, you must increase the size
of the disk cache. The way you do this depends on how much memory your printer has.
n
6-68
If your printer has 12 MB of RAM, enable disk swapping
(Administration/Memory/Enable Disk Swap menu), which
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
automatically increases the disk cache size. See the “Memory”
section in chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for more information.
n
If your printer has more than 12 MB of RAM, increase the disk
cache size (Administration/Memory/K Mem Disk Cache menu) to
256 KB. See the “Memory” section of chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for more information.
After you have enabled disk swapping or increased the disk cache
size, you must restart the printer and print a status page to ensure
that the disk cache size has been increased. (Notice that VM
remaining memory has also been automatically increased.)
Installing an Optional Font
Optional fonts can be installed in two ways:
n
n
▲
You may use optional fonts by inserting the font card in one of the
card slots below the printer's paper cassette. However, when you
remove the font card from the card slot, you can no longer use
those fonts. This procedure is covered in the “Using a Font Card”
section found earlier in this chapter.
You can install (copy) the contents of a font card to a hard disk if
one is available. The procedure that follows describes how to
install the font card on your hard disk. Once the fonts are stored
on the hard disk, they can be downloaded to the printer's memory
when needed for printing.
Caution: If you install the contents of a font card to a hard disk,
any optional fonts of the same type are overwritten. The original
optional fonts must be downloaded again before you can access
them. For example, optional PostScript fonts on the hard disk are
overwritten by the PostScript fonts on a PostScript font card.
Printer Options
6-69
Storage
Options
Procedure
After you have accessed the Administration/Disk Operations menu,
press the control panel keys in the order shown in the following table.
The printer responds by displaying a status message in the message
window (DSK refers to the hard disk number, and CAR0 and CAR1
refer to the font card slot number).
»
Note: You may need to press the Next key one or more times to
advance through the list of selections or options.
Key
Purpose
Message
Select
Accesses the Administration/Disk
Operations/Install Option menu.
DISK OPERATIONS
INSTALL OPTION
Select
Accesses the Format Disk/Dsk#: menu. INSTALL OPTION
DSK#: x
Next
Scrolls through the list of attached
disks.
Select
Selects the disk and accesses the card INSTALL SOURCE
address from which the optional font is CAR#: x
being installed.
Select
Prompts you to insert the font card in
INSTALL OPTION
one of the card slots below the printer’s INSERT MEDIA
media cassette.
Menu
FORMAT DISK
DSK: x
Begins reading data from the card and
installing the appropriate files on the
hard disk. This usually takes several
minutes.
INSTALL OPTION
READING DATA...
Acknowledges completion of the
installation process.
INSTALL OPTION
INSTALL COMPLETE
Exits from the Install Option menu and
returns to the Disk Operations menu.
DISK OPERATIONS
INSTALL OPTION
After the option is installed, remove the card from the slot and place
the printer back on line.
Removing an Optional Font
Use the Administration/Disk Operations/Remove Option to remove
optional fonts from your hard disk. You need the original font card
containing the files. The Remove Option compares the contents of the
6-70
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Storage
Options
card against the contents of the hard disk and then deletes the
matching files from the hard disk.
Procedure
After you have accessed the Administration/Disk Operations menu,
press the control panel keys in the order shown in the following table.
The printer responds by displaying a status message in the message
window (DSK refers to the hard disk number, and CAR0 and CAR1
refer to the font or card number).
»
Note: You may need to press the Next key one or more times to
advance through the list of selections or options.
Key
Purpose
Message
Select
Accesses the Administration/Disk
Operations/Remove Option menu.
DISK OPERATIONS
REMOVE OPTION
Select
Accesses the Remove Option/Dsk#:
menu.
REMOVE OPTION
DSK#: x
Next
Scrolls through the list of attached
disks.
REMOVE OPTION
DSK: x
Select
Selects the disk and accesses the card REMOVE SOURCE
address from which removal information CAR#: x
is being read.
Select
Prompts you to insert the font card in
REMOVE OPTION
one of the card slots below the printer’s INSERT MEDIA
media cassette.
Menu
Begins reading data from the card and
removing the appropriate fusiform the
hard disk This usually takes several
minutes.
REMOVE OPTION
READING DATA...
Acknowledges completion of the
installation process.
REMOVE OPTION
REMOVE COMPLETE
Exits from the Install Option menu nd
returns to the Disk Operations menu.
DISK OPERATIONS
REMOVE OPTION
After the option is removed, remove the card from the slot and place
the printer back on line.
Printer Options
6-71
Storage
Options
Downloading an Emulation
Optional emulations, such as LN03 and QUIC II, are available as
PostScript files on PC floppy disks. This section describes how to
download an optional emulation from a floppy disk to the printer’s
hard disk.
»
Note: At least one hard disk (internal or external) must be installed on
the printer before you can download an emulation. If more than one
hard disk is available, the emulation automatically installs itself on the
disk with the most free storage space.
Once an emulation is downloaded, the only way to remove it is to
reformat the hard disk (Administration/Disk Operations/Format Disk
menu or PS Executive Series Utilities).
Procedure—PC Users
1
If necessary connect the PC to the printer’s parallel or serial
port.
2
Turn on the printer, and wait for IDLE to appear in the message
window.
3
Insert the emulation disk in your PC’s 3.5" disk drive, and
change to that drive (for example, if you’re using the A drive,
type a:↵).
4
Send the emulation to the printer’s hard disk.
n
If your PC and printer are connected through the parallel port,
type
copy /b *.ps lpt#↵
where # is 1 to 3. (/b refers to binary files.)
n
If your PC and printer are connected through the serial port,
type
copy /b *.ps com#
where # is 1 to 4. (/b refers to binary files.)
5
6-72
When the downloading is complete, reboot the printer.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Kanji Option
Kit
The emulation is ready to be used.
Kanji Option Kit
The QMS Kanji Option Kit contains a pre-formatted IDE hard disk that
contains Kanji fonts and other files. The Kanji fonts include Ryumin
Light-KL and Gothic BBB-Medium (licensed to QMS by Morisawa and
Company, Ltd.) as well as Mincho Medium, Mincho Heavy, Gothic
Bold, and Gothic Heavy (licensed to QMS by TypeBank). These fonts
can be printed at a variety of point sizes and in different styles and
resolutions.
Three steps are involved in setting up and using the Kanji fonts:
n
n
n
Install an optional IDE-SCSI board (if necessary) and the Kanji
internal IDE hard disk
Configure the printer for Kanji
Access the Kanji fonts
Once you have performed these three steps, the six Kanji fonts are
available for use just as if they were resident in the printer.
»
Note: Before beginning this procedure, have available the QMS
Crown Kanji Option Installation Instructions, included in the Kanji
Option Kit.
Installing the IDE-SCSI Board and the Kanji
Internal IDE Hard Disk
Use the instructions in the previous section, “Storage Options,” to
install the IDE-SCSI board and the Kanji internal IDE hard disk.
Keep the following considerations in mind:
n
Ensure that your printer is already installed, configured, and
tested for proper operation before installing the Kanji hard disk.
Printer Options
6-73
Kanji Option
Kit
n
If you already have an IDE-SCSI board installed in the printer,
you do not need to purchase another board on which to install the
Kanji hard disk.
However, you do have to remove the IDE-SCSI board from the
printer before you can install the hard disk. If you have an IDE
hard disk installed on the board, you must also remove that hard
disk. Use the instructions in the previous section, “Storage
Options.”
Configuring the Printer
Due to the size of the Kanji two-byte font sets, you must reallocate the
printer’s memory for seven memory clients. The printer can’t access
the Kanji fonts until its memory is reconfigured. See the QMS Crown
Kanji Option Installation Instructions, included in the Kanji Option Kit,
for complete information. However, the following table provides an
overview of the memory reallocation.
»
Note: To configure the memory clients as shown in the following
table, you’ll need either to take memory away from other memory
clients not listed in the table or to add additional memory.
Memory Client
Minimum Kanji Setting
K Mem for Spool
112
K Mem for PSHeap
3584
K Mem for PS Fonts
1000
K Mem Emulation
768
K Mem Emul Tmp
256
K Mem Display
512
K Mem Disk Cache
256
Accessing the Kanji Fonts
See the QMS Crown Kanji Option Installation Instructions, included in
the Kanji Option Kit, for complete information on accessing the Kanji
fonts from a Macintosh, from DOS, and from Windows.
6-74
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updating
System
Software
Updating System Software
The system software in your QMS 1660E Print System is stored on
4 MB of flash memory that can be erased and rewritten to “in a flash.”
This allows you to update the system software without opening up the
printer and installing new PROMs. Updated system software allows
you to take advantage of future enhancements to the printer.
Updating the system software is a three-step procedure:
1
Choose the appropriate compressed system software files.
2
Install the system software on your computer.
3
Download the system software to the printer.
The following sections explain these steps in detail.
▲ Caution: Some fonts stored on your printer’s hard disk are copyprotected. Therefore, when you upgrade the system software
(release 2.0 or later firmware) on your QMS 1660E Print System,
these fonts must be downloaded again for the printer to recognize
them. See your font documentation for downloading instructions.
Printer Options
6-75
Updating
System
Software
Choosing the Appropriate System Software
Files for Downloading
System software is contained on 8 disks—4 PC and 4 Macintosh. The
disks you use depend on whether your printer is functioning or not,
the current firmware version, and how you plan to download the system software to the printer.
Computer*
Disk Set to Use
Hard Disk
Space Needed
(approx.)
Functional
Non-Functional
1.75 MB
√
√
SYSTEMDL.PS
3.25 MB
√
SYSTEM.DL
1.75 MB
√
SYSTEMDL.PS
3.25 MB
√
Macintosh SYSTEMLOADER
PC
Printer
Firmware Interfaces for
Version** Downloading
√
1.x
Serial
2.x
All
1.x
Parallel,
serial
2.x
All
* To download the system software from a UNIX system, you must first install the system
software on a Macintosh or PC and then upload it to the UNIX system.
** The printer’s firmware level is listed on both the start-up and status pages.
Installing the System Software
Once you have identified the appropriate print system software disk
set (using the table in the previous section), you must install the software on your computer’s hard disk before you can download it to the
printer.
6-76
1
Ensure that your computer has enough free hard disk space
for the system software.
2
Create a new folder (Macintosh) or directory (PC) on your
computer.
3
Insert Disk 1 of the appropriate print system software disk
set in your computer’s disk drive.
4
Install the files on your computer’s hard disk.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updating
System
Software
n
Macintosh
a
Open the Installer application.
n
n
If you’re using the SYSTEMDL.PS file (see the
table in the previous section), double-click the
PRINTSYSTEM.INSTALLER file icon.
If you’re using the SYSTEM.DL file (see the table
in the previous section), double-click the SYSTEMLOADER.1 icon.
b
In the dialog box that appears, change the Install
Location to the folder you created in step 2. Use the dropdown list box to select Select Folder, in the Select the
Installation Folder dialog box select the appropriate disk
and folder, and then click Select.
c
Click Install to begin the installation.
d
When prompted, insert disk 2 of the system software.
The installation takes approximately 1.5 minutes. The
Installer places the appropriate system software file
(either SYSTEMDL.PS or SYSTEMLOADER) in the
folder you selected in step b.
e
n
When the installation is finished, you’re prompted to click
Quit to exit the Installer program.
PC
a
At the DOS C:\DIRECTORY prompt, type x:pkunzip
x:system↵ where DIRECTORY is the name of the new
directory you created in step 2, and x is the name of the
disk drive in which you inserted Disk 1.
b
Follow the prompts. They instruct you to insert the
system software disks in the following order:
n
n
n
Last disk (system software disk 2)
Disk 1 (system software disk 1)
Disk 2 (system software disk 2)
Printer Options
6-77
Updating
System
Software
n
5
UNIX
a
Follow the instructions given above for either the
Macintosh or the PC.
b
After the system software file has been decompressed
on hard disk of the Macintosh or the PC, upload the
decompressed file to the UNIX system.
Download the system software to the printer.
The procedure for downloading system software depends on
whether the print system software is functional (the printer starts
up normally, and IDLE displays in the message window) or nonfunctional (the printer can’t start up; the message window
remains blank), and which system software file you decompressed in the previous step.
See one of the following sections for instructions:
n
n
n
“Downloading System Software to a Functional Printer—
SYSTEMDL.PS”
“Downloading System Software to a Functional Printer—
SYSTEM.DL”
“Downloading System Software to a Non-Functional Printer”
Downloading System Software to a
Functional Printer—SYSTEMDL.PS
If the print system software is non-functional (the printer can’t start
up), go to a following section, “Downloading System Software to a
Non-Functional Printer.”
If the print system software is functional (the printer starts up normally, and IDLE displays in the message window), and if you decompressed the file SYSTEMDL.PS in the previous section, use these
instructions.
6-78
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updating
System
Software
Before You Begin Downloading the Software
n
n
Ensure that the system software is decompressed, as described
in the previous section.
Turn on the printer, wait for IDLE to appear in the message window, and then print an advanced status page.
This procedure may change the current configuration settings.
The advanced status page provides a record of all current configuration settings, so you can verify them, and reconfigure them, if
necessary, after the system software has been updated.
n
n
Ensure that the Administration/Communications/Interface/Emulation menu (where Interface is the interface you plan to use to
download the system software), is set to ESP or PostScript.
Ensure that the printer is on line and idle.
Macintosh
1
In the Chooser, choose the printer to be upgraded.
2
Open PS Executive by double-clicking on the PS Exec icon.
3
From the File menu, choose Print PS File.
4
Click the Option button, make sure all options are disabled,
and then click OK.
5
Select the SYSTEMDL.PS file, and choose Send.
The downloading process takes about 5 minutes, depending on
the size of the file and the speed of your computer. The printer’s
Ready indicator blinks as the new system image is copied to flash
memory.
After the updated system software has been written to flash
memory, the printer reboots with the new system image, prints a
start-up page, and returns to IDLE.
»
Note: The new flash image does not erase the old image until the
printer verifies that the new image is valid.
Printer Options
6-79
Updating
System
Software
6
Print another advanced status page, and verify that the configuration settings match the previous configuration settings
(on the advanced status page printed in step 1).
7
If there are differences in the configuration settings, reconfigure them through the printer configuration menu.
8
On your computer’s hard disk, delete the folder containing
the SYSTEM.SEA and SYSTEM.SEA.2 files.
PC and UNIX
1
Download the new system software PostScript file SYSTEMDL.PS to the printer, over any available interface, the
way you would normally send a PostScript file.
For example, you might use PS Executive, copy, or fstprn from a
PC, or qpr or put from a UNIX system.
The downloading process takes about 5 minutes, depending on
the size of the file and the speed of your computer. The printer’s
Ready indicator blinks as the new system image is copied to flash
memory.
After the updated system software has been written to flash
memory, the printer reboots with the new system image, prints a
start-up page, and returns to IDLE.
Note: The new flash image does not erase the old image until the
printer verifies that the new image is valid.
»
6-80
2
Print another advanced status page, and verify that the configuration settings match the previous configuration settings
(on the advanced status page printed in step 1).
3
If there are differences in the configuration settings, reconfigure them through the printer configuration menu.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updating
System
Software
Downloading System Software to a
Functional Printer—SYSTEM.DL
If the print system software is non-functional (the printer can’t start
up), go to the following section, “Downloading System Software to a
Non-Functional Printer.”
If the print system software is functional (the printer starts up normally, and IDLE displays in the message window), and if you decompressed the file SYSTEMLOADER (Macintosh) or SYSTEM.DL (PC)
in the previous section, use these instructions.
»
Note: Before you can use these instructions, you must have
decompressed the system software, as described in the previous
section.
Macintosh
»
Note: This downloading procedure requires a connection from the
Macintosh’s serial port (either the modem or the printer port) to the
printer’s serial port. The cable must have a DIN-8 female connector
on the Macintosh end. It must also must be wired as a null modem or
it must have a null modem adapter. The type of connector for the
printer’s serial port end of the cable depends on the type of null
modem assembly. Your Macintosh vendor can provide you with this
equipment, or you can use the “Cable Pinouts” section of appendix B,
“Technical Specifications,” if you want to make your own cable.
1
Connect the Macintosh to the printer’s serial port.
You can use either the printer or modem port on the Macintosh.
However, the modem port provides the fastest download.
Note: To use the printer port you must first disable AppleTalk in
the Chooser.
»
2
Turn on the printer, wait for IDLE to appear in the message
window, and then print an advanced status page.
This procedure should not change the current configuration settings. However, the advanced status page provides a record of all
current configuration settings, so you can verify that they are the
same after the system software has been updated.
Printer Options
6-81
Updating
System
Software
3
Take the printer off line.
4
Access the Administration/Miscellaneous/New Flash Image
menu.
5
Select Yes in the New Flash Image menu.
The printer waits for the new system software (image) to be sent
from your Macintosh. (YES remains in the message window until
the new image is sent.)
6
Send the new system software image to the printer.
a
At the Macintosh, double-click the SystemLoader icon.
b
In the dialog box that appears, make sure the correct
download port is selected, and then choose the Send button
to start the download.
The downloading process takes about 10 minutes, depending on the size of the file and the speed of your Macintosh.
The Ready indicator blinks as the new system image is written to flash ROM. After the updated system software has
been written to flash ROM, the message Download Complete! appears on the Macintosh screen, the printer
reboots with the new system image, prints a start-up page,
and returns to IDLE.
Note: The new flash image does not erase the old image
until the printer verifies that the new image is valid.
»
6-82
7
Print another advanced status page, and verify that the configuration settings match the previous configuration settings
(on the advanced status page printed in step 2).
8
If there are differences, correct them through the printer configuration menu.
9
On your Macintosh hard disk, delete the folder containing
the SYSTEMLOADER application.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updating
System
Software
PC—Parallel Port
This is the recommended method for downloading from an IBM or
compatible PC because it is the fastest method and because no additional cables or changes of port settings are necessary.
After you have decompressed the system software, as described in
the previous section, use the following procedure to update the system software in flash memory.
»
Note: If you’re using a serial port, skip to the following section, “PC—
Serial Port.”
1
Turn on the printer, wait for IDLE to appear in the message
window, and then print an advanced status page.
This procedure should not change the current configuration settings. However, the advanced status page provides a record of all
current configuration settings, so you can verify that they are the
same after the system software has been updated.
2
Take the printer off line.
3
Access the Administration/Miscellaneous/New Flash Image
menu.
4
Select Yes in the New Flash Image menu.
The printer waits for the new system software (image) to be sent
via your PC’s parallel port. (YES remains in the message window
until the new image is sent.)
5
Send the new image to the printer.
Type
copy /b system.dl lpt#↵
where # is 1 to 3. (/b refers to binary files.) If you’re not sure of the
number of the parallel port, check your PC’s documentation.
The downloading process takes about 5 minutes, depending on
the size of the file and the speed of your PC. The Ready indicator
blinks as the new system image is copied to flash ROM. After the
updated system software has been written to flash ROM, the
Printer Options
6-83
Updating
System
Software
printer reboots with the new system image, prints a start-up page,
and returns to IDLE.
Note: The new flash image does not erase the old image until the
printer verifies that the new image is valid.
»
6
Print another advanced status page, and verify that the current configuration settings match the previous configuration
settings (on the advanced status page printed in step 1).
7
If there are differences in the configuration settings, correct
them through the printer configuration menu.
PC—Serial Port
This method for downloading the system software from an IBM or
compatible PC should be used only when a parallel port is not available because it’s slower and because it requires a null modem cable
(see the “Cable Pinouts” section of appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for more information) and special software to set the PC’s
serial port to 38400 baud (see step 2, below).
After you have decompressed the system software, as described in
an earlier section, use the following procedure to update the system
software in flash memory.
»
Note: If you’re using a parallel port, refer to the previous section,
“PC—Parallel Port.”
1
Connect the PC to the printer’s serial port, using a null
modem cable.
2
Download the DOS ModeX program from the QMS Bulletin
Board.
Using your modem, dial in to the QMS Bulletin Board, as
described in appendix A, “QMS Customer Support.” After you
access the QMS Main Library through the L (Library of Files)
selection, do the following:
6-84
a
Choose D (Download a File).
b
Type hibaud.exe↵
c
Exit from the Bulletin Board.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updating
System
Software
d
Terminate the connection.
3
Type hibaud↵ to extract the ModeX files.
4
Set the PC’s baud rate to 38400 by typing
modex.exe↵
modex # 38400 n 8 1↵
where # is 1-4. See the MODEX.DOC file for more information on
this program.
5
Turn on the printer, wait for IDLE to appear in the message
window, and then print an advanced status page.
This procedure should not change the current configuration settings. However, the advanced status page provides a record of all
current configuration settings, so you can verify that they are the
same after the system software has been updated.
6
Take the printer off line.
7
Turn on the RTS and CTS hardware flow control settings.
a
Access the Administration/Communications/Serial/Hdwe
Flow Ctl menu.
b
Set RTS to On.
c
Set CTS to On.
d
Press the Online/Offline key to be prompted to save your
changes.
e
Select Yes to Save Changes.
8
Access the Administration/Miscellaneous/New Flash Image
menu.
9
Select Yes in the New Flash Image menu.
The printer waits for the new system software (image) to be sent
via your PC’s parallel port. (YES remains in the message window
until the new image is sent.)
Printer Options
6-85
Updating
System
Software
10 Send the new image to the printer.
Type
copy /b system.dl com#↵
where # is 1 to 4. (/b refers to binary files.) If you’re not sure of the
number of the serial port, check your PC’s documentation.
The downloading process takes about 5 minutes, depending on
the size of the file and the speed of your PC. The Ready indicator
blinks as the new system image is copied to flash ROM. After the
updated system software has been written to flash ROM, the
printer reboots with the new system image, prints a start-up page,
and returns to IDLE.
»
Note: The new flash image does not erase the old image until the
printer verifies that the new image is valid.
11 Print another advanced status page, and verify that the current configuration settings match the previous configuration
settings (on the advanced status page printed in step 5).
12 If there are differences in the configuration settings, correct
them through the printer configuration menu.
Downloading System Software to a NonFunctional Printer
If the print system software is functional (the printer starts up normally, and IDLE displays in the message window), go to one of the
previous sections, “Downloading System Software to a Functional
Printer—SYSTEMDL.PS” or “Downloading System Software to a
Functional Printer—SYSTEM.DL.”
If the print system software is non-functional (the printer can’t start
up), use these instructions to download the system software.
»
6-86
Note: Before you can use these instructions, you must have
decompressed the system software, as described in the previous
section.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updating
System
Software
Macintosh
If the current print system software is not functioning, you must connect your Macintosh to the printer’s serial port to reinstall the system
software. The downloading procedure will not work over the LocalTalk
or CrownNet interface in this case.
»
Note: This downloading procedure requires a connection from the
Macintosh’s serial port (either the modem or the printer port) to the
printer’s serial port. The cable must have a DIN-8 female connector
on the Macintosh end. It must also must be wired as a null modem or
it must have a null modem adapter. The type of connector for the
printer’s serial port end of the cable depends on the type of null
modem assembly. Your Macintosh vendor can provide you with this
equipment, or you can use the “Cable Pinouts” section of appendix B,
“Technical Specifications,” if you want to make your own cable.
1
Connect the Macintosh to the printer’s serial port.
You can use either the printer or modem port on the Macintosh.
However, the modem port provides the fastest download.
Note: To use the printer port you must first disable AppleTalk in
the Chooser.
»
2
Turn on the printer.
3
When the control panel indicators stop flashing (the message window will remain blank since the printer is non-functional), send the new system software file SYSTEM.DL to the
printer.
a
At the Macintosh, double-click the SystemLoader icon.
b
In the dialog box that appears, make sure the correct
download port is selected, and then choose the Send button
to start the download.
The downloading process takes about 10 minutes, depending on the size of the file and the speed of your Macintosh.
The Ready indicator blinks as the new system image is written to flash ROM. After the updated system software has
been written to flash ROM, the message Download Complete! appears on the Macintosh screen, the printer
Printer Options
6-87
Updating
System
Software
reboots with the new system image, prints a start-up page,
and returns to IDLE.
Note: The new flash image does not erase the old image
until the printer verifies that the new image is valid.
»
PC—Parallel Port
If the current print system software is not functioning, you must connect your PC to either the printer’s parallel or serial port to reinstall
the system software. The downloading procedure will not work over
the CrownNet interface in this case.
Using the parallel port is the recommended method for downloading
from a PC because the parallel port is faster than the serial port and
because no additional cables or changes of port settings are necessary.
»
Note: If you’re using a serial port, skip to the following section, “PC—
Serial Port.”
1
If necessary, connect the PC to the printer’s parallel port.
2
Turn on the printer.
3
When the control panel indicators stop flashing (the message window will remain blank since the printer is non-functional), send the new system software file SYSTEM.DL to the
printer.
Type
copy /b system.dl lpt#↵
where # is 1 to 3. (/b refers to binary files.) If you’re not sure of the
number of the parallel port, check your PC’s documentation.
The downloading process takes about 5 minutes, depending on
the size of the file and the speed of your PC. The Ready indicator
blinks as the new system image is copied to flash ROM. After the
updated system software has been written to flash ROM, the
printer reboots with the new system image, prints a start-up page,
and returns to IDLE.
6-88
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updating
System
Software
Note: The new flash image does not erase the old image until the
printer verifies that the new image is valid.
»
PC—Serial Port
If the current print system software is not functioning, you must connect your PC to either the printer’s parallel or serial port to reinstall
the system software. The downloading procedure will not work over
the CrownNet interface in this case.
This method for downloading the system software from a PC should
be used only when a parallel port is not available because it’s slower
and because it requires a null modem cable (see the “Cable Pinouts”
section of appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for more information) and special software to set the PC’s serial port to 38400 baud
(see step 2, below).
»
Note: If you’re using a parallel port, refer to the previous section,
“PC—Parallel Port.”
1
If necessary, connect the PC to the printer’s serial port,
using a null modem cable.
2
Download the DOS ModeX program from the QMS Bulletin
Board.
Using your modem, dial in to the QMS Bulletin Board, as
described in appendix A, “QMS Customer Support.” After you
access the QMS Main Library through the L (Library of Files)
selection, do the following:
3
a
Choose D (Download a File).
b
Type hibaud.exe↵
c
Exit from the Bulletin Board.
d
Terminate the connection.
Type hibaud↵ to extract the ModeX files.
Printer Options
6-89
Updating
System
Software
4
Set the PC’s baud rate to 38400 by typing
modex.exe↵
modex # 38400 n 8 1↵
where # is 1-4. See the MODEX.DOC file for more information on
this program.
5
Turn on the printer.
6
When the control panel indicators stop flashing (the message window will remain blank since the printer is non-functional), send the new system software file SYSTEM.DL to the
printer.
Type
copy /b system.dl com#↵
where # is 1 to 4. (/b refers to binary files.) If you’re not sure of the
number of the serial port, check your PC’s documentation.
The downloading process takes about 5 minutes, depending on
the size of the file and the speed of your PC. The Ready indicator
blinks as the new system image is copied to flash ROM. After the
updated system software has been written to flash ROM, the
printer reboots with the new system image, prints a start-up page,
and returns to IDLE.
»
Note: The new flash image does not erase the old image until the
printer verifies that the new image is valid.
v
6-90
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
A
QMS Customer
Support
In This Chapter . . .
n
n
Sources of customer support
QMS world-wide offices
Sources of
Support
Sources of Support
Several sources of help and information are available, depending on
the type of help you need:
Your QMS Vendor
Your local vendor (the one from whom you bought the printer) may be
best equipped to help you. Your vendor has specially trained service
technicians available to answer questions, and the equipment to analyze your printer problems.
Your Application Vendor
Often, “printing” problems have more to do with the application being
used than with the printer. In this case, the application manufacturer
is the best source of help.
Q-FAX
Q-FAX, a QMS information retrieval service, provides application
notes, technical support notes on common printing problems, and
information about printer specifications, options, accessories, consumables, and prices.
In the United States and Canada, call (800) 633-7213 to reach
Q-FAX. In all other countries, call (334) 633-3850. Have your fax
number handy when you call (or place the call from your fax
machine's handset).
You can choose to have either a directory (a list of currently available
documents on a particular topic) or a specific document sent to you.
The first time you call, request the directory (press 2 on your phone or
fax keypad when prompted). Then call back to request specific documents. You can order up to three documents per call.
A-2
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Sources of
Support
The QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System
The QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System (BBS) contains technical
support notes, application notes, drivers, patches, and utilities, and
you may leave technical questions not requiring an immediate
response on electronic mail for the Sysop (System Operator).
The bulletin board [(334) 633-3632] operates at 1200, 2400, 9600,
and 14400 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, with XMODEM,
YMODEM, and ZMODEM capabilities. Contact QMS Customer Technical Assurance for more information about the bulletin board.
CompuServe
Through CompuServe, you ask general (non-technical) questions,
share information with other users, and access printing information
and programs. When you use CompuServe, type go qmsprint↵ to
go directly to the forum where QMS is located. The QMS library section contains application notes, printer drivers, utilities, technical information, and announcement files.
Internet
The QMS server provides access to technical reports, new product
announcements, a trade show schedule, and other general information about QMS.
You can access the QMS server via any one of the many web viewers
available to Internet users. If you don’t have access to a web viewer,
we recommend the NCSA Mosaic web viewer (Mosaic is at
ftp.ncsa.uiuc.edu). The QMS home page is at http://www.qms.com/.
The QMS ftp resource is ftp.qms.com.
QMS Customer Support
A-3
Sources of
Support
QMS Customer Response Center (CRC)
The QMS Customer Response Center (CRC) is available M-F, 7:00
am-6:00 pm, Central Standard Time, at (334) 633-4500 (US). You can
also fax questions to the CRC at (334) 633-3716 (US). Please indicate whether you would like a faxed or a phoned reply.
If you call for assistance, have the following information ready so our
technicians can help you more quickly:
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Your phone number, fax number, and shipping address
A description of the problem
The printer model and serial number
The type of host computer you are using
The type and version of operating system you are using
The interface you are using, and, if serial, the protocol
The application and version you are using
The emulation you are using
Your printer firmware version (listed on the status/start-up pages)
QMS National Service
The following numbers are valid in the US. To contact QMS in other
countries, see the list of world-wide offices in the following section.
A-4
(800) 762-8894
Call for service information and maintenance pricing for
repair of all QMS printers and printers of various other
manufacturers.
(800) 858-1597
On-Site Service and Depot Repair Information
7:00-7:00 pm, Central Standard Time
(334) 633-4300
(x2530)
Spare Parts Ordering and Information
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
QMS Worldwide Offices
QMS World-wide Offices
United States/
Latin America
QMS, Inc.
One Magnum Pass
Mobile, AL 36618
(334) 633-4300
Product Information: (800) 523-2696
OEM Information: (800) 631-2692
Consumables: (800) 777-7782
Fax: (334) 633-4866
E-mail: info@qms.com
Latin America Fax: (334) 639-3347
Asia-Pacific
QMS Asia-Pacific
Melbourne 61 (3) 899 5777
Sydney 61 (2) 901 3235
Tokyo (81) (3) 3437 4030
Canada
QMS Canada, Inc.
9630 Rte. Trans-Canadienne
Saint-Laurent, Québec H4S 1V9
Telephones: (514) 333-5940, (800) 361-3392
Fax: (514) 333-5949
National Service: (800) 268-4969
National Service Fax: (905) 673-7676
Offices in Ottawa, Québec City, Toronto, and Vancouver
Europe, Middle
East, Africa
Düsseldorf (49) 211/596 1333
London (44) 1 784 442255
Maarssen (31) 3465 51 333
Paris (33) (1) 4107 9393
Stockholm (46) (8) 725 5680
v
QMS Customer Support
A-5
B
Technical
Specifications
In This Chapter . . .
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Print engine specifications
Physical characteristics
Controller specifications
Electrical and environmental requirements
Print media specifications
Cable pinouts
Printer options and consumables
Warranty considerations
Print Engine
Specifications
Print Engine Specifications
Engine
Canon LBP-P380
Duty Cycle
(maximum)
35,000 pages per month
Print Method
Laser beam scanning and dry electrophotographic
printing; fixing by heated rollers
Print Speed
Up to 16 pages per minute using letter or A4 paper loaded
long edge
Up to 9 pages per minute using 11"x17"/279.40x431.80
mm or A3 paper loaded short edge
»
Resolution
Note: Actual print speed depends on the host
application
300x300 dpi
600x600 dpi
1200x600 or 1200x1200 dpi, depending on whether a
1200x1200 dpi resolution daughterboard is installed
»
Note: Printing at 600x600, 1200x600, and
1200x1200 dpi resolution on certain media sizes
requires additional memory. See the “High-Resolution
Printing” section in chapter 3, “Advanced Printing
Features,” of the Operation manual for details. See
chapter 6, “Printer Options,” of this manual for more
information on the 1200x1200 dpi daughterboard.
Toner
Microfine toner designed especially for high-resolution
printers (EP-BII cartridge); dry, single component in userreplaceable cartridge
Toner Cartridge
Life
7,500 pages at normal (5%) page coverage, letter/A4-size
media
Over 23,000 pages at 5% page coverage, letter/A4-size
media, if printer is run entirely in Conserve Toner mode
Warm-Up Time
90 seconds at 115V/240V, 68° F (20° C)
120 seconds at 220V, 68° F (20° C)
B-2
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Controller
Specifications
Controller Specifications
Emulations
PostScript—Level 1 compatibility mode and Level 2
HP PCL 5
HP-GL 7475A/7550A
Lineprinter
Support for downloadable optional emulations
Fonts
39 resident PostScript fonts that can be scaled from 4
points upward and rotated to any angle in 1° increments;
all typefaces have multilingual character sets
7 resident bitmap HP PCL fonts in 25 symbol sets, 12
resident scalable HP PCL fonts in 35 symbol sets, and 1
resident scalable HP PCL font in 5 symbol sets, all of
which can automatically be rotated to landscape
orientation
40 resident HP-GL symbol sets
Support for Type 1 and Type 3 host-resident
downloadable and printer-card-resident PostScript fonts
Support for Type 42 (PostScript format) host-resident
downloadable TrueType fonts
Interfaces
Centronics/IEEE 1284 bidirectional parallel, serial,
Ethernet interfaces
Support for an optional interface (LocalTalk, Ethernet, or
Token-Ring) or an optional IDE-SCSI hard disk board (to
which you can connect an IDE internal hard disk and up
to 3 external SCSI hard disks)
Memory
12 or 24 MB RAM standard, upgradable to 64 MB
4 MB System Flash ROM
2 MB Font Mask ROM
SIMM connector for up to 16 MB optional fonts
Type
IDT 3081E RISC microprocessor operating at 33 MHz
Technical Specifications
B-3
Electrical
Requirements
Electrical Requirements
Frequency
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
Power
Requirements
110/120v 50/60 Hz (about 90-130 VAC) or
220/240v 50 Hz (about 200-260 VAC)
Power
Consumption
1 KW 68° F (20° C)
Environmental Requirements
B-4
Noise Level
Idle; maximum 37 dB (A)
Printing; maximum 49 dB (A)
Ozone Density
The printer emits less than 0.1 ppm maximum with a
100% duty cycle under 8 hours of continuous operation
Relative
Humidity
Printing: 20-80% RH (non-condensing)
Storage: 35-85% RH (non-condensing)
Temperature
Range
Printing: 50-90° F (10-32.5° C)
Storage: 32-95° F (0-35° C)
Atmospheric
Pressure
570-760 mm Hg
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Physical
Characteristics
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
WxDxH
18.07" x 20.55" x 11.81"
459 mm x 590 mm x 300 mm
The height increases by 3.15"/80 mm with an optional
paper feeder; the height increases by 4.76"/121 mm with
an optional paper feeder and cassette supporter
Weight
About 50 lbs (23 kg)
Print Media
Delivery
Face down; about 300 sheets of 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper
Feed
Paper cassette
About 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) paper
About 750 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) paper with the
optional paper feeder
Multipurpose tray
About 100 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2) paper
About 50 sheets of transparencies
About 40 sheets of labels
Loading
Automatic from multipurpose tray or paper cassette
Sizes
(See the following table)
Types
Cut-sheet paper, transparencies, and labels.
We do not recommend printing on envelopes or
perforated paper (including 3-hole-punched paper).
However, if envelopes are used, they must be fed through
the multipurpose tray.
Technical Specifications
B-5
Print Media
Weight
Paper (cassette): 17-24 lb (64-90 g/m2)
Paper (multipurpose tray): 17-24 lb (64-90 g/m2)
Transparencies (multipurpose tray): 17-34 lb
(64-128 g/m2)
Labels (multipurpose tray): 17-34 lb (64-128 g/m2)
Print Media Sizes
Media
Media Size
Inches
Millimeters
Guaranteed Imageable Area* Feed
Inches
Millimeters
Edge
11x17
12x19
11.00x17.00 279.40x431.80
11.70x19.50 297.18x495.30
10.69x16.66 271.61x432.17
11.37x18.81 288.80x477.77
Short
Short
A3
A4
A5
A6/Postcard
11.69x16.54
8.27x11.70
5.83x8.27
4.13x5.85
11.37x16.19
7.94x11.37
5.48x7.96
3.78x5.50
288.80x411.23
201.68x288.80
139.32x202.18
96.00x139.82
Short
Long
Long
Short
B4
B5
B6
10.12x14.32 257.05x363.73
7.16x10.12 181.86x257.05
5.06x7.17
128.52x182.12
9.81x13.78
6.81x9.81
4.70x6.81
249.26x350.01
172.97x249.26
119.38x172.97
Short
Long
Short
Executive
7.25x10.50
6.94x10.16
176.44x258.06
Short
Full Ledger
11.70x17.40 297.18x441.96
11.41x16.81 289.81x426.97
Short
Legal
Letter
8.50x14.00
8.50x11.00
8.19x13.66
8.19x10.69
208.03x346.96
208.03x271.61
Short
Long
Universal
11.70x17.00 297.18x431.80
11.39x16.62 288.80x422.15
Short
296.93x420.12
210.06x297.18
148.09x210.06
104.90x148.59
184.15x266.70
215.90x355.60
215.90x279.40
*Enhanced image-area printing allows you to print to the edges of 11x17, 12x19, A3,
A4, full ledger, and universal media. However, due to print engine constraints, full-sheet
images may be slightly skewed on the page. In addition, QMS cannot certify the print
quality of text and graphics printed outside the guaranteed imageable area. See chapter 2, “Print Media,” of this manual for more information on enhanced image-area printing.
B-6
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Cable Pinouts
Cable Pinouts
Centronics/IEEE 1284 Parallel
This table gives the pinouts for the printer end of the Centronics/IEEE
1284 parallel cable used to connect your printer to a computer.
Signal Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19-30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Signal Description
StrobeData 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8
AcnlgBusy+
Pe+
Select
Autofeed
Reserved
Ground
Ground
Vcc Test
Ground
Iprime
FaultReserved
Reserved
Reserved
Selectin
Technical Specifications
Direction
In
InOut
InOut
InOut
InOut
InOut
InOut
InOut
InOut
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
Out
In
B-7
Cable Pinouts
Notes to the Table
n
n
n
n
n
n
B-8
Direction refers to the direction of signal flow as viewed from the
printer.
Return denotes “twisted-pair return” and is to be connected at
signal-ground level. When wiring the interface, be sure to use a
twisted-pair cable for each signal and never fail to complete connection on the return side. To prevent noise effectively, these
cables should be shielded and connected to the chassis of the
system unit and printer, respectively.
All interface conditions are based on Transistor-Transistor Logic
(TTL) level. Both the rise and fall times of each signal must be
less than 0.2 microseconds.
Data transfer must be carried out by recognizing the ACKNLG or
BUSY signal.
The cable must have an overall braided shield, Belden 8345 or
equivalent.
Connectors must have shielded housings. The overall shield
must be bonded to the shielded housings at both ends of the
cable.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Cable Pinouts
RS-232C Serial
This table gives the correct pinouts for the 9-pin male RS-232C serial
interface:
Pin Name
1
Not Used
2
Receive Data (RXD)
3
Transmit Data (TXD)
4
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
5
Signal Ground (GND)
6
Data Set Ready (DSR)
7
Ready To Send (RTS)
8
Clear To Send (CTS)
9
Reserved
Technical Specifications
Pinout View from Printer Interface
B-9
Cable Pinouts
IBM PC/XT, PC/AT, and Compatible Computers
The following diagrams show the serial cable pinouts for IBM PC/XT,
PC/AT, and compatible computers.
»
Note: Not all serial cables are configured as shown and may require
an additional null-modem adapter. Check with your cable vendor for
compatibility.
To Printer
To CPU XT
To Printer
To CPU AT
9-Pin
25-Pin
Female
9-Pin
9-Pin
Female
1
B-10
1
Not Used
RXD
2
2
RXD
RXD
2
2
RXD
TXD
3
3
TXD
TXD
3
3
TXD
DTR
4
20
DTR
DTR
4
4
DTR
DSR
6
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
DSR
GND
5
7
GND
GND
5
5
GND
RTS
7
4
RTS
RTS
7
7
RTS
CTS
8
5
CTS
CTS
8
8
CTS
9
»
Not Used
Not Used
9
Not Used
Note: To download printer system software via the serial port, your
hardware must have RTS and CTS support. Make sure that pins 4
and 5 on the 25-pin serial cable and pins 7 and 8 on the 9-pin serial
cable are crisscrossed as shown in this diagram.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Cable Pinouts
LocalTalk (Optional Interface)
The following table provides the pinouts for the printer’s optional 8-pin
LocalTalk interface:
Pin
Name
Pinout View from Printer Interface
1,2,7
Reserved
3
Transmit Data - (TXD)
4
Signal Ground (GND)
5
Receive Data - (RXD)
6
Transmit Data + (TXD)
8
Receive Data + (RXD)
Macintosh to Serial
The following table provides the pinouts for a cable connecting the
Macintosh printer or modem port to the printer’s serial port:
»
Note: To download printer system software from a Macintosh, you
must have this type cable.
To Macintosh
DB-9 Female
To Printer
DIN-8 Male
HandshakeOut
1
7
RTS
HandshakeIn
2
8
CTS
TXD-
3
3
TXD
RXD-
5
2
RXD
GND,RXD+
4,8*
5
GND
6
Not Used
7
Not Used
* Pins 4 and 8 must be connected together on the DIN-8 cable.
Technical Specifications
B-11
Cable Pinouts
Ethernet
10BaseT RJ45
The following table provides the pinouts for the 10BaseT RJ45 Ethernet interface:
Pin
Name
1
Transmit Data +
2
Transmit Data -
3
Receive Data +
4
No Contact
5
No Contact
6
Receive Data -
7
No Contact
8
No Contact
Pinout View from Printer Interface
10Base2 BNC
The following table provides the pinouts for the 10Base2 BNC
Ethernet interface:
Pin Name
1
Ground
2
Signal
Pinout view from Printer Interface
1
2
B-12
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Printer Options
Printer Options
1200x1200 dpi
Resolution
Daughterboard
Allows you to print at 1200x1200 dpi rather than 1200x600
dpi.
Hard Disks—
Internal IDE,
External SCSIy
Specifications are included in Q-FAX document 6502,
“QMS-tested SIMMs and Hard Disks.” This document
contains a description of each approved hard disk, its
manufacturers and part numbers, and the QMS products
on which it can be used. See appendix A, “QMS Customer
Support,” of this manual to find out how to access Q-FAX
documents.
Paper Cassette
Supporter
Allows installation of a 500-sheet paper cassette.
Paper Feeder
Allows installation of dual paper cassettes.
SIMMs
Specifications are included in Q-FAX document 6502,
“QMS-tested SIMMs and Hard Disks.” This document
contains a description of each approved SIMM, its
manufacturers and part numbers, and the QMS products
on which it can be used. See appendix A, “QMS Customer
Support,” of this manual to find out how to access Q-FAX
documents.
»
Note: Some 1660E Print Systems come standard
with a 1200x1200 dpi resolution daughterboard. On
others, it is an option.
Technical Specifications
B-13
Consumable
Supplies
Consumable Supplies
Cassettes
Size
Capacity
11" x 17"
A3
A4
A4
B4
B5
Legal
Letter
Letter
250
250
250
500
250
250
250
250
500
sheet
sheets
sheets
sheets
sheets
sheets
sheets
sheets
sheets
Media —Sizes
See “Print Media Sizes,” earlier in this chapter.
Media—
Recommended
Brands
Paper
Plain—Xerox 4024
Laser—Hammermill Laser Print
Labels
Avery 5260
Transparencies Canon brand type D
3-M type PP2500
Toner
EP-BII toner cartridge
Warranty Considerations
Various factors can affect a printer’s warranty. Two important ones are
consumables and electrostatic discharge. Read your printer warranty
carefully, and then store it in a safe place.
Consumables and Your Warranty
The use of non-QMS consumables and/or accessories alone does
not affect either your warranty or any maintenance contract you may
have purchased. However, if QMS printer failure or damage is found
to be directly attributable to the use of non-QMS consumables and/or
accessories, QMS will not repair the printer free of charge. In this
B-14
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Warranty
Considerations
case, standard time and material charges will be applied to service
your printer for that particular failure or damage. QMS recommends
that you use only QMS consumables and accessories to support your
printer. To order QMS consumables and accessories in the US, call
(800) 777-7782. In all other countries, check appendix A, “QMS Customer Support,” for the QMS office closest to you.
Electrostatic Discharge and Your Warranty
It's very important to protect the printer controller board and other
printer circuit boards from electrostatic damage.
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,
attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient
electrical ground. The bare metal chassis of equipment, such as on
the back of a computer, is suitable if it is plugged in but turned off.
Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic, rubber,
wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not acceptable
grounding points. The printer isn't an acceptable grounding point
either because it must be unplugged before you perform this task.
If you don't have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body's
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you handle any printer boards or components and before removing the controller board cover. If you must walk around before completing your
task, discharge your body’s static electric charge again before touching the printer controller board.
Incidental and consequential damages caused by not discharging
electrostatic buildup can affect your printer warranty.
v
Technical Specifications
B-15
C
Document Option
Commands
In This Chapter . . .
n
n
n
Supported Document Option Commands (DOCs)
Updated PCL 5 terminology
Updated information on supported DOCs
Introduction
Introduction
This appendix lists the supported Document Option Commands
(DOC) for your QMS 1660E Print System. The commands are
grouped by feature type.
Each command is preceded by either a DOC statement (%%) or an
IncludeFeature statement (%%IncludeFeature). See the QMS Crown
Document Option Commands manual for information on how to use
each command.
This appendix also provides updated information on HP PCL 4 and
PCL 5 DOC commands that has not yet been included in other QMS
manuals.
Supported DOC Commands
Header/Trailer Page Commands
Print document creator
Print creation date and time
Print copyright statement
Print current date
Print header page
Print document host
Print document owner
Print document title
Print trailer page
Print routing information
Print version and revision
%%Creator:
%%CreationDate:
%%CopyRight:
%%Date:
%%IncludeFeature:header
%%Host:
%%For:
%%Title:
%%IncludeFeature:trailer
%%Routing:
%%Version:
HP-GL Emulation Commands
Expand plot
Scale the image
Select enhanced resolution
C-2
%%IncludeFeature:expand
%%IncludeFeature:scaling
%%IncludeFeature:enhanced
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Supported DOC
Commands
Select original paper size
Select pen width and color
Select plotter
Shift the origin
Reverse image
%%IncludeFeature:size
%%IncludeFeature:pen
%%IncludeFeature:plotter
%%IncludeFeature:origin
%%IncludeFeature:reverse
HP PCL 5 Emulation Commands
Enable scalable fonts
Establish the current resource
and default object ID value
Remove an external object
%%IncludeFeature:scalablefonts*
%%IncludeFeature:install*
%%IncludeFeature:remove*
%%IncludeFeature:removeresource*
Reset to PCL defaults
%%IncludeFeature:reset
Retain temporary macros/fonts %%IncludeFeature:retaintemporary
Select default font
%%IncludeFeature:font*
Select default font ID
%%IncludeFeature:fontid*
Select monochrome
%%IncludeFeature:monochromegl
Select symbol set
%%IncludeFeature:symbolset*
Set carriage return to CR+LF
%%IncludeFeature:criscrlf*
Set linefeed to CR+LF
%%IncludeFeature:lfiscrlf*
Set number of lines per inch
%%IncludeFeature:linesperinch*
Set number of lines per page
%%IncludeFeature:linesperpage*
Set point size
%%IncludeFeature:pointsize*
Store fonts to disk
%%IncludeFeature:resource*
* Indicates a DOC command about which updated information is provided in the following section, “Updated DOC Commands.”
Lineprinter Emulation Commands
Number lines
Retain temporary macros/fonts
Select font for current job
Set carriage return to CR+LF
Set formfeed to CR+LF
Set point size for current job
Set linefeed to CR+LF
Set margins
%%IncludeFeature:number
%%IncludeFeature:retaintemporary
%%IncludeFeature:font
%%IncludeFeature:criscrlf
%%IncludeFeature:ffiscrlf
%%IncludeFeature:pointsize
%%IncludeFeature:lfiscrlf
%%IncludeFeature:lpmargins
Document Option Commands
C-3
Supported DOC
Commands
Set number of lines per page
Set orientation
Set tabs
Specify character map type
Wrap lines
%%IncludeFeature:linesperpage
%%IncludeFeature:lporientation
%%IncludeFeature:tabs
%%IncludeFeature:map
%%IncludeFeature:autowrap
PostScript Emulation Commands
Select PostScript level
%%IncludeFeature:languagelevel
Printer Commands
Collate print jobs
Select emulation
Select paper
Select number of copies
Select orientation
Select output bins
Set printer resolution
C-4
%%IncludeFeature:collate
%%IncludeFeature:emulation
%%IncludeFeature:input
%%IncludeFeature:numcopies
%%IncludeFeature:orientation
%%IncludeFeature:output
%%IncludeFeature:resolution
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updated DOC
Commands
Updated DOC Commands
This section provides updated information on HP PCL 4 and PCL 5
DOC commands. This information will be merged into the appropriate
manuals as they are revised. But until then, it supersedes the
following:
n
n
QMS Crown Document Option Commands manual (part number
1800216-001E)—PCL 4 emulation %%IncludeFeature:
resource command
HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference Manual (part number
1800304-001A)—All PCL 5 emulation commands
PCL 5 Emulation Terminology
Font
A font is a unique set of objects that has an ID and attributes (symbol
set, spacing, pitch, height, style, weight, and typeface number). A font
is accessed by specifying a desired set of attributes. The system
selects the font that most closely matches these attributes from the
available set of fonts. See the PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference
Manual for information on what characterizes a PCL font.
There are two types of fonts—bound and unbound. A bound font supports a single symbol set. An unbound font supports multiple, but not
all, symbol sets. With unbound fonts, the symbol sets are organized
into two groups—normal and Dingbats. All downloaded fonts are
bound, and all resident fonts (except Zapf-Dingbats which supports
the Dingbats symbol set) support the group of normal symbol sets.
In the QMS PCL 5 emulation, only fonts located in the current
resource may be accessed by a PCL font ID using the normal
<ESC>(#X sequence. All other fonts (resident, cartridge, or other),
including those stored on the additional resources, can be accessed
only by attributes.
Also, only objects stored in the current resource may be deleted
directly by the PCL language. Therefore, unless they are explicitly
removed, external fonts are always available to all PCL jobs.
Document Option Commands
C-5
Updated DOC
Commands
Font Index Number
In addition to its ID, a downloaded font also has an unique index number which is automatically assigned by the printer when the font is
downloaded. This index number may change if new resources are
added, but in practice it usually remains fixed. All currently available
PCL fonts (resident, cartridge, temporary, permanent, and external)
are listed with their font index numbers on the Advanced Status Page.
The font index number defines the default PCL font to be used if
selectbyid is specified as the default PCL font. Do not confuse the
font index with the PCL font ID, a mechanism used to identify
downloaded fonts in the PCL language using the <ESC>(#X
sequence. There is no way to specify fonts by their font index
numbers from within the PCL language. Only the default PCL font is
affected.
Object
There are three types of PCL downloaded objects:
n
Temporary
Temporary objects reside on the current resource and they are
deleted either at the beginning and end of a job (unless Retain
Temporary is set to On or On Compatibility) or when the system is
reset (<ESC>E or receipt of Printer Job Language).
n
Permanent
Permanent objects reside on the current resource and are
retained when the system is reset (<ESC>E or receipt of Printer
Job Language).
n
External
External objects reside on the additional resources.
All objects are temporary when first created. They can be made permanent objects through PCL commands. Both temporary or permanent objects can become external objects when the current resource
is changed (for temporary objects Retain Temporary must be set to
On, True, or On Compatibility). External objects become permanent
C-6
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updated DOC
Commands
when the resource in which they reside becomes the current
resource.
User-downloaded PCL objects (with the exception of palettes) are
identified by an ID when they are downloaded. The ID is usually set
by the file performing the download. If not, the system will provide a
default value (normally 0, but this can be set using the %%IncludeFeature:install DOC command). If two objects of the same type are
provided with the same ID, the last one received replaces the former.
From that point on, downloaded objects are accessible by their IDs.
Resource
A resource is a location where downloaded objects such as fonts,
macros, and patterns are stored. The printer has one default resource
and one additional resource for each attached hard disk. All downloaded objects are stored in file systems which reside on these
resources. The RAM1: resource may be used as the default, but systems with at least one hard disk use the system disk instead. So, for
any hard disk-equipped printer, all downloaded objects (except palettes, which require special handling) are stored on disk. The default
resource and one of the additional resources can reside on the same
hard disk, but they will be located in different directories of that
resource’s file system.
Document Option Commands
C-7
Updated DOC
Commands
Updated PCL 5 DOC Commands
Disable Scalable Fonts Command
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:scalablefonts(value)
Purpose
Enables/disables PCL 5 scalable fonts
Variable
value
Notes
Purpose
Specifies whether to disable scalable fonts.
Range
0—Enables scalable fonts
1—Disables scalable fonts
Default
0
Disable scalable fonts to
n Print PCL 4 documents which inadvertently select PCL 5
scalable fonts.
n
More closely emulate the PCL 4 font environment.
Install Object Command
C-8
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:install(resource id object id)
Purpose
Establishes the current resource and the default object ID value
for the current job to which it is attached. If it is attached to a job
that downloads a font without setting the current object ID using
the PCL escape sequence <ESC>(#X, it has the appearance of
“storing” the font on disk.
Variables
resource id
Purpose
Identifies one of the possible locations for
downloaded objects
Range
0 to 6
Default
Internal system disk
Format
Integer
Notes
If no %%IncludeFeature:install DOC command is
sent, the internal default location is used; otherwise,
this parameter, which must be provided, specifies
one of the alternate locations. For most QMS
printers, resource 6 is the system disk.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updated DOC
Commands
object id
Notes
Purpose
Assigns an ID to an object, such as a font, macro, or
pattern
Range
0-32767
Default
0
Format
Integer
Notes
The object ID can be used instead of the usual PCL
command to assign an ID. This ID is overwritten by
any ID assigned from the PCL print job, if present. If
neither a DOC command nor the PCL print job
specify an ID, the default ID of 0 is used. Identifiers
must be unique. If the ID matches an ID for an
existing object, that object is deleted and replaced by
the new object. If a %%IncludeFeature:remove
command precedes a %%IncludeFeature:install
command, the install command is ignored (these
two commands are mutually exclusive).
All downloaded objects are by default temporary and will be
deleted at the end of a job unless Retain Temporary is set to On
or On Compatibility. If the file the %%IncludeFeature:install
command is attached to does not make its downloaded fonts
permanent or Retain Temporary is not set, then those objects
are removed from the disk when the job completes.
A downloaded font can be accessed only by its ID if the font is
stored in the current resource. Regardless of its resource, a font
can be selected by its attributes. Example A shows a pair of jobs
that will not produce the desired results (subjob 2 has only the
appearance of storing the font on disk). By contrast, examples B
and C show a pair of jobs that will produce the desired results.
Examples Example %!
A—Job 1 %%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6 20)
%%EndComments
<ESC>)s#W<<download font header>><ESC>*c33E
<ESC>(s#W<<char 33 data>><ESC>*c34E
<ESC>(s#W<<char 34 data>>... <ESC>*c5F
Example <ESC>(20Xthis text is NOT in the downloaded font...
A—Job 2
Document Option Commands
C-9
Updated DOC
Commands
Example %!
B—Job 1 %%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6 20)
%%EndComments
<ESC>)s#W<<download font header>><ESC>*c33E
<ESC>(s#W<<char 33 data>><ESC>*c34E
<ESC>(s#W<<char 34 data>>.. <ESC>*c5F
Example <ESC>(8U<ESC>(s1p12v0s0b4153This text will
B—Job 2 be in the downloaded font, if it supports the
ROMAN-8 symbol set, is proportionally spaced, 12
points in height (or scalable), upright, medium
weight, and has type # 4153.
Example %!
C—Job 1 %%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6 20 )
%%EndComments
<ESC>)s#W<<download font header>><ESC>*c33E
<ESC>(s#W<<char 33 data>><ESC>*c34E
<ESC>(s#W<<char 34 data>>... <ESC>*c5F
Example %!
C—Job 2 %%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6)
%%EndComments
<ESC>(20Xthis text is also in the downloaded font...
Remove Object Command
C-10
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:remove(resource id object id object
type)
Purpose
Removes an external object from the printer system.
Variables
object type
Purpose
Specifies the kind of objects that are to be deleted
from the specified printer system.
Range
*, font, macro, pattern, or other object type
Default
N/A
Format
Character
Notes
If object type is * or is not specified, then all objects
on the specified resource with the specified object id
are removed.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updated DOC
Commands
object id
Notes:
Purpose
Specifies the ID of the object that is to be removed
from the printer system.
Range
*, -1 to 32767
Default
-1 (wildcard)
Format
Integer
Notes
If the object id is not specified, or if it is specified as *
or -1, all objects on the specified resource are
removed.
Unlike the %%IncludeFeature:install command, the
%%IncludeFeature:remove command does not set any
defaults, and it is not directly related to the job to which it is
attached. This command allows you to remove external objects
from the system without having to generate a job containing both
the DOC command to set the appropriate current resource and
the PCL code to delete the desired object.
If this command is specified more than once, the last command
received is the one that will be executed. In the following
example, the remove(6 5 font) command is executed, and the
remove(6 1 macro) command is ignored:
%%IncludeFeature:remove(6 1 macro) remove(6 5 font)
Document Option Commands
C-11
Updated DOC
Commands
Remove Resource Command
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:removeresource(resource id object id)
Purpose
Identifies an external object that is to be removed from the
printer system.
Notes
This is an obsolete DOC command that is identical to the
remove command, except that it does not allow specification of
an object type. The DOC string “removeresource(aaa bbb)” is
equivalent to “remove(aaa bbb *)”.
Variables
resource id
Purpose
Indicates the resource from which the object is to be
removed.
Range
0-6
Default
N/A
Format
Integer
Notes
This ID must be specified. It indicates the resource
from which the desired object is to be removed.
There is no way to specify “all resources.” If a
%%IncludeFeature:install command precedes the
%%IncludeFeature:remove command, the remove
command is ignored (these commands are mutually
exclusive). If the disk does not exist, PCL issues the
NO SPACE FOR FONT, MACRO, OR PATTERN
error message.
object id
C-12
Purpose
Specifies the ID of the object that is to be removed
from the printer system.
Range
*, -1 to 32767
Default
-1 (wildcard)
Format
Integer
Notes
If the object id is not specified, or it is specified as * or
-1, all objects on the specified resource with the
specified object type are removed.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updated DOC
Commands
Resource Command
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:resource(resource id object code)
Purpose
Establishes the current resource and the default object code
value for the current job to which it is attached.
Notes
This command is identical to the %%IncludeFeature:install
DOC command. It is included for backward compatibility.
All downloaded objects are by default temporary, and will be
deleted at the end of a job unless Retain Temporary is set to on,
true, or on compatibility. If the file that the %%IncludeFeature:
resource command is attached to does not make the
downloaded font permanent and Retain Temporary is not set,
then those objects are removed from the disk when the job
completes.
A downloaded font can only be accessed by its ID if the font is
stored in the current resource. Regardless of its resource, a font
can be selected by its attributes.
Variables
resource id
Purpose
Identifies one of the possible locations for
downloaded objects.
Range
0-6
Default
Internal system disk
(usually DSK6:/BIN/EMULATE/PCL/FONTS
Format
Integer
Notes
If no resource item is provided, the internal default
location is used; otherwise, this parameter, which
must be provided, specifies one of the alternate
locations. For most QMS printers, resource 6 is the
system disk.
object code
Purpose
Assigns a code to an object such as a font, macro, or
pattern.
Range
0-32767
Range
0
Format
Integer
Document Option Commands
C-13
Updated DOC
Commands
Select Font Command
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:font (font name)
Purpose
Specifies the default font to use.
Notes
Fonts are identified by the names shown above. Only the
resident fonts may be selected (the available set varies from
printer to printer). An asterisk “*” in the name indicates that a font
is scalable, and that a point size is to be applied. The value
selectbyid indicates that the default font ID or unique font index
will be used for default font selection. Selecting a bound, bitmap
font overrides the default settings for symbol set and point size.
An unbound font uses the specified default symbol set if
possible, while a scalable font uses the default font size.
Variable
font name
Purpose
Specifies the default font name.
Range
courier12
courier12bold
courier12italic
courier10
courier10bold
courier10italic
lineprinter
times*
times*italic
times*bold
Default
Depends on printer configuration
Format
Character
times*blditalic
univ*
univ*italic
univ*bold
univ*blditalic
univcond*
univcond*italic
univcond*bold
univcond*blditlc
selectbyindex
Select Font Index Command
C-14
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:fontid (index #)
Purpose
Specifies the default font index number.
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updated DOC
Commands
Notes
This index is used when the Default Font selected is selectbyid.
This allows for selection of fonts only on the current resource.
Selection of default font by index overrides the symbol set value.
The symbol set is overridden if a bound font is selected as the
default or if an unbound font is selected that does not support
the default symbol set. If a font with the specified index exists, it
is selected as the Default Font. If the specified value does not
exist, courier 12 point is substituted.
Variable
index #
Purpose
Specifies the index number of the default font.
Range
0 to 32767
Default
Selectbyid-dependent
Format
Integer
Select Symbol Set Command
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:symbolset (name)
Purpose
Specifies the default symbol set for the emulation.
Notes
This command specifies the default symbol set. Not all symbol
sets are available with certain resident fonts. In particular, the
Desktop, PS Math, Math 8, Microsoft Pub, Pi Font, PS Text,
Ventura Intl, Ventura Math, Ventura US, and Windows symbol
sets cannot be used with the resident bitmap fonts: courier10,
courier10bold, courier10italic, courier12, courier12bold,
courier12italic, and lineprinter.
The five dingbat symbol sets (PS-Zapf-Dingbats,
Ventura-Dingbats, Zapf-Dingbats100, Zapf-Dingbats200, and
Zapf-Dingbats300) can be used with all fonts. If a mismatch
between symbol set and font occurs, the standard PCL font
selection mechanism is used to locate a font that matches the
selected symbol set. With the standard set of fonts distributed by
QMS, this matches the Times* font, but other user installed fonts
could change this result.
Variable
name
Purpose
Specifies the symbol set name.
Document Option Commands
C-15
Updated DOC
Commands
Range
roman-8
pc-850
pc8-us
pc8-dn
ecma-94
legal
hpgerman
hpspanish
iso-2
iso-4
iso-6
iso-10
iso-11
iso-14
iso-15
iso-16
iso-17
iso-21
iso-25
iso-57
Default
N/A
Format
Character
iso-60
iso-61
iso-69
iso-84
iso-85
desktop
ps-math
math8
microsoft-pub
pi-font
ps-text
ventura-intl
ventura-math
ventura-us
windows
ps-zapf-dingbats
ventura-dingbats
zapf-dingbats100
zapf-dingbats200
zapf-dingbats300
Set Carriage Return (Line Termination)
Syntax
Purpose
Variable
C-16
%%IncludeFeature:criscrlf (value)
Controls the default line termination mode (the <ESC>&k#G
command). Specifies the line termination treatment of a carriage
return.
value
Purpose Specifies whether a carriage return is treated simply
as a carriage return, or as a carriage return-line feed
combination.
Range
Off/false—Treat line feed as a line feed.
On/true—Treat line feed as a carriage return-line
feed combination.
Default
Printer configuration dependent
Format
Boolean
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updated DOC
Commands
Notes
LFISCRLF
Off
On
Off
On
The result of various settings for these parameters is
shown in table below, in terms of the equivalent code
passed to the PCL line termination command
(<ESC>&k#G). The second setting (lfiscrlf on, criscrlf
off) is correct for most ASCII listings printed from
UNIX machines. PC listings should usually be done
with both items set to off, and Macintosh listings
usually require the third setting (lfiscrlf off, criscrlf on).
The following table shows the criscrlf/lfiscrlf
commands and the corresponding PCL Line
Termination command parameters.
CRISCRLF
Off
Off
On
On
PCL Code
0
2
1
3
Comments
CR→CR,LF→LF,FF→FF
CR→CR,LF→CR-LF,FF→CR-FF
CR→CR-LF,LF→LF,FF→FF
CR→CR-LF,LF→CR-LF,FF→CR-FF
Set Linefeed (Line Termination)
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:lfiscrlf (value)
Purpose
Controls the default line termination mode (the <ESC>&k#G
command); specifies the line termination treatment of a linefeed.
Variable
value
Purpose
Specifies whether a linefeed is treated simply as a
linefeed or as a carriage return-linefeed combination
Range
Off/false—Treats linefeed as a linefeed.
On/true—Treats linefeed as carriage return-linefeed
combination
Default
Printer configuration dependent
Document Option Commands
C-17
Updated DOC
Commands
Format
boolean
Notes
The result of various settings for these parameters is
shown in the table included in the Set Carriage
Return (Line Termination) discussion, in terms of the
equivalent code passed to the PCL line termination
command. The second setting (lfiscrlf on, criscrlf off)
is correct for most ASCII listings printed from UNIX
machines. PC listings should usually be done with
both items set to Off, and Macintosh listings usually
require the third setting (lfiscrlf Off, criscrlf On). Note
that the FF becomes a CR-FF when the LF is a CRLF.
Set Lines Per Inch Command
C-18
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:linesperinch (#)
Purpose
Sets the default PCL line spacing.
Notes
Both the %%IncludeFeature:linesperinch and
%%IncludeFeature:linesperpage DOC commands affect
PCL’s default VMI (vertical motion index). In the event that both
are specified, the linesperpage DOC command is ignored.
Variable
#
Purpose
Specifies the default number of lines per inch.
Range
1-48
Default
6
Format
Integer
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Updated DOC
Commands
Set Lines Per Page Command
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:linesperpage (#)
Purpose
Sets the default PCL line spacing.
Notes
Both the %%IncludeFeature:linesperinch and
%%IncludeFeature:linesperpage DOC commands affect
PCL’s default VMI (vertical motion index). In the event that both
are specified, the linesperpage DOC command is ignored.
Variable
#
Purpose
Specifies the number of lines on the default page at
the default orientation.
Range
1-3000
Default
Printer configuration dependent
Format
Integer
Set Point Size Command
Syntax
%%IncludeFeature:pointsize(default font size)
Purpose
Specifies the point size for scalable default font
Notes
If the selected font is not scalable or if a bitmap font size is
specified, this setting is ignored.
Variable
default font size
Purpose
Specifies the floating point number for point size.
Range
0.25 to 999.75 in 0.25 increments
Default
Printer configuration dependent
Format
Floating point number
v
Document Option Commands
C-19
D
Notices
In This Chapter . . .
n
n
n
n
n
n
Manual notices
Laser safety
FCC compliance
Energy Star compliance
Cnadian notice
Colophon
Manual Notice
Manual Notice
QMS, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to this manual and to
the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort
has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and
omissions. However, QMS, Inc. makes no warranty of any kind
including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this
manual. QMS, Inc. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors
contained in this manual or for incidental, special, or consequential
damages arising out of the furnishing of this manual, or the use of this
manual in operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.
Laser Safety
This printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and
Safety Act of 1968. This means that the printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot
escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
FCC Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not
installed and used in accordance with the user documentation, may
D-2
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
FCC
Compliance
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
»
1
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
3
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
4
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
Note: A shielded cable is required to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
▲ Caution: Any modifications or changes to this product not expressly
approved in writing by the manufacturer responsible for compliance to
Federal Regulations could void the user's authority to operate this
product within the Laws and Regulations of the Federal
Communications Commission.
M
WARNING! To prevent electrical shock, do not remove any covers
from your printer unless you are experienced in working with circuit
boards and are following instructions for procedures described in
QMS documentation.
ACHTUNG! Um elektrische Kurtzschlüsse zu vermeiden, entfernen
Sie keine Gehaüseteile von Ihrem Drucker, wenn Sie keine
Erfahrungen im Umgang mit elektrischen Bauteilen haben. Befolgen
Sie die in der QMS Dokumentation beschriebenen Hinweise.
Notices
D-3
Energy Star
Compliance
Energy Star Compliance
The QMS 1660E Print System is Energy Star
compliant.
»
Note: The EPA, as a matter of policy,
does not endorse any particular
company or its products.
Canadian Users
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio
noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques
dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques (de la
classe B) prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.
Colophon
This manual was written and formatted in FrameMaker. Some illustrations were created in Adobe Illustrator and converted to WMF (Windows Metafile) format in Transverter Pro; other illustrations were
created directly in FrameMaker. Typefaces used are Benguiat, Courier, Helvetica, Symbol, Wingdings, and ITC Zapf Dingbats. The manual was printed in on a QMS 4525 Print System.
v
D-4
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
E
Configuration
Menu
In This Chapter . . .
n
Configuration menu diagram
Copies
Use Operator Pwd
Collation
Admin Password
Orientation
Use Admin Pwd
Inputbin
Outputbin
Chain Inputs
Multipurpose Sz
Communications Emulations
Timeouts
PS Wait Timeout
Emul Timeout
Job Timeout
ESP Timeout
ESP Default
Postscript
Halftone Type
Emulation Level
Gamma Correction
Serial
PCL5
Mode
Emulation
Min K Spool
Spool Timeout
End Job Mode
Def Job Prio
Baud Rate
Parity
Ignore Parity
Rcv SW Flow
Xmit SW Flow CTL
Data Bits
Stop Bits
HDWE Flow CTL
PS Protocol
Default Font
Symbol Set
Lines Per Inch
Line Termination
Point Size x100
Retain Temporary
Scalable Fonts
Default Font IDX
Monochrome GL/2
Downld Location
Parallel
Mode
Emulation
Min K Spool
Spool Timeout
Data Bits
End Job Mode
Def Job Prio
PS Protocol
Network 2
CrownNet
Special Pages Startup Options Memory
Print Status
Do Start Page
Calibration Page Do Sys Start
Header Page
Do Error Handler
Header Inputbin
Trailer Page
Trailer Inputbin
Status Page Type
K Mem For Spool
K Mem For PSHeap
K Mem PSFonts
K Mem Emulation
K Mem Emul. Temp
K Mem Display
K Mem Disk Cache
FrameBuffer
300 DPI
600 DPI
1200 DPI
MB Printer Mem.
Enable Disk Swap
Engine
Miscellaneous
Image Alignment
Horiz. Offset
Vertical Offset
Default Paper
Inputbin 1 Name
Inputbin 2 Name
Outputbin 1 Name
Page Recovery
Toner Out Act.
Energy Saver
Man Feed Timeout
Def. Resolution
Conserve Toner
Restore Defaults
Reboot System
New Flash Image
Keypad Language
HP-GL
Plotter
Scaling Percent
Origin
Reverse Image
Enhanced M ode
Expand M ode
Paper Type
Pen 1 - 8
LinePrinter
Font
Point Sz 100ths
Character Map
Line Numbering
Tab Stops
LF is CRLF
CR is CRLF
FF is CRLF
Orientation
Autow rap
Lines Per Page
Margins
»
Note: We have scaled this
diagram to fit it on the page.
We recommend that you
enlarge it on a photocopy
machine for ease of use.
QMS 1660E Print System Getting Started
Operator Passwrd
Administration
E-2
Operator Control
v
Installation
Glossary
10Base2
An IEEE standard for thin-wire Ethernet networks. It provides 10 megabits
(10 million bits) transmission and baseband signaling, and it has a maximum length of 607 feet (185 meters) per coax segment. See also thin-wire
Ethernet cable.
10BaseT
An IEEE standard for twisted-pair Ethernet networks. It provides 10 megabits (10 million bits) transmission and baseband signaling, and it is unshielded. See also twisted-pair Ethernet cable.
AppleTalk
A local area network communication protocol developed by Apple
Computer. AppleTalk operates on LocalTalk cabling and can be used by
Macintosh systems, PCs, and printers. See also EtherTalk, LocalTalk.
Application
Application
Any computer program designed to help people perform a certain type of
work (for example, word processing, page layout, programming, graphics,
and spreadsheets). Adobe Illustrator, Excel, and Word are applications.
ASCII
An acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. This
coding scheme, developed by the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI), specifies a digital code for each of the 96 displayable characters
on a standard computer keyboard as well as for control characters. The full
ASCII character set is 250+.
Baud Rate or Baud
The data transfer rate between two devices, such as your computer and
your printer. Both devices must be configured for the same baud rate. Your
printer’s baud rate ranges from 300 to 38,400 bits per second.
Bit
An acronym for binary digit. The bit is the most fundamental unit of
information that a computer can accept. It has two states called 1 (one) and
0 (zero), or on and off, and can be used to represent a yes/no type of
statement. Groups of bits are used to represent more complex statements,
such as characters. The most common grouping of bits is called a byte,
which consists of 8 bits. See also ASCII, byte.
Bitmap
A grid composed of small dots used to define an image, line drawing, or
character. See also raster graphics.
Bitmapped Font
A bitmapped font is a one in which each character is represented by a set
of dot patterns. Each font size requires a different set of dot patterns.
BNC Connector
A type of network connector used with thin-wire Ethernet cable. These
connectors lock together when one is inserted into another and then rotated
90 °. See also thin-wire Ethernet cable.
G-2
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Control Panel
Buffer
Storage space used to compensate for a difference in rate or sequence of
data flow when transmitting data from one device to another.
Byte
A unit of information consisting of 8 bits, the equivalent of one character.
See also bit.
Cancel Key
The control panel key that cancels a print job or sends an end-of-job
indicator to a print job waiting for incoming data. It is not necessary to take
the printer off line before using the Cancel key.
Card
See emulation card, font card, and security card.
Concentrator
A communications device that combines signals from multiple sources,
such as network workstations and printers, into one or more signals before
sending them to their destinations.
Connector
A coupler used to join a cable to a device or to another cable. Connectors
are identified as male or female. A male connector has one or more
exposed pins or prongs. A female connector has one or more receptacles
designed to accept the pins on the male connector.
Connector Box
A piece of equipment consisting of a small box with a built-in cable that
links the printer to the LocalTalk cable system.
Consumables
Supplies, such as paper, transparencies, and toner.
Control Panel
The area on the front of the printer consisting of eight keys that allow you
to configure the printer and perform frequently used operations, four LEDs
(light-emitting diodes) that identify various printer status information, and
an LCD (liquid crystal display) message window that provides status
information ad configuration menus.
Glossary
G-3
Controller
Controller
The software that controls the engine of a printer. The controller is the
intelligence of the printer.
Crown
A multitasking operating system architecture developed by QMS and used
in the QMS 1660E Print System.
Default
A printer control panel setting used in the absence of a application selection.
See also factory default.
Download
Transfer information from one device to another. Downloaded fonts and
emulations are not built into the printer. They are transferred from the
computer and temporarily stored in the printer's memory (until the printer
is turned off) or on a hard disk.
dpi
An acronym for dots per inch, a measurement unit used to indicate printer
resolution. Your QMS 1660E Print System has 300x300, 600x600, and
1200x600 dpi resolution.
Driver
See printer driver.
DTR/DSR
An acronym for Data Terminal Ready and Data Signal Received, a hardware-controlled protocol. It controls the flow of data via signals on the DTR/
DSR line, as opposed to XON/XOFF protocol, which is software controlled.
Electrophotographic Drum
A drum in the toner cartridge that is sensitive to both light and electricity. It
is used in the creation and transfer of images to the printed page. See also
toner, toner cartridge.
Emulation
Software that allows the printer to respond to commands intended for a
different type of printer. For example, when the printer is set for HP PCL
G-4
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Factory
Default
emulation, it responds to the same commands (HP PCL) that a HewlettPackard LaserJet printer does.
Emulation Sensing Processor (ESP) Technology
Emulation Sensing Processor technology. Using a form of artificial intelligence, ESP technology analyzes incoming file data from any of your
printer's interfaces, selects the appropriate printer language from those
installed on the printer, and processes the print job. ESP technology works
with most popular commercially available applications.
Energy Star Computers Program
A United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) program that
promotes the use of energy-efficient personal computers, monitors, and
printers and the reduction of air pollution caused by power generation.
Ethernet
A linear local area network developed by Xerox in 1976 and is presently
an industry standard. Each device, or node, is connected by twisted-pair
wiring, thin coaxial cable, or thick coaxial cable (not supported by your
printer). Based on the IEEE 802.3 standard, Ethernet operates at 10
megabits (10 million bits) per second. See also thin-wire Ethernet cable,
twisted-pair Ethernet cable.
EtherTalk
A type of AppleTalk network that uses AppleTalk protocols on Ethernet
cabling. See also AppleTalk.
Excess Memory Client
The memory remaining after providing all the other memory clients with
their specified amounts of memory is automatically added to the excess
memory client. All excess memory in your QMS 1660E Print System goes
into a pool shared by the frame buffer and the display list clients.
Expansion, RAM
See memory upgrade.
Factory Default
The printer settings that are programmed into the printer at the factory.
These settings are used unless they are changed at the printer control panel
or overridden by settings in an application. See also default.
Glossary
G-5
Flash ROM
Flash ROM
Quick loading, reprogrammable memory that holds information (such as
system code and downloadable emulations) even when the printer is turned
off. The chief advantage of flash ROM is that system upgrades can be
loaded from a floppy disk without the necessity of swapping out expensive
EPROMS or having to place a service call.
Font
A complete character set in one typeface or style. Two types of fonts are
available for your printer—downloaded and resident. See also download,
resident fonts, typeface, and typeface family.
Font Card
A module the size of a credit card that contains fonts which can supplement
the printer's internal, resident fonts to increase the variety of available
typefaces.
Full Bleed
The capability to print an image beyond all four edges of a specified media
size.
Fuser Assembly
An assembly that contains two heated rollers between which the paper
passes after toner has been applied; the heated rollers bond the toner to
the paper.
Gamma Correction
Gamma corrections allow you to sharpen the midrange contrast when
scanning black and white images.
Gray Scale
Progressive shades from black to white which provide detail and contrast
to printed images.
Handshake, Handshaking
A procedure, usually part of a communications protocol, to establish a data
communications path. Devices must be able to communicate with each
other. Your printer uses either XON/XOFF or DTR/DSR protocol to communicate with a computer.
G-6
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
IEEE
Hard Disk
A secondary storage place for such items as downloaded fonts and
emulations and for spooled data, thus providing virtual memory capabilities.
You can add an internal IDE hard disk and up to three external SCSI hard
disks to your QMS 1660E Print System.
Header Page
A separator page, printed before a print job, that identifies the print job and
helps users sort out the print jobs in the printer's output tray. See the QMS
Crown Document Option Commands manual information on customizing
the header page information.
Heap
A portion of memory reserved for a program to use for temporary storage.
Host
The computer or network to which a printer is connected.
HP PCL
An acronym for Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language, the printer
control language native to the HP Laser Jet Series II and III printers. Your
QMS 1660E Print System has a resident HP PCL 5 emulation.
HP-GL
An acronym for Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language, the programming
language on which HP plotters are based. Your QMS 1660E Print System
has a resident HP-GL emulation.
IDE
An acronym for Integrated Drive Electronics. “Integrated” refers to the fact
that all of the controller electronics are on the drive itself, so no separate
adapter card or expansion slot is required. See also SCSI.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics engineers, an organization of engineering and electronics professionals. The IEEE 802 Standards define
methods of access and control on local area networks.
Glossary
G-7
Imageable
Area
Imageable Area
The maximum area of a sheet of media capable of being printed on. It is
subject to both hardware limits (the physical page size and the margins
required by the print engine) and software constraints (the amount of
memory available for the full-page frame buffer).
Intellifonts
A collection of 37 PCL 5 fonts available on the Hewlett-Packard LaserJet
4Si. An optional Intellifont SIMM provides these fonts on your printer.
Interface
The place where two devices are physically connected, allowing them to
communicate.
Interface Cable
A special cable used to connect the printer to the computer so they can
communicate.
Interface Port
Your printer comes with three standard interface ports—serial, parallel, and
Ethernet—located on the back panel. An additional interface port is available through the installation of an optional LocalTalk, Ethernet, or TokenRing interface card. See also network interface card.
Jam Recovery
The printer’s ability to reprint the jammed page and then continue with the
print job once you remove the jammed media. With most printers, if a jam
occurs, you must reprint the job after removing the jammed media.
Kanji Option Kit
A pre-formatted IDE hard disk that contains Kanji fonts and other files. The
Kanji fonts include Ryumin Light-KL and Gothic BBB-Medium (licensed to
QMS by Morisawa and Company, Ltd.) as well as Mincho Medium, Mincho
Heavy, Gothic Bold, and Gothic Heavy (licensed to QMS by TypeBank).
These fonts can be printed at a variety of point sizes and in different styles
and resolutions.
G-8
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Memory
Upgrade
LAN Manager/LAN Server
LAN Manager is a network operating system developed by Microsoft that
runs under OS/2. LAN Server is IBM’s version of LAN Manager. Both run
on Ethernet and Token-Ring networks.
Landscape Orientation
See orientation.
LCD
An acronym for Liquid Crystal Display. The printer’s LCD message window
on the control panel provides status information and configuration menus.
LED
An acronym for Light-Emitting Diode. Four LEDs on the printer’s control
panel indicate printer status.
LocalTalk
One type of cable system used to link computers and peripheral devices
in an AppleTalk network.
Manual Feed
The process by which media is fed into the printer by hand (as opposed to
letter the printer automatically pull media from a cassette or tray).
Media
Any material (such as paper, labels, and transparencies) used in the printer
for printed output.
Memory
The space within your printer where information is stored while being
actively worked on. The term applies to internal storage space as opposed
to external storage, such as disks or tapes. See also RAM and ROM.
Memory Client
A user of a block of memory. Each memory client controls certain features.
When insufficient memory is allocated to a specific client, the features it
controls may not be accessible.
Memory Upgrade
An available option that is easily attached to the printer's controller board
to expand its standard 12 MB or 24 MB of RAM to a maximum of 64 MB in
Glossary
G-9
Menu Key
increments of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 MB. See also SIMM (Single In-Line
Memory Module).
Menu Key
The control panel key that accesses the printer configuration menu when
the printer is off line. Use this key to advance through the menus or to return
to a previous position in the menu. When changing printer setup, press this
key to cancel a change (before pressing the Select key) or to return to
previous menus one level at a time.
Motherboard
The main circuit board containing the primary components of a computer
system.
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell. It runs on both Ethernet
and Token-Ring networks.
Network Interface Card
A printed circuit board, in the shape of a card with an interface port, used
to connect a printer physically to a network cable. See your QMS vendor
for a complete list of available network interface cards.
Next Key
The control panel key that advances through a list of selections or options
for a menu. When changing character information, use this key to advance
to the next choice for the current input (underlined) character.
Non-volatile Memory
This type of memory is not lost when the printer loses power.
Null Modem Cable
A type of cable used for serial communication. This cable arranges the
communication between two devices.
NV RAM
This protected form of RAM is used to store information such as your
printer’s configuration menu. Configuration options you have chosen, such
as emulations, memory settings, and input bins, are saved to this nonvolatile RAM. This informaiton is not lost when you turn off your printer.
G-10
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Parallel
Interface
Off Line
Not accepting data from the computer. The printer is taken off line by
pressing the Online/Offline key. When the Online indicator is off, the printer
is off line. The printer must be off line to enter the Configuration menu.
On Line
Accepting data from the computer. The printer is on line when the Online/
Offline key is pressed and the Online indicator is on.
Online/Offline Key
The control panel key used to take the printer off line and put it back on line.
Orientation
The direction of print on the page. Printing across the narrow width of a
page is called portrait orientation printing. The word “portrait” comes from
portraits of people, which are usually vertical in format. Printing across the
length of a page is called landscape orientation printing. The term “landscape” is derived from pictures of the landscape, which are usually horizontal in format.
Page Description Language (PDL)
A programming language, such as PostScript, that is used to describe
output to a printer or a computer monitor.
Page Memory
A special buffer large enough to hold an entire page of data.
Paper Path
The path the paper follows in its journey through the printer; it begins at the
paper cassette or tray pickup point and ends at the output tray.
Parallel Interface
A data transmission technique that sends each bit simultaneously over
separate lines. (For this reason it is generally faster than a serial interface.)
It is normally used to send 1 byte (8 bits) at a time between computers and
printers. Your printer has a Centronics parallel/IEEE1284 bidirectional
parallel interface port. See also serial interface.
Glossary
G-11
Parity, Parity
Check
Parity, Parity Check
The addition of overhead bits to ensure that the total number of 1s in a
grouping of bits is either always even (for even parity) or always odd (for
odd parity). This permits detection of single errors. It may be applied to
characters, transmission blocks, or any convenient bit grouping.
PCL
See HP PCL.
PCMCIA
An acronym for Personal Computer Memory Card International Association, which sets industry guidelines for a standard 16-bit expansion socket
that accepts credit-card size memory cards (such as fonts). Type I card
slots accept 3.3 mm (.13") thick cards while Type II card slots accept 5 mm
(.20") cards.
Peripheral Device
A hardware device connected to a computer (such as a printer) or to a
printer (such as an external hard disk).
Permanent Soft Fonts
Permanent soft fonts are soft fonts downloaded into the printer's memory
that remain resident there, even if the printer is reset, until the printer is
turned off or the fonts are deleted by an application. See also download .
Physical Memory
The amount of RAM installed in the printer.
Point Size
The height of a character or symbol in a font. There are 72 points per inch.
This text is printed using a 10 point font.
Portrait Orientation
See orientation.
PostScript
A page description language trademarked by Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript Level 2 capabilities, among others, are implemented in your
printer through a QMS-developed PostScript emulation. PostScript Level
G-12
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Protocol
2 emulation is the native language of your printer’s controller. It describes
text, graphics, and page images to the printer.
Previous Key
The control panel key that returns through the list of previous selections or
options for the current menu. When changing the character information,
use this key to return to the previous choice for the current input (underlined)
character.
Print Density
Print density refers to the relative darkness of print on the page. Very dense
print appears totally black. Less dense print looks lighter, with solid-filled
areas not totally covered. Print density can be adjusted by a lever inside
the printer.
Print Engine
The non-intelligent portion of the printer, including the laser, print drum, and
paper-feeding mechanism.
Print Quality
A general measure of the appearance and readability of a printed page.
Criteria of print quality include the darkness, clarity, and sharpness of the
printed page.
Printed Circuit Board
A flat board made of plastic, fiberglass, or another nonconducting material
on which chips and other electronic components are mounted.
Printer Driver
A printer driver is a program that translates the file you are printing into a
language that the printer understands. Usually, the printer driver is installed
within an application.
PROM
An acronym for Programmable Read-Only Memory. A storage device that
can be programmed by electrical pulses, a PROM does not lose its memory
when the printer is powered off. See also EEPROM, EPROM.
Protocol
A set of rules or standards designed to enable computers and other devices
to connect to one another and to exchange information.
Glossary
G-13
Queue
Queue
A list of documents waiting to be printed.
RAM
An acronym for Random Access Memory, the memory your printer uses to
perform tasks. It can be written to and read from. Once a task is complete,
the memory is free again to be used for another file. This memory is volatile,
so if your printer loses power while a file is being sent, you must resend the
file. The number and type of features you can run simultaneously on your
printer depend on the amount of RAM available and how that RAM is
distributed. RAM can be increased by adding SIMMs. See also SIMM.
RAM Disk
Also called a virtual disk. The RAM disk is an area of RAM that is used to
simulate an additional hard disk. Data can be written to and read from a
RAM disk more quickly than a hard disk, but a RAM disk loses any
information stored on it when the printer’s power is turned off. The frame
buffer and spooling buffer are RAM disk clients. See also RAM.
Raster Graphics
The system of forming graphics using a bitmap, or grid of small dots, is
called raster graphics. The term “raster” denotes the Cartesian grid system
in which the dots are arranged. Bitmaps can define images, shapes, or
characters created with a specific number of dots per inch. See also bitmap.
Rasterization
The conversion of vector graphics (images described mathematically as
points connected by straight lines) to equivalent images composed of pixel
patterns that can be stored and manipulated as sets of bits.
Resident
Permanently stored in the printer’s memory.
Resident Fonts
Fonts permanently stored in the printer's memory; also called internal fonts.
Resolution
A measurement of the dots per inch (dpi) in output material, either printed
or visual, as in a high-resolution monitor. Your printer features a 300x300,
600x600, and 1200x600 dpi resolution.
G-14
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
SCSI
RISC
An acronym for Reduced Instruction Set Computing, a microprocessor
design that focuses on rapid and efficient processing of a relatively small
set of instructions.
RJ45 Connector
A type of network connector used with twisted-pair Ethernet cable. See also
twisted-pair Ethernet cable.
ROM
An acronym for Read Only Memory. This type of memory contains data
and/or printer-executable instructions that can be read but not modified.
On QMS Crown printers, the operating system code, resident fonts, and
resident emulations are all stored in ROM. This information is not lost when
the printer’s power is turned off.
RTS
An acronym for Request To Send. RTS is a signal sent from the host to the
printer indicating it is ready to send data.
Scalable Font
A scalable font is one in which each character’s dot pattern (bitmap) is
generated from a mathematical representation (or outline) of the character.
Scalable fonts eliminate the need to store many different font sizes.
Screen
The pattern in which dots or lines are placed on a page to create colors or
levels of gray. See also screen angle.
Screen Angle
The angle at which a screen is printed. See also screen.
Screen Font
A font designed for display on a computer monitor. Screen fonts usually
have corresponding printer fonts.
SCSI
An acronym for Small Computer System Interface, which allows up to three
external hard disks to be connected to your printer. See also IDE.
Glossary
G-15
Security Card
Security Card
A module the size of a credit card that allows you to set passwords for the
Operator Control and Administration menus. When a security card is
inserted into the printer card slot, the Installation menu appears in the
configuration menu.
Select Key
The control panel key used to access a menu or to choose a displayed
selection or option.
Serial Interface
A data transmission technique that sends each bit sequentially over a single
line. It is normally used to send one bit at a time for data communications.
Your printer provides RS-232C serial communications. See also parallel
interface.
SIMM (Single In-line Memory Module)
A small circuit board designed to accommodate surface-mount memory
chips. SIMMs use less board space and are more compact than more
conventional memory-mounting hardware. See also memory upgrade.
SIO (Simultaneous Interface Operation)
The capability of printing to all three of the printer's concurrently active ports
rather than being restricted to one. See also concurrent interfaces.
Soft Fonts
Fonts created or stored on disks. They can be transferred to the printer’s
memory and remain available to be used until the printer is turned off. See
also download.
Spool
An acronym for simultaneous print operations on line. Spooling is temporary storage to hold print jobs until the printer is available to process them.
Start-up Page
A page generated when you turn on the printer (unless you have disabled
it). It gives limited information on the printer, including name, pages printed,
current interface settings, and amount of RAM available.
G-16
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Trailer Page
Status Page Key
The control panel key that prints one or several pages, giving an overview
of the printer status, including the current interface type, resident fonts,
RAM available, and printer name.
Storage
A device in or on which information can be kept. There are three main types
of storage, ROM, RAM, and hard disks. ROM stores read-only data, RAM
represents temporary storage, and hard disks hold information on a more
permanent basis. See also hard disk, RAM, ROM, spool.
System Administrator
The person in charge of managing a network; also called a network
administrator.
Thin-Wire Ethernet Cable
Coaxial cable 0.2" (5 mm) in diameter that can connect network stations
over a distance of 607 feet (185 meters) apart. See also coaxial cable and
10Base2.
Timeout
The expiration of a predefined interval, which triggers some action such as
a disconnection that occurs following 30 seconds without any data activity
(in a 30-second, no-activity timeout). Timeout also refers to the length or
existence of such an interval.
Toner
A dry, powdered substance capable of being attracted to electrically
charged areas on a photosensitive revolving drum. The printer's EP (electrophotographic) toner cartridge holds the toner. The toner is first attracted
to this charged area, then attracted to the negatively charged paper. The
toner is melted (or fused) in place by the fuser assembly.
Toner Cartridge
A disposable cartridge containing dry toner and a print drum. The QMS
1660E Print System uses an EP-BII toner cartridge.
Trailer Page
A separator page, printed after a print job, that identifies the print job and
helps users sort out the print jobs in the printer's output tray. See the QMS
Glossary
G-17
Transformer
Box
Crown Document Option Commands manual information on customizing
the trailer page information.
Transformer Box
Also known as a connector box. This piece of equipment consists of a small
box with a built-in cable that links the printer to a LocalTalk cable.
Transparency
A type of media, also known as OHP (overhead projection) film, commonly
used for presentations.
Twisted-Pair Ethernet Cable
Two separately insulated strands of wire twisted together. Twisted-pair
cabling is used to reduce signal interference introduced by a strong radio
source such as a nearby cable. See also 10BaseT.
Typeface
The basic printed design of characters in a font. For instance, Courier, and
Times typefaces each print characters of different designs.
Typeface Family
A group of related typefaces. For example, the Times typeface family
consists of four typefaces: Times Roman, Times Bold, Times Italic, and
Times Bold Italic. See also font and typeface.
Utility
A program that performs a specific function of computer system management, such as maintaining disks and files or controlling a peripheral device.
Virtual Memory
An extension to the effective size of the printer’s memory by using a disk
file or swap file to simulate additional memory space. It enables the hard
disk to accept data swapped from RAM to free temporarily the RAM for
other tasks.
Volatile Memory
Memory that is cleared when the printer is turned off. Most RAM is volatile.
XON/XOFF
Control characters used for flow control in data transmission.
v
G-18
QMS 1660E Print System Reference
Index
%%EndOfDocument (R)4-36
<ESC>%12345X (R)4-36
10Base2
See Ethernet
10BaseT
See Ethernet
1200x1200 (O)6-27
1200x600 dpi resolution unavailable
(O)6-27
1284, IEEE, cable pinouts (R)B-7
3-hole-punched paper (O)6-29
500-sheet paper cassette (R)6-12
600x600 dpi resolution unavailable
(O)6-27
A
About this manual (GS)1-5, (O)1-2,
(R)1-2
Accessories
See Optional Accessories
Active jobs
Status message (O)6-9
Adjust Inputbin bin
Status message (O)6-9
Legend
GS
O
R
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Administration menu (R)4-5
Memory menu (R)4-45, (R)5-15
Passwords (R)4-53
Special Pages menu (R)4-61
Startup Options menu (R)4-59
Adobe
PageMaker (R)6-49
PhotoShop (GS)3-8, (R)6-51
Separator (R)6-49
Advanced status page (R)4-61
Albertus (R)6-33
Aldus (R)6-51
FreeHand (R)6-49
PageMaker (GS)3-9, (R)6-49
PrePrint (R)6-50
Alignment, image (O)3-9, (R)2-3,
(R)4-55
Allocating memory (R)4-45
ANSI ASCII symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
Antique Olive (R)6-33
AppleTalk (GS)2-17, (GS)4-2, (R)G-1
Connection (R)6-43
See also LocalTalk
Testing communication (R)6-50
Application (R)G-2
Configuration, printer (R)4-2
Macintosh (O)6-32, (R)6-50
Notes, QMS (GS)3-7
PC (GS)3-6
ASCII (R)G-2
AUTOEXEC.BAT file (O)6-14, (O)6-15
Autowrap menu (Lineprinter) (R)4-24
Avant Garde Gothic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic (R)3-3
Legend
GS
O
R
I-2
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
B
Baud (R)G-2
Baud rate (R)G-2
Baud Rate menu (Serial) (R)4-35
BCP
See PS Protocol
Binary Communications Protocol
See PS Protocol
Binary data printing problem (O)6-28
Bit (R)G-2
Bitmap (R)G-2
Bitmapped font (R)3-5, (R)G-2
Black image (O)6-33
Blurred background (O)6-33
BNC connection (GS)4-3
See also Ethernet port
Bookman
ITC Bookman (R)3-3
Buffer (R)G-3
Frame, allocating memory (R)4-49
Sizes (O)3-9
Spooling (R)5-20
Bulletin board, QMS (GS)3-7, (GS)A-3,
(O)A-3, (R)A-3
Buzzer menu (R)4-57
Byte (R)G-3
Byte mode, parallel (R)5-30
C
Cables
Ethernet interface (GS)4-3
LocalTalk (R)6-44
Macintosh (R)6-44
Parallel port (GS)3-4
PC interface (GS)3-2, (GS)3-5
Serial port (GS)3-5
See also Pinouts, cable
Calibration page (R)4-62
Cancel key (GS)5-5, (O)3-10, (R)G-3
Cancelling a print job (O)3-10
Cancelling job
Status message (O)6-9
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Card
Emulation (R)6-17, (R)6-18
Font (R)6-17, (R)6-18
Installing (R)6-16, (R)6-18
Security (R)6-18
Using (R)6-16
Cassette supporter (R)6-3, (R)6-9
Dual cassette (R)6-3
Installing (R)6-9
Removing (R)6-11
Unpacking (R)6-9
Cassette, media
Chaining (O)3-4, (R)4-41
Sizes (R)B-14
Chain Inputbins menu (R)4-41
Chaining cassettes (O)3-4
Character Map menu (Lineprinter)
(R)4-24
Character set (R)3-2
Chunk collation (O)3-6
Clarendon Condensed (R)6-33
Clearing a print media jam (O)6-2
Client, memory (R)5-11, (R)5-15
Close engine door
Status message (O)6-9
Collation (O)3-6, (R)4-13
Advantages (O)3-6
Chunk collation (O)3-6
Disabling (O)3-6
Enabling (O)3-6
Improving performance (O)3-7
PCL 5 files (O)3-8
Collation menu (O)3-6
Colophon (R)D-4
Color encoding
HP-GL (R)5-34
Communication
Modes (R)5-3
Parallel port, testing (O)6-13
Serial port, testing (O)6-15
Settings (status page) (O)3-9
Testing, Macintosh (R)6-50
QMS 1660 Print System
Configuration
Application, via (R)4-2
Changes, canceling (R)4-10
Changes, saving (R)4-10
Character information, changing
(R)4-7
Commands, via (R)4-3
Control panel, via (R)4-4
Defaults, restoring (R)4-11
Ethernet network (GS)4-14
Ethernet port (GS)4-10
Examples (R)5-23
Hard disk (R)6-68
Menu options, selecting (R)4-6
Methods (R)4-2
Options (R)4-52
PostScript operators, via (R)4-3
PS Executive Series Utilities, via
(R)4-3
Quick (see Frame Buffer)
Remote Console, via (R)4-4
Serial port (O)6-16
Configuration menu (R)4-5
Accessing (R)4-5
Administration menu (R)4-5
Changes, canceling (R)4-10
Changes, saving (R)4-10
Character information, changing
(R)4-7
Installation menu (R)4-5
Operator Control menu (R)4-5
Options, selecting (R)4-6
Connection (GS)3-4
Ethernet port (GS)4-3
Parallel port (GS)3-4
Serial port (GS)3-5
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-3
Connection menu (LocalTalk) (R)6-52
Connector (R)G-3
Connector box (R)G-3
Conservation
Energy (R)4-58
Power (R)4-58
Toner (R)4-58
Conserve Toner menu (R)4-58
Consumable supplies (R)B-14
Consumables (R)G-3
Warranty (R)B-14
Context switching (R)5-19
Control panel (R)G-3
Cancel key (GS)5-5
Configuration, printer (R)4-4
Indicators (GS)5-2
Language, message window (R)4-11
LEDs (GS)5-2
Menu key (GS)5-6
Message window (GS)5-4, (O)6-9
Message window language (R)4-11
Next key (GS)5-6
Online/Offline key (GS)5-5
Previous key (GS)5-6
Select key (GS)5-6
Status messages (O)6-9
Status Page key (GS)5-5
Controller (R)G-4
Specifications (R)B-3
Conventions, typographic (GS)1-6,
(O)1-3, (R)1-4
Copies (R)4-13
Copies menu (R)4-13
Coronet (R)6-33
Correction, gamma (R)4-28
Courier (R)3-8, (R)6-33
Legend
GS
O
R
I-4
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
cpi
Pitch (R)3-5
CR is CRLF menu (Lineprinter) (R)4-24
Creating a network job separator
(R)5-29
Crown (R)G-4
Features (GS)1-11
CrownAdmin software
Installation, DOS (GS)4-5
Installation, Macintosh (GS)4-5
Installation, Windows (GS)4-10
CrownNet
Parameters, setting (R)4-31
See also Ethernet, Token-Ring
CrownNet interface (GS)1-17, (GS)4-2
CrownNet Interface System
Administrator’s Guide, QMS
(GS)1-3
CrownNet Manager software
Installation, OS/2 (GS)4-6
Customer Response Center (CRC),
QMS (GS)A-4, (O)A-4, (R)A-4
Customer support, QMS (GS)A-2,
(O)A-2, (R)A-2
D
Dark image (O)6-33
Data Bits menu
Parallel (R)4-31
Serial (R)4-35
Data indicator
Troubleshooting (O)6-19, (O)6-22
Def Job Prio menu
LocalTalk (R)6-53
Parallel (R)4-32
Serial (R)4-36
Def Resolution menu (R)4-57
Default (R)G-4
Default Font Index menu (PCL5)
(R)4-19
Default Font menu (PCL5) (R)4-18
Default Paper menu (R)4-44
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Defaults, configuration, restoring
(R)4-11
Device numbers, hard disks (R)6-65
Dingbats
ITC Zapf Dingbats (R)3-3
Disk
See Hard disk
Disk cache (R)4-45, (R)5-20
Increasing (R)6-68
Intellifont SIMM (R)6-32
Disk Operations menu (R)6-66
Disk Operations, collation (O)3-6
Disk swap (R)4-48
Display (R)4-47
Display list (R)5-17
Do Error Handler menu (R)4-60
Do Start Page menu (R)4-59
Do Sys Start menu (R)4-60
DOC (R)C-4
Header page commands (R)C-2
HP PCL 5 emulation commands
(R)C-3
HP-GL emulation commands (R)C-2
Lineprinter emulation commands
(R)C-3
PCL 4 emulation commands (R)C-5
PCL 5 (R)C-8
PCL 5 emulation commands (R)C-3,
(R)C-5
PostScript emulation commands
(R)C-4
Printer commands (R)C-4
Trailer page commands (R)C-2
Updated commands (R)C-5
Document Option Commands
See DOC
Documentation
About (GS)1-2
About this manual (O)1-2, (R)1-2
Conventions, typographic (GS)1-6,
(O)1-3, (R)1-4
Optional (GS)1-5
Printer (GS)1-2
QMS 1660 Print System
QMS (GS)1-2
QMS Crown Network Notes (GS)1-4
QMS Crown Remote Console User’s
Guide (GS)1-4, (GS)1-5
QMS CrownNet Interface System
Administrator’s Guide (GS)1-3
Related (GS)1-5
Standard (GS)1-3
DOS
CrownAdmin software (GS)4-5
DOS commands
mode (O)6-15
Dots per inch
See dpi
Downld Location menu (PCL5) (R)4-19
Download (R)G-4
Downloading optional emulation
(R)6-72
dpi (R)G-4
Drivers
LaserWriter, troubleshooting (O)6-23
Macintosh (R)6-45
PC (GS)3-6
PostScript (GS)3-6
Windows (GS)3-6
Windows, troubleshooting (O)6-24
Drivers folder
PDX (R)6-49, (R)6-50
PPD (R)6-49, (R)6-50
Dual paper cassettes (R)6-12
E
ECP mode, parallel (R)5-31
Emul Timeout menu (R)4-64
Emulation (R)4-66, (R)5-19
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-5
Cards (R)6-17, (R)6-18
Downloading optional (R)6-72
Error (O)6-24
ESP Default Emul, setting parameters
(R)4-14
HP-GL parameters, setting (R)4-14
Lineprinter parameters, setting (R)4-24
Memory, allocating (R)4-47
Optional (GS)1-16
Optional, downloading (R)6-72
PCL 5 parameters, setting (R)4-18
PostScript parameters, setting (R)4-27
Setting parameters (R)4-14
Temporary, allocating memory (R)4-47
Timeout (R)4-64
Emulation Level menu (PostScript)
(R)4-27
Emulation menu (R)4-14
Parallel (R)4-32
Serial (R)4-36
Emulation temporary (R)5-19
Enable disk swap (R)6-68
Enable Disk Swap menu (R)4-48,
(R)6-68
Encoding, color
HP-GL (R)5-34
End job mode (R)5-24
%%EndOfDocument (R)4-36
<ESC>%12345X (R)4-36
HP EOD (R)4-36
QMS EOD (R)4-36
Reasons to use (R)5-24
Setting (R)5-26, (R)5-27
End Job Mode menu
Parallel (R)4-32
Serial (R)4-36
Legend
GS
O
R
I-6
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Ending a print job (O)3-10
End-of-document command (R)5-24
Adding to a file (R)5-28
Energy Conservation (R)4-58
Energy Saver menu (R)4-58
Engine error 2 (O)6-12
Engine error 3 (O)6-12
Engine error 4 (O)6-12
Engine error 6 (O)6-12
Engine error 7 (O)6-12
Engine features, configuring (R)4-55
Engine menu
Buzzer menu (R)4-57
Conserve Toner menu (R)4-58
Default Paper menu (R)4-44
Energy Saver menu (R)4-58
Image Alignment menu (R)4-55
Inputbin 1 Name menu (R)4-42
Inputbin 2 Name menu (R)4-42
Inputbin 3 Name menu (R)4-42
Man Feed Timeout menu (R)4-65
Outputbin 1 menu (R)4-43
Page Recovery menu (R)4-57
Resolution menu (R)4-57
Toner Out Act. menu (R)4-58
Vertical Offset menu (R)4-55
Enhanced Compatibility Port mode,
parallel (R)5-31
Enhanced Mode menu (HP-GL)
(R)4-14
Enhanced Parallel Port mode, parallel
(R)5-31
Envelope (O)2-6
Environment examples (R)5-23
Environmental requirements (R)B-4
EOD command (R)5-25
Network job separator (R)5-29
Other print queuing systems (R)5-26
PC print server (R)5-26
Stand-alone PC (R)5-26
EOD problems (O)6-29
EPP mode, parallel (R)5-31
Error Handler (O)6-30, (R)4-60
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Error messages
Engine error 2 (O)6-12
Engine error 3 (O)6-12
Engine error 4 (O)6-12
Engine error 6 (O)6-12
Format failed (R)4-29, (R)6-67
Hard disks (R)6-67
HP-GL error codes (O)6-12
Paper size mismatch (O)2-6, (O)6-10
PCL error codes (O)6-13
See also Status messages
Waiting for idle (O)6-10
Waiting on input end job (O)6-11
Write Error (R)6-67
Error messagesEngine error 7 (O)6-12
ESP (R)5-24
Printing modes (R)5-2
Setting parameters (R)4-14
Timeout (R)4-65
Troubleshooting (O)6-20
ESP Default Emul menu (R)4-14
ESP Timeout menu (R)4-65
Ethernet
10Base2 (GS)4-3
10BaseT (GS)4-3
Cable pinouts, 10Base2 BNC (R)B-12
Cable pinouts, 10BaseT RJ45 (R)B-12
Interface (GS)1-17, (GS)4-2, (R)6-37
QMS CrownNet System
Administrator’s Guide (GS)1-3
See also Ethernet port
Thin-wire Ethernet (GS)4-3
Twisted-pair Ethernet (GS)4-3
Ethernet port
BNC connector (GS)4-3
Configuration, network (GS)4-14
Configuration, port (GS)4-10
Connection (GS)4-3
CrownAdmin software, DOS (GS)4-5
CrownAdmin software, Macintosh
(GS)4-5
CrownNet software, OS/2 (GS)4-6
Parameters, setting (R)4-31
QMS 1660 Print System
RJ45 connector (GS)4-3
See also Ethernet
Software installation (GS)4-4
EtherTalk (GS)4-2
Configuration, Ethernet port (GS)4-11
Configuration, network (GS)4-14
Example, configuration (R)5-23
Excess memory (R)5-11
Expand Mode menu (HP-GL) (R)4-15
External hard disks (R)B-13
F
Factory defaults, restoring (R)4-11
FCC compliance (R)D-2
Features
Crown (GS)1-11
Printer (GS)1-7
FF is CRFF menu (Lineprinter) (R)4-25
File
Swap (R)4-48
Flash ROM (R)5-13, (R)6-83, (R)6-84,
(R)6-88, (R)6-89
System software, updating (R)6-75
Flow control
Hardware (R)4-37
Software, receive (R)4-39
Software, transmit (R)4-40
Font cache (R)5-18
Font card (R)6-17, (R)6-18
Note (R)6-17
Removing (R)6-17
Using (R)6-16
Font index number (R)C-6
Font menu (Lineprinter) (R)4-24
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-7
Fonts (R)3-10
Bitmapped (R)3-5, (R)G-2
Defined (R)3-2
Downloading, troubleshooting (O)6-25
HP ProCollection (GS)1-16
Installing optional (R)6-69
Installing, hard disk (R)4-30
Intellifont SIMM (R)6-30, (R)6-33
Intellifonts (GS)1-16, (R)6-33
Intellifonts, troubleshooting (O)6-26
Kanji (GS)1-16
Kanji option kit (R)6-73
Optional (GS)1-16
PCL 5 (R)C-5
PCL 5, scalable (R)4-22
PCL 5, temporary, retaining (R)4-21
PostScript, allocating memory (R)4-50
Removing optional (R)6-70
Removing, hard disk (R)4-30
Resident (GS)1-10
Resident, PostScript (R)B-3
Scalable (R)3-5, (R)G-15
Screen, Macintosh (R)6-45
See also specific font name
Troubleshooting (O)6-25
Format failed message (R)4-29,
(R)6-67
Formatting, hard disk (R)6-67
Frame Buffer (R)5-15
Memory, allocating (R)4-49
FreeHand
See Aldus
French/German symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
Function key
Cancel key (O)3-10
Legend
GS
O
R
I-8
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
G
Gamma correction (O)5-4, (R)4-28,
(R)5-4, (R)5-7
Gray levels (R)5-4
Halftone (R)5-4
Screen angle (R)5-6
Screen frequency (R)5-5
Gamma Correction menu (R)4-28
Garamond (Stempel) (R)6-33
Gray levels (R)5-4, (R)5-6
Gray-scale (R)5-7
H
Halftone quality
Laser beam (R)5-5
Scan quality (R)5-5
Screen frequency (R)5-5
Halftone types (O)5-5
Halftones
Cells (R)5-4
Gamma correction (R)5-4
Hard disk (R)4-29, (R)5-22, (R)6-61,
(R)6-68
Configuration (R)6-68
Device numbers (R)6-65
Disk cache, increasing (R)6-68
Disk Operations menu (R)6-66
Enable Disk Swap menu (R)4-48
Error messages (R)6-67
External (R)B-13
External SCSI (R)6-65
External, identifying (R)6-65
Font, installing (R)4-30
Font, removing (R)4-30
Format failed message (R)4-29
Formatting (R)4-29, (R)6-67
IDE board (R)B-13
Internal (R)6-61, (R)B-13
Internal, identifying (R)6-61
Internal, installing (R)6-62
Internal, removing (R)6-64
Internal, specs (R)B-13
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Kanji option kit (R)6-73
Kanji, troubleshooting (O)6-25
Memory (R)6-68
Optional (GS)1-17
Optional, Kanji fonts (GS)1-16
SCSI (R)6-65, (R)B-13
SCSI, turning on (R)6-66
Status messages (R)6-67
Swap file (R)4-48
Troubleshooting (O)6-26
Using (R)6-68
Hardware flow control (R)4-37
Hdwe Flow Ctl menu (serial) (R)4-37
Header Inputbin menu (R)4-63
Header pages (R)4-62
DOC (R)C-2
Header Page menu (R)4-62
Inputbin (R)4-63
Heap (R)4-51, (R)5-18
Helvetica (R)3-8
High-resolution printing (O)3-2
Horiz. Offset menu (R)4-55
Host Input (R)4-51, (R)5-20
HP EOD (R)4-36, (R)5-25
HP PCL 5
See PCL 5
HP ProCollection (GS)1-16
HP-GL
Color encoding (R)5-34
DOC (R)C-2
Encoding, color (R)5-34
Enhanced Mode (R)4-14
Error codes (O)6-12
Expand Mode menu (R)4-15
Origin menu (R)4-15, (R)4-18
Paper Type menu (R)4-16, (R)4-18
Pen 1 - Pen 8 (R)4-16
Plotter menu (R)4-17
Reverse Image menu (R)4-17
Scaling Percent menu (R)4-18
Setting parameters (R)4-14
HP-GL symbol sets (R)3-10
9825 Character Set symbol set
QMS 1660 Print System
(HP-GL) (R)3-10
ANSI ASCII (R)3-10
French/German (R)3-10
ISO French (R)3-10
ISO German (R)3-10
ISO IRV (International Reference
Version) (R)3-10
ISO Italian (R)3-10
ISO Norway, Version 1 (R)3-10
ISO Norway, Version 2 (R)3-10
ISO Spanish (R)3-10
ISO Swedish (R)3-10
ISO Swedish For Names (R)3-10
ISO United Kingdom (R)3-10
JIS ASCII (R)3-10
Katakana (R)3-10
Roman Extensions (R)3-10
Scandinavian (R)3-10
Spanish/Latin (R)3-10
Special Symbols (R)3-10
HP-GL/2
See PCL 5
I
IBM PC
AT cable pinouts (R)B-10
XT cable pinouts (R)B-10
IDE (R)5-12, (R)6-61
IDE board (R)B-13
IDE hard disk (GS)1-17, (R)6-61
Installing (R)6-62
Removing (R)6-64
IDE-SCSI board
Installing (R)6-55
Removing (R)6-60
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-9
IDE-SCSI disk drive board (GS)1-17
Idle
Status message (O)6-9
Idle input printing
Status message (O)6-9
IEEE 1284 cable pinouts (R)B-7
Ignore Par. Err. menu (serial) (R)4-37
Image alignment (O)3-9, (R)2-3,
(R)4-55
Image Alignment menu (R)4-55
Image orientation problem (O)6-30
Imageable area (R)2-2
Image alignment (R)2-3, (R)4-55
Indicators, control panel (GS)5-2
Initializing
Status message (O)6-9
Input bin 1 (O)2-6
Input trays, standard (O)2-3
Inputbin
Chaining (R)4-41
Header pages (R)4-63
Naming (R)4-42
Trailer pages (R)4-64
Inputbin 1 Name menu (R)4-42
Inputbin 2 Name menu (R)4-42
Inputbin 3 Name menu (R)4-42
Inputbins
Naming (R)4-42
Install option
Installing (R)6-70, (R)6-71
Installation
Paper cassette (GS)2-11
Toner cartridge (GS)2-8
Installation menu (R)4-5
Integrated Drive Electronics
See IDE
Legend
GS
O
R
I-10
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Intellifont SIMM (R)6-30
Accessing fonts (R)6-34
Albertus (R)6-33
Antique Olive (R)6-33
Clarendon Condensed (R)6-33
Coronet (R)6-33
Courier (R)6-33
Disk cache size (R)6-32
Font list (R)6-33
Garamond (Stempel) (R)6-33
Installation (R)6-30
Letter Gothic (R)6-33
Marigold (R)6-33
Omega (R)6-34
See also Intellifonts
Times Roman (R)6-34
Univers (R)6-34
Univers Condensed (R)6-34
Verifying installation (R)6-32
Intellifonts (GS)1-16
See also Intellifont SIMM
Troubleshooting (O)6-26
Interface
CrownNet (GS)4-2
Ethernet (GS)4-2
Ethernet, parameters, setting (R)4-31
LocalTalk, optional (GS)1-17, (R)6-39
LocalTalk, parameters, setting (R)6-52
Network, optional (R)6-37
Optional (GS)1-17, (R)4-31
Parallel parameters, setting (R)4-31
Parameters, setting (R)4-31
Priority (R)4-32, (R)6-53
Serial parameters, setting (R)4-35
Internal hard disk
See Hard disk
International Reference Version
See ISO IRV
Internet (GS)A-3, (O)A-3, (R)A-3
Invalid password (R)4-54
IPX/SPX (GS)4-2
ISO French symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
ISO German symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
ISO IRV (International Reference
Version) symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
ISO Italian symbol set (HP-GL) (R)3-10
ISO Norway, Version 1 symbol set
(HP-GL) (R)3-10
ISO Norway, Version 2 symbol set
(HP-GL) (R)3-10
ISO Spanish symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
ISO Swedish For Names symbol set
(HP-GL) (R)3-10
ISO Swedish symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
ISO United Kingdom symbol set
(HP-GL) (R)3-10
Italic (R)3-6
ITC Bookman (R)3-8
ITC Zapf Chancery (R)3-8
ITC Zapf Dingbats (R)3-8
J
Jams
Curled (O)3-4
Locating (O)6-2
Locations (O)6-3
Preventing (R)2-6
Recovery (R)4-57
Restart printing (O)6-5, (O)6-7, (O)6-8
JIS ASCII symbol set (HP-GL) (R)3-10
Job Timeout menu (R)4-66
K
K Mem Disk Cache menu (R)4-45
K Mem Display (R)5-17
K Mem Display menu (R)4-47
K Mem Emul Tmp (R)5-19
K Mem Emul Tmp menu (R)4-47
K Mem Emulation menu (R)4-47
K Mem for PS Fonts menu (R)4-50
QMS 1660 Print System
K Mem for PS Heap menu (R)4-51
K Mem for Spool (R)5-20
K Mem for Spool menu (R)4-51
K Mem PS Fonts (R)5-18
K Mem PS Heap (R)5-18
Kanji hard disk (GS)1-16
Troubleshooting (O)6-25
Kanji option kit (R)6-73
Katakana symbol set (HP-GL) (R)3-10
Key
See key names
Keypad language menu (R)4-11
L
Labels
Printing (R)2-4
Stock (R)2-4
Storage (R)2-6
Type (R)2-4
Vendor (R)B-14
Weight (R)2-4
LAN Manager/LAN Server (GS)4-2
Configuration, Ethernet port (GS)4-11
Configuration, network (GS)4-14
LAN Server
See LAN Manager/LAN Server
Landscape orientation (R)3-6
Language
Message window (R)4-11
Laser Prep (R)6-47
Laser safety (R)D-2
LaserJet 4Si (R)6-30
LaserWriter (R)6-47
Troubleshooting (O)6-23
LEDs (GS)5-2
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-11
Letter Gothic (R)6-33
Letterhead (O)2-6, (O)2-11
Level 1 PostScript (R)4-27
Level 1, PostScript, problems (O)6-24
Level 2 PostScript (R)4-27
LF is CRLF menu (Lineprinter) (R)4-25
Light image (O)6-34
Limit check error (O)6-21
Line Numbering menu (Lineprinter)
(R)4-25
Line Termination menu (PCL5) (R)4-20
Lineprinter
Autowrap menu (R)4-24
Character Map menu (R)4-24
CR is CRLF menu (R)4-24
DOC (R)C-3
FF is CRFF menu (R)4-25
Font menu (R)4-24
LF is CRLF menu (R)4-25
Line Numbering menu (R)4-25
Lines per Page menu (R)4-25
Margins menu (R)4-26
Orientation menu (R)4-26
Parameters, setting (R)4-24
Point Sz 100ths menu (R)4-26
Tab Stops menu (R)4-27
Lines per inch (R)5-5
Lines Per Page menu(Lineprinter)
(R)4-25
Lines/Inch x 100 menu (PCL 5) (R)4-20
Loading print media
Multipurpose tray (O)2-6
LocalTalk (R)6-39, (R)6-43
Cabling (R)6-44
Connection menu (R)6-52
Def Job Prio menu (R)6-53
Legend
GS
O
R
I-12
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Menu (R)6-52
Min K Spool menu (R)6-53
Mode menu (R)6-52
Parameters, setting (R)6-52
Pinouts, cable (R)B-11
PS Protocol menu (R)6-54
See also AppleTalk
Location requirements (GS)2-2
M
Macintosh
Application (R)6-50
Applications (R)6-50
Cabling (R)6-44
Connection (GS)2-17
CrownAdmin software (GS)4-5
Drivers, print (R)6-45
Laser Prep (R)6-47
LaserWriter (R)6-47
Limit check error (O)6-21
Macintosh-to-serial cable pinouts
(R)B-11
PrintMonitor (R)6-47
PS Executive Series Utilities (R)6-45
Screen fonts (R)6-45
Software (R)6-50
Software, printing (R)6-45
System 6 (R)6-48
System 7 (R)6-48
System software, updating (R)6-75
Testing communication (R)6-50
Macros
PCL 5, temporary, retaining (R)4-21
Man Feed Timeout menu (R)4-65
Manual feed timeout (R)4-65
Manual notice (R)D-2
Margins menu (Lineprinter) (R)4-26
Margins, page (R)2-4
Marigold (R)6-33
MB Printer Mem (R)5-22
MB Printer Mem menu (R)4-51
Media (R)2-2
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Feed edges (R)B-6
Imageable area (R)2-3
Imageable areas (R)B-6
Input (R)4-41
Jam recovery (R)4-57
Jams, preventing (R)2-6
Margins (R)2-4
Orientation, choosing (R)4-43
Outputbin, naming (R)4-43
Page sizes (R)2-2, (R)B-5, (R)B-6
See also specific types of media
Size, selecting (R)4-43, (R)4-44
Storage (R)2-6
Types (R)2-4
Weights (R)2-4
Memo (O)2-11
Memory (R)5-9, (R)5-11
Allocating (R)4-45
Buffer, frame (R)4-49
Client (R)5-11, (R)5-15
Configuration (O)3-9
Definitions (R)5-10
Disk cache (R)4-45, (R)6-32
Disk swap (R)4-48
Display (R)4-47
Emulation (R)4-47
Emulation, temporary (R)4-47
Enable Disk Swap menu (R)4-48
Excess (R)5-11
Fonts, PostScript (R)4-50
Frame Buffer (R)4-49
Frame Buffer menu (R)4-49
Heap, PostScript (R)4-51
Host Input (R)4-51
IDE (R)5-12
K Mem Disk Cache menu (R)4-45
K Mem Display menu (R)4-47
K Mem Emul Tmp menu (R)4-47
K Mem Emulation (R)4-47
K Mem for PS Fonts menu (R)4-50
K Mem for PS Head menu (R)4-51
K Mem for Spool menu (R)4-51
Management (R)5-10
QMS 1660 Print System
MB Printer Mem menu (R)4-51
Non-volatile (R)5-12
NV RAM (R)5-13
Physical (R)5-13
PostScript fonts (R)4-50
Printer (R)4-51
PS Heap (R)4-51
RAM (R)5-11
RAM disk (R)5-12
ROM (R)5-11
SCSI (R)5-12
Spooling (O)3-9, (R)4-51
Storage (R)5-11
System Use (R)4-51
Upgrade (SIMMs) (R)6-25
Virtual (R)5-13, (R)5-18, (R)5-22
Volatile (R)5-12
Memory clients (R)5-9, (R)5-17, (R)G-9
Disk cache (R)5-20
Emulation temporary (R)5-19
Font cache (R)5-18
Frame buffer (R)5-15
Heap (R)5-18
Host input (R)5-20
K Mem Display (R)5-17
K Mem Emul Tmp (R)5-19
K Mem for Spool (R)5-20
K Mem PS Fonts (R)5-18
K Mem PS Heap (R)5-18
MB Printer Mem (R)5-22
PostScript font cache (R)5-18
PostScript heap (R)5-18
PostScript VM (R)5-18
PS heap (R)5-18
Spool buffers (R)5-20
System memory (R)5-22
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-13
System use (R)5-22
Virtual memory (R)5-18
Menu
See menu name
Menu key (GS)5-6
Message
Toner out (O)6-33
Message window (GS)5-4, (O)6-9
Language, changing (R)4-11
Min K Spool menu
LocalTalk (R)6-53
Parallel (R)4-33
Serial (R)4-38
Mode
Communication (R)5-3
Printing, PostScript (R)5-2
mode command (DOS) (O)6-15
Mode menu
LocalTalk (R)6-52
Parallel (R)4-33
Serial (R)4-38
Monochrome HP-GL/2 menu (PCL5)
(R)4-20
Monospacing (R)3-4
Multiple pages problem (O)6-29
Multiple resolutions (O)5-2
Multipurpose Sz menu (R)4-43
Multipurpose tray
Labels (R)2-4
Loading print media (O)2-6
Media, selecting size (R)4-43
Transparencies (O)2-11
Legend
GS
O
R
I-14
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
N
Naming
Inputbins (R)4-42
National Service, QMS (GS)A-4,
(O)A-4, (R)A-4
NetBIOS/NetBEUI (GS)4-2
NetWare (GS)4-2
Banner page jobs do not print (O)6-30
Configuration, Ethernet port (GS)4-12
Configuration, network (GS)4-18
Network 1 menu (R)4-31
Network 2 menu (R)4-31
Network interface (R)6-37
Installing (R)6-39
Kit (R)6-39
Using (R)6-43
New Flash Image menu (R)6-75
Next key (GS)5-6
Nibble mode, parallel (R)5-31
Non-volatile memory (R)5-12
Novell NetWare
See NetWare
NV RAM (R)5-13, (R)G-10
O
Object (R)C-6
Oblique (R)3-6
Offset, image, configuring (R)4-55
Omega (R)6-34
Online/Offline key (GS)5-5, (GS)5-6
Operator Control menu (R)4-5
Chain Inputbins menu (R)4-41
Multipurpose Sz menu (R)4-43
Network 1 (R)4-31
Network 2 (R)4-31
Orientation menu (R)4-43
Passwords (R)4-53
Optional accessories
Cards (R)6-16, (R)6-18
Cassette supporter (O)3-4, (R)6-9
Cassette, 500-sheet (GS)1-15
Configuring (R)4-52
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
CrownNet interface (GS)1-17
Documentation, optional (GS)1-5
Emulations (GS)1-16
Ethernet interface (GS)1-17, (R)6-37
Font cards (GS)1-16, (R)6-15
Fonts (GS)1-16
Hard disk, external (GS)1-17, (R)B-13
Hard disk, internal (GS)1-17, (R)B-13
HP ProCollection (GS)1-16
IDE board (R)B-13
IDE hard disk (R)6-61
IDE-SCSI disk drive board (GS)1-17
Intellifonts (GS)1-16
Interface, menu (R)4-31
Internal hard disk (R)6-61
Kanji hard disk (GS)1-16
Kanji option kit (R)6-73
LocalTalk interface (GS)1-17, (R)6-37,
(R)6-39
Memory (GS)1-14
Network interface (R)6-37
Paper cassette, 500-sheet (GS)1-15
Paper cassettes (R)6-3
Paper feeder (O)3-4, (R)6-4
Paper output ramp (GS)1-17, (R)6-14
Printer (GS)1-14
RAM (GS)1-14
SCSI hard disk (R)6-65
SCSI-IDE board (R)6-55
Security card (GS)1-16, (R)6-18
Security cards (R)6-15
SIMMs (GS)1-14, (R)6-25
Token-Ring interface (GS)1-17,
(R)6-37
Orientation
Landscape (R)3-6
Portrait (R)3-6
Orientation menu (R)4-43
Lineprinter (R)4-26
Origin menu (HP-GL) (R)4-15, (R)4-18
OS/2
CrownNet Manager installation
(GS)4-6
QMS 1660 Print System
Output ramp (R)6-14
Outputbin 1 Name menu (R)4-43
Ozone density (R)B-4
P
Page margins (R)2-4
Page Recovery menu (R)4-57
PageMaker
See Adobe and Aldus (R)6-49
Paper
3-hole-punched (O)6-29
Capacity (O)3-4
Envelope (R)B-5
Letterhead (O)2-11
Memo (O)2-11
Perforated (O)6-29
See also Media
Sizes (R)2-2
Storage (R)2-6
Transparencies (R)2-2
Types (R)2-5
Vendor (R)B-14
Weights (R)2-5
Paper cassette
250-sheet (GS)1-15
500-sheet (GS)1-15, (R)6-12
Chaining (O)3-4
Dual (R)6-12
Installing (GS)2-11
Optional (R)6-3
See also Cassette, Inputbin, Tray
Standard (O)2-3
Paper feeder (R)6-4, (R)6-8
Installing (R)6-4
Removing (R)6-8
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-15
Paper jam
Message stays on (O)6-22
Status message (O)6-9
See also Jams
Paper output ramp (GS)1-17, (R)6-14
Paper path (O)2-12
Paper size mismatch
Status message (O)6-10, (O)6-22
Paper size mismatch error (O)2-6
Paper Type menu (HP-GL) (R)4-16,
(R)4-18
Parallel
Byte mode (R)5-30
Compatibility mode (R)5-31
Data Bits menu (R)4-31
Def Job Prio menu (R)4-32
ECP mode (R)5-31
Emulation menu (R)4-32
End Job Mode menu (R)4-32
Enhanced Compatibility Port mode
(R)5-31
Enhanced Parallel Port mod (R)5-31
EPP mode (R)5-31
Menu (R)4-31
Min K Spool menu (R)4-33
Mode menu (R)4-33
Modes (R)5-30
Nibble mode (R)5-31
Parameters, setting (R)4-31
PS Protocol menu (R)4-34
Spool Timeout menu (R)4-34
Parallel port (GS)3-4
Connection (GS)3-4
IEEE 1284 cable pinouts (R)B-7
System software, downloading
(R)6-83, (R)6-88
Legend
GS
O
R
I-16
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Testing communication (O)6-13
Parallel protocol (R)5-24
Parity
Errors, ignore (R)4-37
Ignore errors (R)4-37
Serial (R)4-39
Parity menu
Serial (R)4-39
Passwords (R)4-53
Enabling (R)4-54
Invalid (R)4-54
Selecting (R)4-53
Using (R)4-54
PC
Applications (GS)3-6
Driver (GS)3-6
PS Executive Series Utilities (GS)3-6
Software (GS)3-6
System software, updating (R)6-75
Testing communication, parallel port
(O)6-13
Testing communication, serial port
(O)6-15
Troubleshooting (O)6-20
PC/AT
See IBM PC
PC/XT
See IBM PC
PCL 4
DOC (R)C-5
PCL 5 (R)3-10
Collation (O)3-8
Default Font Index menu (R)4-19
Default Font menu (R)4-18
DOC (R)C-3, (R)C-5, (R)C-8
Downld Location menu (R)4-19
Error codes (O)6-13
Font (R)C-5
Font index number (R)C-6
Fonts (R)3-9
Fonts, scalable (R)4-22
Fonts, temporary, retaining (R)4-21
Intellifont font list (R)6-33
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Intellifont SIMM (R)6-30
Line Termination menu (R)4-20
Lines/Inch x100 (R)4-20
Macros, temporary, retaining (R)4-21
Monochrome HP-GL/2 menu (R)4-20
Object (R)C-6
Parameters, setting (R)4-18
Point Size x 100 menu (R)4-21
Resource (R)C-7
Retain Temporary menu (R)4-21
Scalable Fonts menu (R)4-22
Symbol Set menu (R)4-23
Terminology (R)C-5
PDX (R)6-49, (R)6-50
Pen 1 - Pen 8 menu (HP-GL) (R)4-16
Perforated paper (O)6-29
PhotoShop (GS)3-8, (R)6-51
Physical characteristics
Dimensions (R)B-5
Physical memory (R)5-13
Pinouts
IBM PC/XT (R)B-10
Pinouts, cable
Centronics cable pinouts (R)B-7
Ethernet, 10Base2 BNC (R)B-12
Ethernet, 10BaseT RJ45 (R)B-12
IBM PC/AT (R)B-10
IBM PC/XT (R)B-10
LocalTalk (R)B-11
Macintosh-to-serial (R)B-11
Serial (R)B-9
Pitch (R)3-5
Placing a service call (O)6-35
Plotter menu (HP-GL) (R)4-17
Point size (R)3-5
Point Size x 100 menu (PCL5) (R)4-21
Point Sz 100ths menu (Lineprinter)
(R)4-26
Portrait orientation (R)3-6
Postcards
Storage (R)2-6
Type (R)2-5
Weight (R)2-5
QMS 1660 Print System
PostScript
DOC (R)C-4
Emulation Level menu (R)4-27
Error Handler (O)6-30, (R)4-60
Errors (O)6-30
Fonts, allocating memory (R)4-50
Heap (R)4-51
Job does not print (O)6-24
Level 1 (R)4-27
Level 1 problems (O)6-24
Level 2 (R)4-27
Parameters, setting (R)4-27
Printing mode (R)5-2
Timeout (R)4-66
PostScript font cache (R)5-18
PostScript heap (R)5-18
PostScript menu
Gamma Correction (R)4-28
PostScript operators
setgray (R)5-7
setscreen (R)5-6
showpage (O)6-13
PostScript VM (R)5-18
Power
Conservation (R)4-58
Cord, connecting (GS)2-15
Requirements (GS)2-3
PPD file (R)6-49, (R)6-50
PrePrint
See Aldus
Previous key (GS)5-6
Print density (O)5-3
Uneven (O)6-34
Print job
Cancelling (O)3-10, (O)3-11
Print media
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-17
Preventing jams (O)2-2
See Media
Print problems (O)4-2
Print quality
Cleaning (O)4-4
Density adjustment (O)5-3
Distortions (O)6-32
Gamma correction (O)5-4, (R)5-4
Halftones (R)5-4
Problems (O)6-32, (O)6-33
Resolution (O)5-2
Screen angles (R)5-6
Uneven blacks (O)6-32
White lines (O)6-32
Wrinkled pages (O)2-2
Print resolution
See Resolution
Printer
Cleaning (O)4-2, (O)4-4
Commands (DOC) (R)C-4
Electrical requirements (R)B-4
Features (GS)1-7
Lifting (O)4-2
Memory (R)4-51
Physical characteristics (R)B-5
Problem checklist (O)6-18
Removing Covers (R)6-20
Replacing covers (R)6-23
Start-up options (R)4-59
Printer drivers
Macintosh (R)6-45
PC (GS)3-6
PostScript emulation (GS)3-6
Windows (GS)3-6
Printing
Blank pages (O)6-28
Q
Legend
GS
O
R
I-18
Environments (R)5-13
Incomplete jobs (O)6-30
Modes (R)5-2
Two-sided (O)3-4
Printing status
Status message (O)6-10
PrintMonitor (R)6-47
Priority
See Interface, priority
Problem checklist
Print quality (O)6-33
Problems
Checklist (O)6-18
Print quality (O)6-32
Troubleshooting (O)6-22
Proportional spacing (R)3-4
Protocol (O)6-21
Troubleshooting (O)6-21
PS Executive Series Utilities (GS)3-6,
(R)6-45
Configuration, printer (R)4-3
Conserve Toner option (R)4-58
Image alignment (R)2-3
PS heap (R)5-18
PS Protocol (R)4-39, (R)5-33
PS protocol (R)5-31
Advantages (R)5-34
Implementation (R)5-34
Quoted character (R)5-32
PS Protocol menu
LocalTalk (R)6-54
Parallel (R)4-34
Serial (R)4-39
PS Wail Timeout menu (R)4-66
Put size paper in input bin
Status message (O)6-10
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
QBinary (R)5-33
Q-FAX (GS)3-7, (GS)A-2, (O)A-2, (R)A-2
QMS
Bulletin board (GS)3-7
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Customer Response Center (CRC)
(GS)A-4, (O)A-4, (R)A-4
National Service (GS)A-4, (O)A-4,
(R)A-4
Q-FAX (GS)3-7
Registration, printer (GS)2-5
QMS Crown Remote Console User’s
Guide (GS)1-4, (GS)1-5
QMS CrownNet Interface System
Administrator’s Guide (GS)1-3
QMS EOD (R)4-36, (R)5-25
QMSPS.DRV, troubleshooting (O)6-24
QSCRIPT.DRV, troubleshooting
(O)6-24
Quality problems (O)6-32
QuarkXPress (GS)3-9, (R)5-8, (R)6-50
Quick configuration
See Frame buffer
R
Radiation (R)D-2
RAM (R)5-11
NV RAM (R)5-13, (R)G-10
RAM disk (R)5-12
Random Access Memory (R)5-11
Rcv Sw Flow Ctl menu (serial) (R)4-39
Read-Only Memory (R)5-11
Reboot Now? message (R)4-10
Refilled toner cartridges (O)2-13
Registration, printer (GS)2-5
Remote Console
Configuration, printer (R)4-4
QMS Crown Remote Console User’s
Guide (GS)1-4, (GS)1-5
Removal
Font, optional (R)6-70
Paper feeder (R)6-8
Resident fonts
HP PCL fonts (R)3-9, (R)3-10
Resolution (O)5-2, (R)5-6
1200x600 dpi unavailable (O)6-27
600x600 dpi unavailable (O)6-27
QMS 1660 Print System
Changing (O)3-2
Gray levels (R)5-6
Setting (R)4-57
Resource (R)C-7
Retain Temporary menu (PCL5)
(R)4-21
Reverse Image menu (HP-GL) (R)4-17
RJ45
See Ethernet
ROM (R)5-11
Flash (R)5-13
Roman Extensions symbol set
(HP-GL) (R)3-10
S
Sans serif typefaces (R)3-3
Scalable font (R)3-5, (R)G-15
Scalable Fonts menu (PCL5) (R)4-22
Scaling Percent menu (HP-GL) (R)4-18
Scandinavian symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
Schoolbook
New Century Schoolbook (R)3-3
Screen angle (R)5-6
Screen fonts
Macintosh (R)6-45
Screen frequency (R)5-5, (R)5-6
Script typefaces (R)3-3
SCSI (R)5-12
SCSI hard disks (R)6-65
Identifying (R)6-65
Specs (R)B-13
SCSI-IDE board (R)6-55
See IDE-SCSI board
Security card (GS)1-16, (R)6-15,
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-19
(R)6-18
Select key (GS)5-6
Separator
See Adobe
Serial
Baud Rate menu (R)4-35
Data Bits menu (R)4-35
Def Job Prio menu (R)4-36
Emulation menu (R)4-36
End Job Mode menu (R)4-36
Hardware control (R)4-37
Hdwe Flow Ctl menu (R)4-37
Ignore Par. Err. menu (R)4-37
Menu (R)4-35
Min K Spool menu (R)4-38
Mode menu (R)4-38
Parameters, setting (R)4-35
Parity menu (R)4-39
PS Protocol menu (R)4-39
Rcv Sw Flow Ctl menu (R)4-39
Software control, receive (R)4-39
Spool Timeout menu (R)4-40
Stop Bits menu (R)4-40
Xmit software flow control menu
(R)4-40
Serial port
Cable pinouts (R)B-9
Configuration (O)6-16
Connection (GS)3-5
Parameters (O)6-15
Parameters, changing (O)6-16
System software, downloading
(R)6-84, (R)6-89
Testing communication (O)6-15
Serial protocol (R)5-24
Serif typefaces (R)3-3
Legend
GS
O
R
I-20
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Service call
Placing (O)6-35
Service, QMS
National Service (GS)A-4, (O)A-4,
(R)A-4
United States (GS)A-4, (O)A-4, (R)A-4
World-wide (GS)A-5, (O)A-5, (R)A-5
setgray (R)5-7
setscreen (R)5-6
Shipment
Contents (GS)2-4
Unpacking (GS)2-5
showpage operator (PostScript)
(O)6-13
Signal direction (R)B-8
SIMM (R)5-12, (R)6-25
Installing (R)6-26
Intellifont (R)6-30
Removing (R)6-28
Simultaneous Interface Operation
(R)5-2
Single In-line Memory Modules
(SIMMs) (R)6-25
SIO (R)5-2
Size
Media, selecting (R)4-44
SLS (GS)1-13
Small Computer System Interface
See SCSI
Smudges, toner (O)6-34
Software
Macintosh (R)6-45
PC (GS)3-6
System, printer (GS)1-13
Software flow control (R)4-40
Receive (R)4-39
Transmit (R)4-40
Software Loadable System (SLS)
(GS)1-13
Sofware
Macintosh (R)6-50
Spanish/Latin symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Special pages
Calibration page (R)4-62
Header pages (R)4-62
Status page (R)4-61
Trailer pages (R)4-63
Special Pages menu (R)4-61
Header Inputbin menu (R)4-63
Header Page menu (R)4-62
Status Page Type menu (R)4-61
Trailer Inputbin menu (R)4-64
Trailer Pages menu (R)4-63
Special Symbols symbol set (HP-GL)
(R)3-10
Specifications
Controller (R)B-3
Duty cycle (R)B-2
Emulations (R)B-3
Memory (R)B-3
Ozone density (R)B-4
Print engine (R)B-2
Print Media (R)B-5
Print method (R)B-2
Print speed (R)B-2
Resolution (R)B-2
SIMMs (R)B-13
Toner (R)B-2
Toner cartridge (R)B-2
Warm-up time (R)B-2
Spool (R)5-13
Spool buffers (R)5-20
Spool Timeout menu
Parallel (R)4-34
Serial (R)4-40
Spooling
Memory (R)4-38
Memory, allocating (R)4-51
Min K Spool menu (R)4-33, (R)6-53
Timeout (R)4-40
Stain (O)6-34
Standard status page (R)4-61
Start-up options (R)4-59
Startup Options menu
Do Error Handler menu (R)4-60
QMS 1660 Print System
Do Start Page menu (R)4-59
Do Sys Start menu (R)4-60
Start-up Page menu (R)4-59
Start-up page
Disabling (GS)2-17
Enabling (GS)2-17
Information (GS)2-16
Printing (GS)2-16
Troubleshooting (O)6-31
Status message
Active jobs (O)6-9
Adjust Inputbin bin (O)6-9
Cancelling job (O)6-9
Close engine door (O)6-9
Control panel (O)6-9
Engine error 2 (O)6-12
Engine error 3 (O)6-12
Engine error 4 (O)6-12
Engine error 6 (O)6-12
Engine error 7 (O)6-12
Format failed (R)4-29
Hard disks (R)6-67
HP-GL error codes (O)6-12
Idle (O)6-9
Idle input printing (O)6-9
Initializing (O)6-9
Message window (O)6-9
Off line (O)6-9
Paper jam (O)6-9
Paper size mismatch (O)6-10
PCL error codes (O)6-13
Printing status (O)6-10
Priority (O)6-9
Put size paper in input bin (O)6-10
Reboot Now? (R)4-10
See also Error messages
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-21
Test print (O)6-10
Toner absent (O)6-10
Toner out (O)6-10
Waiting for idle (O)6-10
Waiting on input end job (O)6-11
Warming up (O)6-11
Status page
Advanced (R)4-61
Printing (O)3-9, (R)4-61
Standard (R)4-61
Troubleshooting (O)6-18, (O)6-31
Type (R)4-61
Status Page key (GS)5-5, (R)4-61
Status Page Type menu (R)4-61
Stempel
See Garamond (Stempel)
Stop Bits menu (serial) (R)4-40
Storage
Hard disks (R)6-55
IDE (R)5-12
Media (R)2-6
Memory (R)5-11
SCSI (R)5-12
SCSI-IDE board (R)6-55
Stroke weight (R)3-6
Support, QMS
Bulletin board (GS)A-3, (O)A-3, (R)A-3
Customer (GS)A-2, (O)A-2, (R)A-2
Internet (GS)A-3, (O)A-3, (R)A-3
Technical (GS)A-4, (O)A-4, (R)A-4
United States (GS)A-4, (O)A-4, (R)A-4
World-wide (GS)A-5, (O)A-5, (R)A-5
Swap file (R)4-48
Symbol (R)3-8
Symbol set menu (PCL5) (R)4-23
Symbol sets
Legend
GS
O
R
I-22
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
HP-GL (R)3-10
See HP-GL symbol sets
SYS (internal hard disk) (R)6-61
SYSSTART file (R)4-60
System memory (R)5-22
System software (GS)1-13
Downloading via parallel port (R)6-83,
(R)6-88
Downloading via serial port (R)6-84,
(R)6-89
Updating (R)6-75
System Use (R)4-51, (R)5-22
T
Tab Stops menu (Lineprinter) (R)4-27
TCP/IP (GS)4-2
Configuration, Ethernet port (GS)4-13
Configuration, network (GS)4-19
Technical support, QMS (GS)A-4,
(O)A-4, (R)A-4
Temperature requirements (R)B-4
Temporary emulation (R)5-19
Test print
Status message (O)6-10
Testing communication
AppleTalk (R)6-50
Macintosh (R)6-50
Parallel port (O)6-13
Serial port (O)6-15
Thin-wire Ethernet (GS)4-3
Timeout settings (O)3-9
Timeouts (R)4-64
ESP (R)4-65
Job (R)4-66
Manual feed (R)4-65
PostScript (R)4-66
Spooling (R)4-40
Timeouts menu
Emul Timeout (R)4-64
ESP Timeouts menu (R)4-65
Job Timeout menu (R)4-66
PS Wait Timeout (R)4-66
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index
Times Roman (R)6-34
Token-Ring, optional interface
(GS)1-17, (R)6-37
Toner
Configuration options (R)4-58
Conserving (O)2-13, (R)4-58
Smudges (O)6-34
Toner out action (R)4-58
Toner absent
Status message (O)6-10
Toner cartridge
Install (O)2-16
Installing (GS)2-8
Life (O)2-12
Life, extending (O)2-13
Model EP-B (R)B-2
Refilled (O)2-13
Replacing (O)2-14
Storage (O)2-12
Toner out
Status message (O)6-10
Toner Out Act. menu (R)4-58
Trailer Inputbin menu (R)4-64
Trailer pages (R)4-63
DOC (R)C-2
Menu (R)4-63
Source, specifying (R)4-64
Transparencies
Print (O)2-12
Printing (O)2-11
Storage (R)2-6
Type (R)2-5
Vendor (R)B-14
vendor (R)B-14
Weight (R)2-5
Tray assembly (R)6-20, (R)6-23
Troubleshooting
1200x600 dpi resolution unavailable
(O)6-27
600x600 dpi resolution unavailable
(O)6-27
Binary data printing problem (O)6-28
Blank pages (O)6-28
QMS 1660 Print System
Data indicator (O)6-19, (O)6-22
Emulation error (O)6-24
EOD problems (O)6-29
ESP (O)6-20
Fonts, downloading (O)6-25
Hard disk (O)6-26
Hard disk, Kanji (O)6-25
Image orientation problem (O)6-30
Incomplete Jobs (O)6-30
Intellifonts (O)6-26
Kanji hard disk (O)6-25
LaserWriter 8.x driver (O)6-23
Limit check error (Macintosh) (O)6-21
Macintosh applications (O)6-32
Multiple pages problem (O)6-29
NetWare banner page jobs (O)6-30
Paper jam message (O)6-22
Paper size mismatch (O)6-22
PC (O)6-20
PostScript emulation (O)6-24
PostScript printing problems (O)6-24
Printer resets (O)6-32
Problem checklist (O)6-18
Protocol (O)6-21
QMSPS.DRV (O)6-24
QSCRIPT.DRV (O)6-24
Service calls (O)6-35
Start-up page (O)6-31
Status page (O)6-18, (O)6-31
Windows driver (O)6-24
Twisted-pair Ethernet (GS)4-3
Two-sided printing (O)3-4
Typeface (R)3-2
Card (R)6-17, (R)6-18
Courier (R)3-8, (R)3-9, (R)6-33
Defined (R)3-2
Legend
GS
O
R
—Master
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Index
I-23
Downloading (O)6-22, (O)6-32
Family (R)3-2
Helvetica (R)3-8
Italic (R)3-6
ITC Bookman (R)3-8
ITC Zapf Chancery (R)3-8
ITC Zapf Dingbats (R)3-8
LinePrinter (R)3-9
Monospacing (R)3-4
Oblique (R)3-6
Pitch (R)3-5
Point size (R)3-5
Proportional spacing (R)3-4
Sans serif (R)3-3
Script (R)3-3
Serif (R)3-3
Stroke weight (R)3-6
Symbol (R)3-8
Times (R)3-9
Univers Condensed (R)3-9
Zapf Dingbats (R)3-9
Typographic conventions (GS)1-6,
(O)1-3, (R)1-4
U
Univers (R)6-34
Univers Condensed (R)6-34
UNIX
Utilities, installation (GS)4-8
Unpacking, printer (GS)2-5
Updating system software (R)6-75
Using the EOD commands (R)5-25
V
Vendor
Labels (R)B-14
Paper (R)B-14
Transparencies (R)B-14
Vertical Offset menu (R)4-55
Virtual disk (R)5-12
Virtual memory (R)5-13, (R)5-18,
(R)5-22
Volatile memory (R)5-12
W
Waiting for idle
Status message (O)6-10
Waiting on input end job
Status message (O)6-11
Warming up
Status message (O)6-11
Warning
Front upper door (O)6-7
Printer, turn off (R)6-36
Warning buzzer (R)4-57
Warranty (R)B-14
White lines (O)6-35
Window driver (GS)3-6
Windows
CrownAdmin software (GS)4-10
Windows driver
Troubleshooting (O)6-24
Write Error message (R)6-67
X
Xmit Sw Flow Ctl menu (serial)
Serial (R)4-40
Z
Legend
GS
O
R
I-24
Getting Started manual
Operation manual
Reference manual
Zapf Chancery
ITC Zapf Chancery (R)3-3
Zapf Dingbats
ITC Zapf Dingbats (R)3-3
v
QMS 1660E Print System
—Master
Index